JP2020141954A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a slot machine capable of progressing a game smoothly.SOLUTION: In a game in which a special replay is won and AT is won during an advantageous section (normal), a section display LED lights up when a stop switch is operated in pressing order and at operation timing corresponding to a 7-aligned replay and hence triple-seven is derived. In a game in which a special replay is won and AT is won during an advantageous section (normal), a section display LED lights up when triple-seven is not derived by power interruption regardless of operation of a stop switch in pressing order and at operation timing corresponding to a 7-aligned replay. In a game in which losing is won during an advantageous section (normal), lights-out is maintained without lighting a section display LED when triple-seven is derived by power interruption.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 68

Description

The present invention is provided with a variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each, and after the variable display unit is variablely displayed, the variable display of the variable display unit is stopped to derive a display result. , The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result.

A slot machine generally has a variable display unit having reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn as identification information on the outer peripheral portion, and a start switch is operated in a state where a predetermined bet number is set. When the reel starts to rotate and the stop switch is operated to stop the rotation of the reel, a predetermined symbol combination on the winning line (for example, 7-7-7, hereinafter, the symbol combination is displayed as a combination of display results, or A prize is generated by deriving a role).

The types of roles include small roles, special roles, and replay roles. Here, when the display result corresponding to the small winning combination is derived on the winning line, a number of medals determined for each type of small winning combination is paid out. When the display result corresponding to the special role is derived on the winning line, the state can be shifted to a special state advantageous for the player such as a regular bonus (RB) or a big bonus (BB). When the display result corresponding to the replay combination is derived on the winning line, the next game can be played without consuming a new medal for setting the bet number.

As such a slot machine, there is one that controls the rotation and stop of the reel by using a stepping motor to derive a predetermined pattern according to the operation of the stop switch (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-100810

In the slot machine described above, there was room for improvement regarding the smooth progress of the game.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine capable of smoothly advancing a game.

(1) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be individually identified is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means for determining a display result that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13)) and
It is provided with a derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) that is operated to derive the display result.
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined determination result (for example, a special replay winning), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, a timing of reverse pushing and pulling 7 symbols onto the winning line LN). When a predetermined display result (for example, 7 sets) is derived by operating the derivation operation means in the above, a specific process (for example, lighting of the section display LED 19) is executed (for example, pattern 1 shown in FIG. 69). Example),
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the out-licensing operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. As a result, even when the predetermined display result is not derived, the specific process is executed (for example, the example of the pattern 2 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 70 and 72).
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (for example, a loss winning), when the predetermined display result is derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped. The specific process is not executed (for example, the example of pattern 4 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 74 and 76).
The specific process is a process of lighting an advantageous lighting unit (for example, section display LED 19) related to an advantageous state (for example, AT) controlled by a game control means (for example, main control unit 41) that controls the game.
After the power supply to the slot machine is restarted, before the operation related to the progress of the game becomes effective, the lighting mode of the advantageous lighting unit can be visually recognized based on the operation before the power interruption supply is stopped. The process is executed.

It is a front view of the slot machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the medal selector. It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM and RAM of a main control part. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area and a non-game area. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the payout state. It is a figure for demonstrating the type of a winning combination, the symbol combination of a winning combination, and the giving at the time of winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the winning combination read out as the lottery target combination for each game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of winning a push order combination. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the initial setting process performed by a main control part. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the main processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the main processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the main processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the continuous data processing performed by a main control part. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the continuous data processing performed by a main control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the continuous data processing table. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the medal insertion signal processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the medal sensor processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the medal sensor check process performed by the main control unit. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the state transition of the medal insertion signal which determines the normal passage of a medal in the medal insertion signal processing and the medal sensor check processing. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the ball ejection control processing performed by a main control part. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the operation information output processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the reel stop control processing performed by a main control part. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the data processing for role ratio monitor performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of each state count processing performed by a main control part. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of a timer interrupt process performed by a main control part. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the time monitoring update processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the sensor monitoring process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the sensor monitoring process performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the test signal output processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of a timer update process performed by a main control part. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the display monitor output data selection process performed by a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the display monitor output data selection process performed by a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the control content of the counter update processing performed by a main control part. This is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the notification while the section display LED is lit. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing (sub) performed by a sub-control unit. It is a flowchart of the payout number counter set processing performed by a sub-control unit. It is a flowchart of the number display control process performed by a sub-control unit. It is a flowchart of the number display update control process performed by a sub-control unit. It is a flowchart of the extinguishing control process performed by a sub-control unit. It is a flowchart of the prize-winning effect execution processing performed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the operation timing in the left reel. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel control when it is pushed forward during CB. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel control when it is pushed back during CB. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel control when it is pushed forward during BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel control when it is pushed back during BB. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect (1st aspect) in CB. It is a figure which shows the setting suggestion effect mode determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the production at the time of CB rush. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of selecting a CB effect. It is explanatory drawing about the production in CB and the flow of various displays. It is explanatory drawing about the production in CB and the flow of various displays. It is explanatory drawing about the production in CB and the flow of various displays. It is explanatory drawing about the production in CB and the flow of various displays. It is explanatory drawing about the production in CB and the flow of various displays. It is explanatory drawing about the production in CB and the flow of various displays. It is explanatory drawing about the production in CB and the flow of various displays. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of result notification during freeze. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of result notification during freeze. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect at the time of selecting an RT effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a prize-winning production. It is a figure which shows an example of a prize-winning production. It is a figure which shows an example of a prize-winning production. It is a timing chart of processing by a main control part and a sub control part. It is a figure for demonstrating various patterns about production and processing depending on the presence or absence of a power failure. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 1. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 2. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 2. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 2. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 3. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 4. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 4. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 4. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 5. This is a timing chart for explaining the start timing of the winning notification effect in the game in which the power failure does not occur. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 6. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 6. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 6. This is a timing chart for explaining the start timing of the winning notification effect after the power failure is restored in the game in which the power failure occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 7. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 8. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 8. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 8. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 9. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 10. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 10. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 10. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 11. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 12. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 12. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect and processing in pattern 12.

A mode for carrying out the slot machine according to the present invention will be described based on the following examples. It should be noted that the slot machine 1 is configured to achieve the purpose of smoothly advancing the game, and it is said that the game can be smoothly advanced by various configurations, various processes, or various effects described below. It works. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[Configuration of slot machine 1]
FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a design arrangement of reels. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 includes a front door 1b rotatably and pivotally supported at a side end of a housing 1a having a front opening. Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other are arranged in the same number in a predetermined order are arranged in the horizontal direction. Three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged side by side in three stages of upper, middle, and lower in the see-through window 3 provided in the substantially center of the front of the slot machine 1. It is displayed and arranged so that it can be seen from the player side.

Each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotated by a correspondingly provided reel motor. When the reel 2 is rotated by the reel motor, the symbols arranged on the reel 2 are continuously changed and displayed (variable display) on the perspective window 3. Further, when the rotation of the reel motor is stopped and the rotation of the reel 2 is stopped, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the perspective window 3 as a display result. When all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, a plurality of display results are derived and a display result combination, which is a combination of the plurality of display results, is derived and displayed on the perspective window 3. Hereinafter, the display result combination and the display result derived and displayed on the perspective window 3 are also referred to as a stop roll and a symbol combination, respectively. Further, among the display results derived and displayed through the perspective window 3, the symbol arrangement visible at the top is referred to as an upper row, the symbol arrangement visible in the center is referred to as a middle row, and the symbol arrangement visible at the bottom is also referred to as a lower row.

In the present embodiment, 21 areas divided by the number of steps (8 steps) in which one symbol moves are defined in each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. One of these 21 areas is referred to as "1 frame", and the number of movements (number of fluctuations) of the symbol accompanying the rotation of the reel is referred to as "number of frames". Each of these 21 regions is assigned a symbol number from 0 to 20 from a predetermined "reel origin position" on the reel, and a symbol of the type shown in FIG. 2 is arranged in each of them. The numbers provided in the left column in FIG. 2 are symbol numbers. For example, the 20th symbol of the left reel 2L is "7".

Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R rotates from the upper stage to the lower stage so that each symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the symbol No. 20 in FIG. 2 passes through the upper stage of the perspective window 3 and then passes through the middle stage and the lower stage. In other words, while the reel 2 is rotating, the symbols 1, 2, 3 ... 20 pass through the middle stage of the see-through window 3 in order from 0, and after the 20th symbol passes, the number 0. The symbol passes.

The rotation of the reel motor is performed by operating each of the left stop switch 8L, the middle stop switch 8C, and the right stop switch 8R (hereinafter collectively referred to as the stop switch 8 or the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) provided on the front door. Stop by. In other words, the stop switch 8 functions as a derivation operation means operated when the rotation of the reel is stopped. Further, each of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is associated with each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and when the left stop switch 8L is operated, the left reel 2L is stopped and the middle stop switch 8C is operated. When this is done, the middle reel 2C is stopped, and when the right stop switch 8R is operated, the right reel 2R is stopped.

In the present embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels are also possible. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit for variably displaying the symbol is configured by the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, but the variable display unit may be other than the reel, for example, a plurality of variable display units on the outer peripheral surface. A configuration in which the symbol can be displayed in a variable manner by moving the belt on which the symbol is arranged may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display unit may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a medal insertion section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player-owned game value) ) Is used to set the maximum bet number among the specified number of bets (3 in the present embodiment) determined according to the gaming state within that range, and the MAXBET switch 6 and medals are operated. Settlement switch 10, which is operated when the medals stored as and the medals used for setting the bet number are settled (the medals used for setting the credit and the bet number are returned), when the game is started. The player operates the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which are operated when the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and the production switch 56, which is operated by the player during the production. Each is provided as possible.

In front of the slot machine 1, side lamps 27 composed of a plurality of LEDs are provided next to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Further, in the vicinity of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reels are provided corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are irradiated with light from the back side or the side of the reels. Backlights 28L, 28C, 28C (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "reel backlight 28") are provided. Further, a speaker 53 that outputs sound is provided above the liquid crystal display 51.

Further, the front door 1b is provided with an advantageous middle lamp 60 indicating that the bonus (CB, BB described later) is being controlled above the liquid crystal display 51. The sub-control unit 91 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the advantageous middle lamp 60.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the contents when an error occurs are shown. A game auxiliary display 12 that displays an error code and operation information (navigation display) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, 1 BETLED 14 that notifies by lighting that the bet number is set to 1. 2BETLED15 that notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set to 2, 3BETLED16 that notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set to 3, and the inside where special roles (BB and CB in this embodiment) are carried over A status display LED 17 that notifies by lighting that the game is controlled to the middle state, a start effective LED 18 that notifies by lighting that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective, and an advantageous section (advantageous section AT) A game display unit 13 including a section display LED 19 that notifies by lighting that the game is controlled in the advantageous section special zone) and a replay LED 20 that notifies that the replay game is in progress by lighting is provided.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch effective LED21 (see FIG. 3) is provided to notify by lighting that the betting number setting operation by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is effective, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, there are left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 3) that light up to notify that the operation of stopping the reel by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. It is provided.

Inside the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, there is a reset switch 23 that detects a reset operation for canceling an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by a predetermined key operation, and the set value is being changed or the set value is being confirmed. The set value indicator 24 that displays the set value at that time, the door open detection switch 25 that detects the open state of the front door 1b, and the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are inside the slot machine 1. The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the hopper tank side or the medal payout outlet 9 side, which will be described later, and the medal insertion section 4 are provided to detect medals that are inserted from the hopper tank side and flow down to the hopper tank side. A medal selector 29 having inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is provided.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, control from the reel unit 34 and the main control unit 41 for rotating or stopping the reels 2L, 2C, 2R described above in response to a control signal from the main control unit 41. A hopper unit 35 for paying out medals from the medal payout outlet 9 in response to a signal is provided.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, it functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state in a normal state, and will be described later in the setting change state. A reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery, and a power switch (not shown) that is operated when the power is turned on / off are provided. There is.

Inside the slot machine 1, when the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a 7-segment display is formed below the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. The game machine information display 50 to be played is arranged. In the game machine information display 50, the display contents can be visually recognized from the outside of the board case in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in a board case (not shown), and the display contents are totaled by the main control unit 41. The clerk or the like can recognize the game information based on the game history in the slot machine 1 displayed on the game machine information display 50.

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The game control board 40 controls the game, and the effect control board 90 controls the game. The production is controlled according to the above.

The game control board 40 includes the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the input medal sensor 31, the reel sensor (not shown) of the reel unit 34, and the hopper. The payout sensor and full tank sensor (not shown) of the unit 35, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals of these connected switches and the like are input.

Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1 to 3 BETLED 14 to 16, status display LED 17, start effective LED 18, section display LED 19, replaying LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left. , Middle, right stop effective LED 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel unit 34, hopper unit 35 are connected, and these electrical components and the game control board 40 are mounted. The game machine information display 50 is driven based on the control of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40.

The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer provided with a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d (all of which are not shown), and is equipped with a main control unit 41 that controls the game.

The main control unit 41 includes a plurality of registers used by the main CPU 41a to perform operations. The plurality of registers include registers such as an accumulator register, a flag register, a general-purpose register, an index register, an interrupt register, a refresh register, and a program counter. Further, among these registers, the accumulator register, the flag register, and the general-purpose register include a front register and a back register configured to be paired with each other (hereinafter, the front register and the back register may be simply referred to as registers). is there). The main CPU 41a updates the value of a predetermined register by executing various instructions such as an arithmetic instruction and a read instruction included in the program, and stores the RAM specified by the value (address) of the predetermined register. It is possible to update the value (data) stored in the area.

Further, among the registers included in the main control unit 41, the flag register is configured so that its state changes so as to indicate the calculation result of the instruction executed by the main CPU 41a, and the change in the state of the flag register is used. Then, the main CPU 41a can be made to perform the processing according to the calculation result by the previous instruction.

Further, the flag register is composed of a plurality of bits (8 bits in this embodiment), and the plurality of bits are used for arithmetic instructions executed by the main CPU 41a in order to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 41a. The state changes according to the result, but the first bit (hereinafter, the first zero flag) configured so that the state does not change with a specific instruction (for example, a read instruction LD (hereinafter, may be referred to as an LD instruction)). The state changes according to the calculation result of the operation instruction, and the second bit (hereinafter, may be referred to as the second zero flag TZ) configured to change the state even with a specific instruction. ) Etc. are included. In each process included in the game program described later, when proceeding with the process based on the instruction, the determination or the like is performed by referring to the value of the bit other than the second zero flag included in the flag register. , The value of the bit of the second zero flag is not referred to and judged.

Further, the main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and the command is not sent from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41.

Further, the I / O port 41d includes output ports 0 to 9, and the main control unit 41 can output control signals of reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R from output port 0 and output port 1, and output port 2 It is possible to output the control signals of the left / middle / right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, and the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the control signal of the hopper motor 34b and the external output signal can be output from the output port 3. , Output port 4 and output port 5, credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BETLED 14-16, status display LED 17, start effective LED 18, section display LED 19, replaying LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21 control signals. It is possible to output, the test signal can be output from the output port 6, the test signal and the external output signal can be output from the output port 7, and the command can be output from the output port 8 and the output port 9.

Further, the main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main processing, and changes the detection state of the various switches. The process of gradual migration is executed accordingly. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to be longer than the total time of the time in which the process repeated according to the control state in the main process completes and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). This means that the process of repeating the timer interrupt process (main) between this time and the next time according to the control state always completes at least one cycle.

In this embodiment, as an instruction that can be executed by the main control unit 41, a save instruction that saves the register values of the main control unit 41 by storing them in the stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. , The value of the register saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction is sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of the save, and set in the register corresponding to the order to set the corresponding register. Includes a return command to return the state of to the state when it was saved by the save command.

The save instruction stores the calculation result of the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c and all the registers included in the main control unit 41. It includes a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register in the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second save instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the save command in the game program, it is possible to save the register value in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and execute the save command in the non-game program. Therefore, it is possible to save the register value in the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program.

The return instruction is a first return instruction (POP ALL) that sets a value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c and restores all the registers included in the main control unit 41, and all the registers included in the main control unit 41. Among them, the flag register in which the calculation result is stored includes a second return instruction (POP AF) for setting and returning a value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first return instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second return instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the return command in the game program, the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program can be called, set in the corresponding register, and returned. It is possible, and by executing the return command in the non-game program, the value of the register saved from the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program is called, and the corresponding register is set. It is possible to set and restore.

The effect device such as the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker 53, the reel backlight 28L, 28C, 28R, the side lamp 27, and the advantageous middle lamp 60 is connected to the effect control board 90, and the output of these effect devices The state can be controlled by the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90. The sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted from the main control unit 41 and performs various controls for performing the effect.

The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel that is transparent when no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and is on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The display area is provided so as to be arranged in. Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the back side of the liquid crystal display 51 is visible from the player side through the transmission region corresponding to the perspective window 3 and the perspective window 3 in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in a lottery that affects the advantage to the player such as an internal lottery. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 39 of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the setting value 6 is further operated, the setting value is changed to 1). Return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is fixed as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (set value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b, which can be opened by a predetermined key operation, is opened. Of the clerk of the game store to be installed, only the clerk who has a predetermined key can operate it. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation, only the clerk who has the key for operating the setting key switch 37 can operate the setting key switch 37 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires a key operation using a predetermined key, so that only a clerk who possesses the predetermined key can operate the reset switch 23. Further, the reset / setting switch 38 also functions as a reset switch for canceling the error state in the normal state. In the present embodiment, operating the start switch 7 to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is also referred to as "start operation". Further, when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated by the operation of the start switch 7, the rotation of the first reel is stopped by the first operation (first operation) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. To stop the rotation of the second reel by the "first stop operation", the second operation (the second operation), the "second stop operation", and the third operation (the last operation) 3 Stopping the rotation of the third reel is also referred to as a "third stop operation". Further, the release of pressing the third stop switch (third stop operation) (that is, releasing the hand from the stop switch) is also referred to as "third stop release". Further, operating the left stop switch 8L, the middle stop switch 8C, and the right stop switch 8R in this order is "forward pressing", and operating the right stop switch 8R, the middle stop switch 8C, and the left stop switch 8L in this order is "reverse pressing". Also called.

When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or a MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set a bet number using credits. When a predetermined number of bets is set according to the game state, the predetermined winning line LN (see FIG. 1, in this embodiment, horizontally arranged in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R (Set across the symbols) is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. If more than the maximum number of medals are inserted out of the specified number corresponding to the gaming state, that amount will be added to the credit. Further, in this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are being rotated, stop control is performed for the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the rotation of the reel is performed. It is stopped, and the design of the reel is derived and displayed on the perspective window 3 as a display result. The rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped on condition that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are pressed by hand, respectively. That is, after each stop switch is manually pressed, the rotation of each reel is stopped and the symbol is led out to the perspective window 3 even if the pressing is maintained without being released.

In the stop control, when the winning of the special role (BB, CB in this embodiment) is carried over, the small role is won by the internal lottery, and the special role and the small role are won at the same time. In this case, it is possible to control the winning small winning combination symbol to be preferentially drawn into the winning line LN within the above-mentioned attraction range, and to draw the winning small winning combination symbol into the winning line LN. When it is not possible, the constituent symbols of the winning special role are controlled to be drawn into the winning line LN. For this reason, in a game in which a special role and a small role are simultaneously won, it is difficult to win the winning special role.

Further, in the stop control, when the winning of the special combination (BB, CB in this embodiment) is carried over, the re-game combination is won by the internal lottery, and the special combination and the re-game combination are simultaneously won. In such a situation, the constituent symbols of the winning re-players are prioritized and drawn into the winning line LN. The symbols that make up the re-game combination on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are arranged within a predetermined pull-in range, and when the re-game combination is won, the symbols that make up the re-game combination are always drawn into the winning line LN. Become. For this reason, in a game in which a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time, the winning special role cannot be won.

Further, in the stop control, in the game in which the winning of the special combination (BB, CB in this embodiment) is carried over and the specified number of bets corresponding to the winning special combination is set. It is possible to draw the constituent symbols of the winning special role into the winning line LN, but in a game in which a specified number of bets that do not correspond to the winning special role are set, the winning special role It is controlled so that the constituent symbols of the above are not drawn into the winning line LN. For this reason, in a game in which a special role is won, the special role will not be won if the specified number of bets corresponding to the winning special role is not set. ..

Then, one game ends when all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and a predetermined combination of winning combination symbols is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and stopped on the winning line LN. In some cases, a prize is generated, and a number of medals determined according to the prize are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the maximum number of credits (50 in this embodiment) is reached, medals are directly paid out from the medal payout outlet 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state stops on the winning line LN as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the combination of symbols is shifted to the gaming state according to the combination of symbols. There is.

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control (game control) for executing the game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the type of winning combination (hereinafter referred to as winning combination) is determined according to the game state, and it is not necessary to set a small winning combination with medal payout and a bet number. There are a re-gaming role in which a re-game that enables the start of the next game is given, and a special role that accompanies a transition to a gaming state (special state) that is advantageous to the player. In the following, the small role and the replay role are collectively referred to as the general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the game state to be won, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination. The internal lottery is performed before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, a specified number of numbers) as to whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each of the above-mentioned combinations. When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the bet number is set), it is determined by using a random number.

Of the winning flags for each combination, the winning flags for the small combination and the replay combination are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flag for the special combination is the relevant. It is valid until all the allowed combinations of combinations are available by the flag, and is invalid in the game where all the allowed combination of combinations are available. That is, once the winning flag of the special role is won, even if the combination of the winning combination permitted by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It has become.

Further, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, stop operation order (push order), operation timing), the stop operation is performed in another operation mode as compared with the case where the stop operation is performed. An advantageous small role and replaying role (hereinafter, may be referred to as a navigation target role) can be won. The navigation target combination includes, for example, a combination that is more advantageous than the stop mode in which the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode and the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Includes a combination in which, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, the rate of stopping the advantageous stop mode is higher than that in the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. Further, the advantageous stop mode includes not only a stop mode accompanied by the awarding of medals, but also a stop mode accompanied by a transition to an advantageous gaming state, a stop mode in which a transition to an unfavorable gaming state is avoided, and the like.

The main control unit 41 executes a navigation notification that notifies the navigation information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result, by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT), which is a possible notification period. The main control unit 41 starts controlling the AT and controls the AT by granting the player the right to be controlled by the AT. Then, when the AT is controlled, by winning the navigation target combination, the navigation notification is executed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (for example, the push order, which is advantageous for the player). (Operation timing, etc.) is notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command that can specify an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the operation mode is transmitted to the liquid crystal display. The navigation effect to be notified is executed by using 51 or the like. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, it is possible to reliably win the navigation target combination won in the internal lottery.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a game auxiliary display 12 capable of displaying the number of medals paid out, an error code, and navigation information, and the game auxiliary display 12 is used in controlling the navigation notification. Although the configuration is such that the navigation information is notified, a dedicated display capable of displaying only the navigation information may be provided, and the navigation information may be notified using the dedicated display in the control of the navigation notification.

[About medal selector]
The structure of the medal selector 29 arranged inside the front door 1b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the medal selector 29. In the following description, the state in which the medal selector 29 is viewed from the back surface side of the front door 1b will be described as the front side of the medal selector 29.

The medal selector 29 is configured in a rectangular parallelepiped shape as shown in FIG. 4, and an inflow port 141 through which medals can flow into the main body of the medal selector 29 is provided on the upper side wall of the main body of the medal selector 29. The left wall of the main body is provided with an outlet 142 through which medals can flow out from the inside of the main body to the outside of the hopper tank 34a, and the lower side wall of the main body is a medal payout outlet from the inside of the main body. An discharge port 143 capable of discharging medals to the outside of the 9 side is provided. Inside the main body of the medal selector 29, a medal flow flow path having a substantially L-shape in front view is formed so as to communicate from the inflow port 141 to the outflow port 142. As shown in FIGS. 4 (b) and 4 (c), the side wall of the medal flow flow path is inclined toward the front side from the lower side to the upper side so that the upper end of the flowing medal is inclined forward from the lower end. There is. Further, a medal flow flow path having a substantially S-shape in front view is formed so as to communicate from the inflow port 141 to the discharge port 143. Hereinafter, among the medal flow flow paths inside the main body of the medal selector 29, the flow path on the inflow port 141 side is the medal inflow flow path 29a, and the flow path on the outflow port 142 side is the medal acceptance flow path 29b and the discharge port 143 side. The flow path is called a medal return flow path 29c.

In the medal selector 29, the authenticity (shape, size, thickness, etc.) of the inserted medal is determined, and the genuine medal flows in from the inflow port 141 and then the main body of the medal selector 29. By flowing down the internal medal inflow flow path 29a and the medal receiving flow path 29b and passing through the detection range A of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c, after being detected by the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c, the outlet 142 Spilled from. Then, the medal is guided to the hopper tank 34a via the medal chute 142a (not shown). On the other hand, after the fake medal flows in from the inflow port 141, it is dropped into the medal return flow path 29c while flowing down the medal inflow flow path 29a, flows down the medal return flow path 29c, and flows out from the discharge port 143. To. Then, the medal is returned to the lower plate from the medal payout outlet 9 (see FIG. 1) via the medal return passage (not shown) provided below the medal selector 29.

Further, at the confluence of the medal inflow flow path 29a, the medal receiving flow path 29b, and the medal return flow path 29c, a flow path switching solenoid 30 (see FIG. 3) provided on the front side of the main body of the medal selector 29 is excited. In cooperation with each other, before the medal flowing down the medal inflow flow path 29a flows into the medal receiving flow path 29b, the medal is forcibly dropped downward from the medal inflow flow path 29a and the medal is returned. A flow path switching plate 147 for flowing into the flow path 29c is provided so as to be swingable.

In the flow path switching plate 147, as shown in FIG. 4C, the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a is open in a state where the flow path switching solenoid 30 is not excited, that is, in a state where acceptance of medals is not permitted. It is possible to swing so that the medal inflow flow path 29a and the medal return flow path 29c are in communication with each other. Further, in a state where the flow path switching solenoid 30 is excited, that is, in a state where acceptance of medals is permitted, as shown in FIG. 4B, the upper part of the flow path switching plate 147 is in the left direction (arrow) in the figure. By swinging in the A direction), the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147 forms the bottom surface of the medal inflow flow path 29a, the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a is closed, and the medal inflow flow path 29a is closed. The medal return flow path 29c is configured to be able to swing so as not to communicate with each other. With such a configuration, in a state where the flow path switching solenoid 30 is excited, the medals that flow in from the inflow port 141 and flow down the medal inflow flow path 29a flow down along the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147. It flows into the medal receiving flow path 29b and flows out from the outlet 142.

Further, an input port sensor 26 for detecting the passage of medals flowing in from the inflow port 141 is provided on the upstream side of the medal inflow flow path 29a, and an outlet 142 is provided on the downstream side of the medal receiving flow path 29b. Inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c for detecting the passage of ejected medals are provided.

Of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the inserted medal sensors 31a and 31c allow the medal to pass between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit, and the light receiving unit detects the blocking of light from the light emitting unit. The inserted medal sensor 31b is a photo sensor that detects the passage of medals by detecting the movement of a movable piece (not shown) that operates in conjunction with the passage of medals with a detector (not shown). It is a sensor. Hereinafter, the insertion medal sensor 31a may be referred to as an insertion medal sensor 1, the insertion medal sensor 31b may be referred to as an insertion medal sensor 2, and the insertion medal sensor 31c may be referred to as an insertion medal sensor 3. Further, the range in which the passage of medals is detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c may be referred to as the detection range A.

Next, the configuration of the input medal sensor 31b, which is a physical sensor, will be described. A movable piece of the inserted medal sensor 31b is provided on the side wall of the lower portion of the medal selector 29 on the downstream side of the medal receiving flow path 29b so as to appear and disappear in the medal receiving flow path 29b. Further, a detector is installed at a position corresponding to a movable piece outside the medal receiving flow path 29b. The detector is provided with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit in the detection unit. Then, when the medal passes through the medal receiving flow path 29b, the movable piece retracts the tip of the movable piece from the inside of the medal receiving flow path 29b, so that the detected portion provided at the end of the movable piece. Is designed to enter between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the detection unit, so that the light emitted from the light emitting part to the light receiving part is blocked and the detector detects the passage of the medal. It has become. On the other hand, the movable piece is urged so that the tip of the movable piece protrudes into the medal receiving flow path 29b when the medal has not passed through the medal receiving flow path 29b. In this state, the detected part of the movable piece does not enter between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the detection part, and the light emitted from the light emitting part of the detection part to the light receiving part is not blocked. The vessel prevents the passage of medals from being detected.

[About the memory area and program of the main control unit]
The main control unit 41 includes a ROM 41b and a RAM 41c having a memory area for storing a predetermined program or data.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a memory map of the ROM 41b and the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 5A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, and a game data area in which the game data used by the game program is stored. It includes a used area 1, a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, and an unused area 2.

Note that the progress of the game is to proceed with a series of processes constituting the game, and if it is a slot machine, the stage where the bet number is set and the game can be started, the game is started and the reel is rotated The stage of causing the reel to be stopped, the stage of deriving the display result, and the stage of giving a value such as a medal according to the display result are advanced.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used by the non-game program as a work, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which the game program saves data, and the non-game RAM area contains the game program. A referenceable area, a non-referenceable area for the game program, and a non-game stack area for saving data by the non-game program are included. In this embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas, but the game program and the non-game program may be provided with one stack area shared by the game program and the non-game program.

The unused area 3 is an area in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used, and is an area that is surplus with respect to the game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

Further, the unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to areas that are not continuous with the unused area 4 in between, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-game RAM area not related to the progress of the game The non-game RAM area used by the game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

In the following, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-game area. There is. Further, the unused area 1, the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

[Instructions used by the program]
The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program and a subroutine that is called during the execution of another program.

Further, as a calling instruction for the main control unit 41 to call and execute a program stored in the program / data area, a CALL instruction, a CALLV instruction, an RST instruction, and the like are included.

The CALL instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at an address specified in the main routine or the subroutine. When the subroutine is called by the CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the caller's address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored in the designated address. Then, after the subroutine is completed, the caller's address stored in the stack area, that is, the program of the caller's main routine or subroutine that executed the CALL instruction is returned.

Further, the CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. A normal CALL instruction is an instruction that calls a subroutine by specifying both an upper address and a lower address and specifying an address by the specified upper address and lower address, whereas the CALLV instruction only uses the lower address. By specifying, it is an instruction to specify the address by the upper address and the specified lower address set in advance in the vector table area of ROM41b and call the subroutine, and the subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data than the normal CALL instruction. It becomes possible to call.

The RST instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored in a specific address corresponding to a specified value by designating a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses, and is an instruction to execute the above-mentioned ordinary CALL. It is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than an instruction or a CALLV instruction. When the subroutine is called by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored in the specific address corresponding to the specified value. Then, after the subroutine is completed, the caller's address stored in the stack area, that is, the caller's main routine or subroutine that executed the RST instruction is returned.

A jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in a main routine or a subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction, and executes the moved destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction and the RST instruction, the program does not return to the transfer source program even if the transferred program ends.

Of the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, the frequently used subroutines are stored in the game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, a specific value is set as the upper address of the subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. Then, when the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the start address is a specific value, the main control unit 41 uses the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address, thereby setting the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. Identifies, identifies the lower address specified as the lower address, and calls and executes the subroutine stored in the combined address of the upper and lower levels. For this reason, the upper addresses that form part of the addresses used when calling the subroutines that are used particularly frequently in the game program are set in advance as specific values in the vector table, and are based on the specific values set in the vector table. Because the address is specified, it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and when calling these subroutines. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address.

In this embodiment, the head of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction and the area of the specific address of the ROM 41b used by the RST instruction. Since it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than the CALL instruction of the above, the data capacity of the game program can be reduced by using the CALLV instruction and the RST instruction in the game program. There is. Further, the head of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and the area of the specific address, and the head of the non-game program is not stored. The non-game program is stored by the CALLV instruction and the RST instruction. Is called, and it does not hinder the reduction of the data capacity of the game program.

It should be noted that the subroutines that are particularly frequently used among the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b are stored in the non-game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value, and the CALLV instruction is given in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the subroutine to be called in, and when the main control unit 41 calls the subroutine in which the upper address of the start address is the specific value, these subroutines are specified by using the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address. Even if the configuration is such that the program is called and executed, it is possible to call the subroutine with a smaller amount of data than the normal CALL instruction that calls the program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and these subroutines can be called. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling.

Further, the upper address used when calling by the CALLV instruction may be set to a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

Further, not limited to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in the specific register, etc., and the subroutine is specified by specifying the remaining part of the address. If the configuration uses a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of the subroutine, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. In addition, identification values with a smaller amount of data than the addresses are assigned to each of the multiple areas that make up the vector table area, and the storage addresses of the subroutines are set in each of these multiple areas, and the identification values are specified to identify them. Even with a configuration that uses a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of the subroutine stored in the area corresponding to the value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. ..

The main control unit 41 is activated by a system reset by inputting a system reset signal, a WDT reset by WDT (watchdog timer, not shown), and the above-mentioned illegal access reset. At this time, the vector table The value set in the area, that is, the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt process (main) is a value indicating the area in which the program or the like is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH. It is determined whether it is (a value set in an unused vector table area), and if the value set in the vector table area is neither a value indicating outside the area set by the program nor FFFFH, it is determined. Since it is not started, it is possible to prevent in advance that an unintended process is executed due to an interruption or the like.

The LD instruction is included as a read instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to read the data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction to read the data stored at the address specified in the main routine or the subroutine into the specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

Further, the LD instruction includes a normal LD instruction and an LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction. The normal LD instruction is an instruction to read the data stored in the specific area of the ROM 41b or the RAM 41c by the specified upper address and the lower address by designating both the upper address and the lower address, whereas the LDQ instruction is an instruction. By specifying only the lower address, the address is specified by the upper address preset in the special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the RAM 41c and the specified lower address, and the ROM 41b or the RAM 41c It is an instruction to read the data stored in a specific area and store the read data in a specified register, and it is possible to store a predetermined data in a predetermined register with a smaller amount of data than a normal LD instruction. It will be possible.

When reading the data stored in the specific area of ROM 41b and RAM 41c in the main routine or subroutine, by using the LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction, all the addresses (upper part and lower part) indicating the specific area can be set. It is possible to read the data in a specific area by specifying only the lower part of the address instead of specifying it. By using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to read data with a smaller amount of data than the normal LD instruction that reads data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and the address is specified when reading the data. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for doing so.

Further, among the game data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, the game data which is particularly frequently used is stored in the area of the game RAM area where the start address is a specific value, and the specific value is stored in a special register ( When the game data is set as the upper address of the game data in the Q register) and the main control unit 41 reads the game data, only the lower address is specified by using the LDQ command to read the game data. A program for specifying an address when reading game data, which makes it possible to read game data with a smaller amount of data than a normal LD command that reads data by specifying both an address and a lower address. Waste can be reduced.

Further, the main control unit 41 can change the value set in the special register (Q register) in the main routine or the subroutine, and the built-in register in the initial setting process performed at the time of startup as described later. In the setting, a specific value indicating the start address of the game data frequently used by the game program is set in a special register (Q register). Also, when calling a non-game program from a game program, the value set in a special register (Q register) is saved, and when returning to the game program, the value set in a special register (Q register) is saved. It is set to the value that was set again. As a result, when the game program is being executed, a specific value indicating the start address of the game data frequently used by the game program is set in a special register (Q register), and the game program is set. Frequently used game data can be read by using the LDQ instruction.

The upper address used when reading with the LDQ instruction as a special LD instruction may be set in a predetermined storage area other than the special register (for example, the Q register), for example, the vector table area. A special LD instruction is used in which a part of the address is specified using the value stored in a predetermined storage area such as, and the data storage address can be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address by a program. With the configuration, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the data. Further, for example, by assigning an identification value having a data amount smaller than the address to each of the plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, setting the data storage address in each of these plurality of areas, and specifying the identification value. , Even in a configuration that uses a special LD instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of the data stored in the area corresponding to the identification value, reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the data. Can be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the Q register is configured to store the same value as the value used in the specific program as the specific value, but it may be configured to store a value different from the value used in the specific program. For example, when a non-special program is called, a value different from the value used in the specific program as a specific value in the Q register, and the value of the start address of the storage area in which frequently used data in the non-game program is stored. The data capacity of the non-specific program can be reduced by storing the data and using the LDQ instruction when calling the data in the non-specific program.

The game program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless the process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, the non-game program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and the game can be progressed even if it is called from the game program and returns to the game program without executing the process based on the program. It is a program for executing processing.

In the game program, with respect to the above-mentioned CALL instruction and LD instruction, any instruction including a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction, an RST instruction, and an LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction may be used, and a special CALL instruction may be used. It is possible to specify the address by using the above and call the subroutine, or to read the specific game data and non-game data in the ROM 41b and the RAM 41c by using a special LD instruction.

In the non-game program, the normal CALL instruction is used for the above-mentioned CALL instruction, while the CALLV instruction, which is a special CALL instruction, is not used, and the address is specified by using the normal CALL instruction. While the subroutine may be called, the subroutine is not called by using a special CALL instruction, and the game program area in the ROM 41b is not accessed by the non-game program.

Further, in the non-game program, a normal LD command and an LDQ command, which is a special LD command, may be used for the above-mentioned LD command, and the address is specified by using the normal LD command to obtain predetermined data. It is possible to read out, and to read out subroutines and data using a special LD instruction.

As described above, in this embodiment, the head of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area of ROM41b and the area of the specific address used by the CALLV instruction and the RST instruction which are special CALL instructions. It is possible to call a game program by using a special CALL command. When it is possible to call only the game program by the special CALL instruction in this way, the game program is called by the non-game program because the special CALL instruction is used by the non-game program, and the unintended game is played. There is a risk that the game data will be rewritten by an unintended game program. On the other hand, by calling the program by the normal CALL instruction instead of the special CALL instruction by the non-game program, the game program is unintentionally called by the game by not using the vector table area and the area of the specific address. It is possible to prevent the progress of.

Further, in this embodiment, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, specifies a game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register) and reads out predetermined game data. It is possible, and by using a special LD instruction even in a non-specific program, it is possible to easily read the game data while reducing the data capacity of the non-specific program.

The LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, can specify a game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register) and read predetermined game data. However, when reading the game data by a special LD instruction, if the specific value of the special register (Q register) is damaged, the game RAM area cannot be specified normally, and unintended data is generated. There is a risk that it will be read. On the other hand, by making the non-game program read the data by the normal LD instruction instead of the LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction, the specific value is damaged when the game program is switched to the non-game program. Even in this case, since the game RAM area is specified and the data is read from the non-game program, it is possible to prevent the unintended data from being read.

In this embodiment, as an instruction that can be executed by the main control unit 41, a save instruction that saves the register values of the main control unit 41 by storing them in the stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. , The value of the register saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction is sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of the save, and set in the register corresponding to the order to set the corresponding register. Includes a return command to return the state of to the state when it was saved by the save command.

The save instruction stores the calculation result of the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c and all the registers included in the main control unit 41. It includes a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register in the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second save instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the save command in the game program, it is possible to save the register value in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and execute the save command in the non-game program. Therefore, it is possible to save the register value in the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program.

The return instruction is a first return instruction (POP ALL) that sets a value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c and restores all the registers included in the main control unit 41, and all the registers included in the main control unit 41. Among them, the flag register in which the calculation result is stored includes a second return instruction (POP AF) for setting and returning a value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first return instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second return instruction is an instruction that requires a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the return command in the game program, the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program can be called, set in the corresponding register, and returned. It is possible, and by executing the return command in the non-game program, the value of the register saved from the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program is called, and the corresponding register is set. It is possible to set and restore.

[Relationship between gaming area and non-gaming area]
As shown in FIG. 6, the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls the non-game program in the process based on the game program to execute the process based on the non-game program, and after the processing based on the non-game program is completed, the game program Return to processing based on. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming area and the non-gaming area.

As shown in FIG. 6, in principle, when executing the process based on the game program, the main CPU 41a executes the process based on the game program with reference to the game data in the game data area, and uses the game RAM area as a work. However, it is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. Further, in principle, when executing the process based on the non-game program, the main CPU 41a executes the process based on the non-game program with reference to the game data in the non-game data area, and uses the non-game RAM area as a work. , It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-gaming RAM area.

Further, the main CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area when executing the process based on the game program, but it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area. Yes, in executing the process based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

In addition, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area required for the game program (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) in the non-game RAM area, and can be referred to the non-game program. The processing based on the game RAM area can be referred to only a specific area required for the non-game program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.). In addition, a specific area in the non-game RAM area where processing based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area in the game RAM area where processing based on the non-game program can be referred to may be allocated to continuous address areas. Preferably, the configuration may be such that part or all of the address area is not contiguous.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game program area in which the game program related to the progress of the game is stored, the game data area in which the game data referred to by the game program is readable, and the work data referred to by the game program are stored. A game RAM area that is readable and writable, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores non-game programs that are not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game that the non-game program refers to. Since the non-game data area in which the data is readable and stored and the non-game RAM area in which the work data referred to by the non-game program is readable and writable are allocated separately, the game program and the game The data and the work data of the game program and the work data of the non-game program, the non-game data and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, by separating the game program area and the game data area from the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied by the ROM 41b can be compactly managed according to each function. It becomes even easier to identify the data to be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the non-game RAM area can be referred to when the game program is executed, and the game RAM area can be referred to when the non-game program is executed. In executing the game program, the data used by the non-game program can be easily used, and in executing the non-game program, the data used by the game program can be easily used. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and it is impossible to update the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. Therefore, the game program Does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) required for the game program in the non-game RAM area. , The processing based on the non-game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) required for the non-game program in the game RAM area. Therefore, since the data that the game program can refer to in the non-game RAM area and the data that the non-game program can refer to are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program can be easily specified. be able to.

[Game state]
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a gaming state. As shown in FIG. 7, in the slot machine 1, as controllable gaming states, a normal state, a CB inside, a CB, a BB inside, a BB state, and an RT state are provided. The main control unit 41 controls the game state to any one of the plurality of game states, and functions as a state control means. The probability of winning a role differs depending on the game state. The odds of winning include 0% and 100%. That is, depending on the game state, it is possible that the predetermined combination is not won, or that the predetermined combination is won in each game.

The normal state is a game state in which the game is controlled immediately after the setting change is completed, and the stay rate is high. The normal state is a disadvantageous state for the player as compared with CB and BB. Specifically, in the normal state, the internal lottery is performed so that the probability of winning a small winning combination is lower than that of CB or BB. As will be described later, in the normal state, one of CB, BB, cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, push order bell, technical intervention role, normal replay, and special replay can be won. .. Further, in the normal state, the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the middle row is defined as the winning line (see FIG. 1).

Since the normal state and the RT state are states in which the CB or BB has not been won, it is also called non-internal. If you win the CB during the normal state or RT state and win the CB in the winning game, the state will be controlled by the CB from the next game. On the other hand, if the CB is won during the normal state or the RT state and the CB is not won in the winning game, the state is controlled inside the CB in which the winning of the CB is carried over. When the CB wins in the inside of the CB, the state is controlled by the CB from the next game of the game that won the CB. As will be described later, in CB, every game can be won for all small roles (all small roles) including cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, push order bell, technical intervention role, and BB middle bell. , Do not win the replay. In the case of CB, since the technical intervention role is won in each game, the player can win the technical intervention role in each game. In the present embodiment, during the CB, the winning line LN is set over the middle stage as in the other gaming states.

The CB ends on the condition that 150 or more medals have been paid out after being controlled by the CB. For example, if you win only the winning combination that pays out 15 cards without winning the technical intervention role that pays out 14 cards after being controlled by CB, 10 times (15 cards x 10 times = 150 cards) The control to the CB ends when the prize is won. On the other hand, when the technical intervention role is won once after being controlled by the CB and the winning role in which 15 medals are paid out is won 9 times, the number of medals paid out is 149, which does not reach 150. Therefore, it is controlled by the CB until one more small win is won. That is, if the technical intervention role is won once during the CB, the number of medals that can be obtained during the CB is the largest. Therefore, when controlled by the CB, the technical intervention role is won only once, and in the remaining games, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated so that the winning combination that produces 15 payouts is won. You can maximize the number of medals you can get inside. Therefore, when controlled by the CB, the player first plays a game aiming at winning a technical intervention role with 14 medals paid out, and once the technical intervention role wins, the number of medals paid out is 15. There is a tendency to aim for a prize in the role of a piece.

If you win the BB during the normal state or RT state and win the BB in the winning game, the state will be controlled by the BB from the next game. On the other hand, if the BB is won during the normal state or the RT state and the BB is not won in the winning game, the state is controlled inside the BB where the winning of the BB is carried over. When the BB wins inside the BB, the state is controlled by the BB from the next game of the game that won the BB. In BB, it is possible to win the bell (bell 1 and technical intervention role) in BB, and not to other roles. In the case of BB, unlike CB, the player cannot win Bell 1 or the technical intervention role unless the bell in BB is won in the internal lottery.

The BB ends on the condition that 345 or more medals have been paid out after being controlled by the BB. For example, if you win only Bell 1 where 15 payouts occur without winning the technical intervention role where 14 payouts occur after being controlled by BB, 23 times (15 pieces x 23 times = 345 pieces). The control to BB ends when the prize is won. On the other hand, when the player wins the technical intervention role once after being controlled by the BB and wins 22 times in Bell 1 where 15 medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is 344, which does not reach 345. Therefore, it is controlled by BB until one more small win is won. That is, the number of medals that can be obtained during the BB is the largest when the technical intervention role is won once during the BB. Therefore, when controlled by the BB, the technical intervention role is won only once, and in the remaining games, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated so that the winning combination that produces 15 payouts is won. You can maximize the number of medals you can get during BB. Therefore, when controlled by the BB, the player first plays a game aiming at winning a technical intervention role with 14 medals paid out, and once the technical intervention role wins, the number of medals paid out is 15. There is a tendency to aim for a prize for one bell.

As described above, the main control unit 41 shifts the state from the CB to the RT state on the condition that 150 or more medals are paid out in the CB, and 345 or more medals are paid out in the BB. The state is changed from the BB to the RT state on the condition that it is done. As described above, the number of payouts that is the end condition of CB is smaller than the number of payouts that is the end condition of BB. Therefore, the control period of CB is shorter than the control period of BB.

In the RT (replay time) state, the winning probability of the replaying combination in the internal lottery is higher than in the non-RT (for example, normal state), and in the RT state, the replay game is executed with a higher probability than in the non-RT state. Therefore, the player can easily proceed with the game without consuming the medals he owns. In the present embodiment, after the bonus ends, the state is controlled to the RT state for a predetermined period (for example, 30 games), and if the CB or BB is won during this period, the normal state is achieved. It is possible to let the CB or BB control the state without going through. In this case, since the game does not go through the normal state, the game can be advanced without reducing the number of medals and credits owned by the player as much as possible.

[Ball out state]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a ball ejection state. In the present embodiment, as the ball ejection states managed by the main control unit 41, the ball ejection state = 0, the ball ejection state = 1, the ball ejection state = 2, the ball ejection state = 3, the ball ejection state = 4, And 5 types of ball ejection states are provided. The ball ejection state = 0 is referred to as "normal", the ball ejection state = 1 is referred to as "advantageous section normal", the ball ejection state = 2 is referred to as "advantageous section CZ", and the ball ejection state = 3 is referred to as "advantageous section AT". , The ball ejection state = 4 is referred to as an "advantageous section specialization zone", and the ball ejection state = 5 is referred to as an "advantageous section ending".

Usually, it is also called a normal section. Advantageous section Usually, the advantageous section CZ, the advantageous section AT, the advantageous section special zone, and the advantageous section ending are also collectively referred to as an advantageous section.

The normal section (normal) is a state in which navigation is not executed, and is a non-notification state in which navigation information cannot be notified. The advantageous section is a state in which navigation can be executed, and is a notification state in which navigation information can be notified. In the present embodiment, of the advantageous sections, the navigation is not executed for the advantageous section normal and the advantageous section CZ, but the navigation is executed for the advantageous section AT, the advantageous section special zone, and the advantageous section ending. Can be done. It should be noted that the navigation may be executed even in the advantageous section normal or the advantageous section CZ, but for example, in the advantageous section AT, the leading role is won at the time of winning the push order combination rather than the advantageous section normal or the advantageous section CZ. The probability of executing the navigation to make it run is high.

The ball ejection state and the RT state are state transitions independently of each other. In the present embodiment, each ball ejection state can be controlled both in the non-internal and in the internal. On the other hand, in the BB, the ball ejection state is not provided.

For example, when the RT state is non-internal and the ball ejection state is the advantageous section normal, when the BB is won, the RT state shifts to the internal, but the ball ejection state maintains the advantageous section normal. When the BB wins in the case where the RT state is inside and the ball ejection state is the advantageous section normal, the RT state is controlled by the BB, but the ball ejection state does not exist in the BB. After that, when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to the non-internal state, and the ball ejection state is again controlled to the original advantageous section normal.

Further, when the RT state is non-internal and the ball ejection state is the advantageous section AT, when the BB is won and the BB prize is won, the RT state is controlled by the BB, but the ball ejection state does not exist in the BB. .. After that, when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to the non-internal state, and the ball ejection state is again controlled to the original advantageous section AT.

For example, when the advantageous section is won when the RT state is inside and the ball ejection state is normal, the ball ejection state is controlled to the advantageous section normally while the RT state is maintained inside. Further, when the AT is won when the RT state is inside and the ball ejection state is the advantageous section CZ, the ball ejection state is controlled to the advantageous section AT while the RT state is maintained inside.

Normally, when a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous section is won (winning an advantageous section), the state is controlled to the state of paying balls in the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, since the winning of most of the winning combinations during the normal period is a condition for winning the advantageous section, the stay of the game in the normal state is about 1G. The condition for winning the advantageous section may be satisfied when any of all the winning combinations that can be won during the normal period is won.

Normally, navigation is not executed in the game in which the push order is won, so the net increase in the number of medals that the player can obtain per game is 0 or minus, considering the number of medals used to set the number of bets. become. The net increase in the number of medals per game is the number obtained by subtracting the number of medals used for setting the number of bets per game from the number of medals paid out per game.

Advantageous section Normally, navigation is not executed in the game that wins the push order, so the net increase in the number of medals that can be obtained by the player per game is 0, considering the number of medals used to set the number of bets. Or it becomes negative.

The advantageous section CZ has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous section AT than the normal advantageous section, and is located on an intermediate route from the normal advantageous section to being controlled by the advantageous section AT.

In the advantageous section CZ, as in the case of the advantageous section normal, the navigation is not executed in the game in which the push order is won. Considering the number of sheets, it becomes 0 or minus. As described above, in the advantageous section CZ, the ball output rate is 1 or less (100% or less) or less than 1 (less than 100%). The advantageous section CZ has the same ball output rate as the advantageous section normal, but the probability of being controlled by the advantageous section AT per game is set higher than that of the advantageous section normal.

The advantageous section AT is in a state where it can be controlled from both the advantageous section normal and the advantageous section CZ. In the advantageous section AT, the navigation is executed in the game in which the push order is won, so that the net increase in the number of games that the player can obtain is even if the number of medals used to set the bet number is taken into consideration. , Will be a plus. In the present embodiment, the ball output rate of the advantageous section AT is set to 200%. As described above, in the advantageous section AT, the ball output rate exceeds 1 (100%). The advantageous section AT is in a more advantageous state than both the advantageous section normal and the advantageous section CZ.

The advantageous section special zone is in a state that can be controlled from the advantageous section AT. In the advantageous section special zone, navigation is executed in the game that wins the push order, so the net increase in the number of games that the player can obtain is based on the number of medals used to set the bet number. But it will be a plus. In the present embodiment, the ball output rate of the advantageous section special zone is set to 200%. In this way, in the advantageous section special zone, the ball output rate exceeds 1 (100%). Further, in the advantageous section special zone, the number of AT games may be added. Therefore, if it is controlled to the advantageous section special zone, the period controlled by AT is likely to be extended. Therefore, the advantageous section special zone is in a state more advantageous than any of the advantageous section normal, the advantageous section CZ, and the advantageous section AT.

Normally, when the advantageous section is won, the state is normally controlled in the advantageous section. Advantageous section Normally, when the CZ is won, the state is controlled in the advantageous section CZ. Further, in the advantageous section normally, when the AT is won, the state is controlled by the advantageous section AT. In the present embodiment, it is possible to win the AT by winning the special replay described later in the advantageous section normal. In the advantageous section CZ, when the AT is won, the state is controlled by the advantageous section AT. In the advantageous section AT, when the special zone is won, the state is controlled to the advantageous section special zone.

The control to the advantageous section CZ is managed by, for example, the number of games, and the advantageous section CZ ends on the condition that the number of games digested in the advantageous section CZ reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games. ..

The control to the advantageous section AT is managed by, for example, the number of games, and the advantageous section AT ends on the condition that the number of games digested during the advantageous section AT reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games. .. The advantageous section AT is not limited to those managed by the number of games, and the number of times the navigation is executed reaches a predetermined maximum number of times, and the number of times the leading role wins when the push order combination is won is a predetermined maximum number of times. It may be managed based on other conditions such as reaching the above, and the number of payouts and the net increase number reaching a predetermined upper limit.

Control to the advantageous section special zone is managed by, for example, the number of games, and the advantageous section is subject to the condition that the number of games digested in the advantageous section special zone reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games. The special zone ends. The advantageous section special zone is not limited to those managed by the number of games, but the number of times the navigation is executed reaches a predetermined upper limit, and the number of winnings of the leading role at the time of winning the push order is set in advance. It may be managed based on other conditions such as reaching the upper limit number of times and the number of payouts and the net increase number reaching a predetermined upper limit number.

When the advantageous section special zone ends, the state is controlled again by the advantageous section AT. When the advantageous section AT ends, the state is controlled again in the advantageous section CZ, and when the AT is won in the advantageous section CZ, the state is controlled again in the advantageous section AT. On the other hand, when the number of digestion games reaches the upper limit number of games without winning the AT in the advantageous section CZ, the state is normally controlled in the normal section.

In this way, the state is controlled from the advantageous section normal to the advantageous section AT and the advantageous section special zone via the advantageous section CZ, and the state is exchanged between the advantageous section CZ and the advantageous section AT. Become. In the advantageous section CZ, the total net increase is 0 or minus, and in the advantage section AT, the total net increase is 0 or larger than the minus in the advantage section CZ. Therefore, when the state is exchanged between the advantageous section CZ and the advantageous section AT, the total net increase number is designed to continue to increase. On the other hand, in the advantageous section normal, the total number of net increases is 0 or minus, so the number of games staying in the advantageous section normally is larger than the number of games staying between the advantageous section CZ and the advantageous section AT. As it grows, the total net increase continues to decrease.

In the ball ejection state in the advantageous section, the state is controlled to the advantageous section ending when the total number of digested games in the advantageous section updated based on the progress of the game reaches a predetermined number of ED transition games. The advantageous section ending is, for example, until the total value of the net increase number reaches the upper limit number (for example, 2400), or until the number of digestion games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500G). It is a state in which it is confirmed that the control to the ball state will continue. The number of ED transition games is set when the state shifts from the normal to the ball ejection state in the advantageous section. The number of ED transition games may be determined by lottery or may be predetermined.

When the limiter condition is satisfied or an arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the ball ejection state in the advantageous section, the state is normally controlled from the ball ejection state in the advantageous section. Specifically, in the ball ejection state during the advantageous section, when the total number of digested games (number of advantageous section games) updated based on the progress of the game reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 G). , The advantageous section ends, and the ball ejection state is normally controlled. Alternatively, in the ball ejection state in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends when the total number of net increases in the advantageous section updated based on the progress of the game reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 2400). , The ball ejection state is normally controlled.

Further, for example, for any end condition, a predetermined end condition is satisfied without winning the CZ in the advantageous section normally, and a predetermined end condition is satisfied without winning the AT in the advantageous section CZ. Etc. are included.

[Winner]
As the winning combination (also referred to as "winning combination"), a special role, a small role, and a replaying role are provided. The special role is a role in which the gaming state is controlled to a bonus state in which the probability of winning a small role is higher than that in the non-bonus state by winning a prize, and is a role accompanied by a transition to the bonus state. A small role is a role in which a medal is awarded by winning a prize. The replay role is a role in which the next game can be started without consuming the medals owned by the player by winning a prize. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, the symbol combinations of winning combinations, and the granting at the time of winning. In addition, in FIG. 9, "-" is shown for the winning combination in that state.

In this embodiment, the special role includes a challenge bonus (CB) and a big bonus (BB). When you win the CB, the state is controlled by the CB. During CB, the pull-in range of at least one reel is narrower than during non-CB in each game, and the challenge time (CT) is such that all small winning combinations are allowed to occur. When you win the BB, the state is controlled by the BB. During BB, the winning probability of a small win is higher than during non-bonus (normal, RT, etc., non-internal, CB internal, BB internal). (In this embodiment, only Bell 1 and the technical intervener are elected during the BB, and Bell 1 or the technical intervener can win. The number of bets in the non-bonus is 3 BET, whereas CB. The number of bets in and the number of bets in BB are 2 BETs.

Small roles include cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, 1 card 1, 1 card 2, 1 card 3, and technical intervention. During the non-bonus period, eight medals will be paid out when one of the cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, and technical intervention roles is won, and one medal, one, two, and one. One medal will be paid out when one of the three roles is won. In the CB, 15 medals are paid out when one of the cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, 1 card 1, 1 card 2 and 1 card 3 is won, and the technical intervention role. 14 medals will be paid out when the prize is won. During the BB, 15 medals will be paid out when the Bell 1 is won, and 14 medals will be paid out when the technical intervention role is won. The technical intervener can only win if he is elected during CB or BB and is pushed back. In addition, the replay combination includes a normal replay and a 7-match replay. In this embodiment, the replay is not won during the bonus.

[Lottery target role]
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a combination of winning combinations read as lottery target combinations for each gaming state. The winning combination number column of FIG. 10 shows the winning combination number determined for each lottery target combination, the lottery target combination column shows the name, and the winning combination combination column includes each lottery target combination. The combination of winning combinations is shown, the RT status column indicates that the lottery target combination is a lottery target for each RT status, and the advantageous section winning column indicates whether or not the advantageous section has been won. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 10, BB and CB are provided as the lottery target combinations for the special combination. The lottery targets for small roles are cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, 123 choice bell, 132 choice bell, 213 choice bell, 231 choice bell, 312 choice bell, 321 choice bell, and technical intervention role, and BB. A middle bell is provided. Normal replays and special replays are provided as the lottery target roles for the replays. In addition, push order bells such as 123 choice bell, 132 choice bell, 213 choice bell, 231 choice bell, 312 choice bell, and 321 choice bell, and special replay are roles that navigation can be executed when winning. Also called a push order role.

Regarding small wins, in non-internal, roles other than BB middle bell can be won, but in internal, CB or BB has already been won, so CB, BB, and BB middle bell It is not possible to win.

When the cherry, watermelon, and special replay are each won in the internal lottery, the advantageous section will be won together.

[Reel control of push order]
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining reel control at the time of winning the push order combination. As described above, in the present embodiment, the navigation is executed in the game in which the push order combination is won in the advantageous section AT or the advantageous section special zone, and the correct answer procedure is notified to the player. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the correct procedure according to the navigation, the player can win a winning combination that is advantageous to the player.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11, in a game in which any of the 123-choice bell, 132-choice bell, 213-choice bell, 231-choice bell, 312-choice bell, and 321-choice bell is won, the role of the winning push order bell is used. When the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated according to the correct answer procedure associated with each, the leading bell 1 wins a prize. When the bell 1 wins, the bell symbols are lined up on the winning line LN on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Such a combination of symbols is also called a bell set. On the other hand, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by an incorrect answer procedure different from the correct answer procedure, the one-card combination, which is a secondary role, wins, or if the one-card combination is missed, no prize is given. Does not occur.

Further, in the game in which the special replay is won, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated by the reverse push (right, middle, and left) associated with the special replay, 7 sets of replays are won. When the 7-match replay wins, 7 symbols are lined up on the winning line LN on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such a combination of symbols is also called a set of seven. On the other hand, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in a pressing order other than the reverse pressing, the normal replay wins.

[Reel control]
In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is based on an operation mode including the order (operation order) and timing (operation timing) of operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a winning flag indicating the result of the internal lottery. It functions as a derivation control means for controlling the stop of the reel.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start the fluctuation of the symbol. The rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is stopped, and the symbol is stopped and displayed.

During non-CB, the maximum stop delay time from when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated until the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the stop switch is stopped is 190 ms (milliseconds). ..

The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute and change the symbol of 80 x 21 (the number of symbol frames per reel) = 1680 frames, so that a maximum of 4 symbols can be drawn in 190 ms. You will be able to do it. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols up to 4 frames ahead, for a total of 5 frames. Therefore, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, when the symbol displayed in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol is used. Designs up to 4 frames ahead can be displayed in the middle row.

For example, when the CB is won and the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbols 0 to 3 or 11 to 20 of the left reel 2L pass through the middle row, the symbol "7" is operated in the middle row. Is drawn in. For example, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 0th symbol of the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage, the main control unit 41 sets the timing at which the left reel 2L is stopped at the timing when the left stop switch 8L is operated. After rotating for 3 frames, the left reel 2L is stopped and the 3rd "7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage.

During CB, it is controlled by each game CT. In CT, the pullable range of at least one reel (also referred to as CT reel) is narrower than usual. In the present embodiment, the retractable range of the left reel 2L becomes narrower than usual during CT. Specifically, the maximum stop delay time from the operation of the left stop switch 8L to the stop of the rotation of the left reel 2L is 75 ms (milliseconds), and the operation of the middle stop switch 8C or the right stop switch 8R to the middle reel The maximum stop delay time until the rotation of the 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped is 190 ms (milliseconds).

In other words, when the left stop switch 8L is operated, the symbols displayed when the left stop switch 8L is operated and the symbols one frame ahead of it, for a total of two frames, can be selected. It is a design of. Therefore, for example, when the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 2L is used as a reference when the left stop switch 8L is operated, the symbols from the symbol to one frame ahead can be displayed in the middle row. In this way, with respect to the left reel 2L, the retractable range is limited during CT as compared with the normal time. During CT, the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R other than the left reel 2L have the same pull-in range as during non-CB, and a maximum of four frames of symbols can be pulled in.

[Initial setting process]
The start-up process and the initial setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the initial setting process performed by the main control unit 41. The start-up process and the initial setting process are subroutines included in the game program.

When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 starts with the timer interrupt set to be prohibited due to the occurrence of a reset, and performs various processes according to the program stored in the ROM 41b. .. After starting, first, the start-up setting process included in the game program is performed to initialize all the output ports 0 to 9, and the internal register provided in the main control unit 41 is preset in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Performs the initial setting process included in the game program, which is initialized based on the built-in register initialization table.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the initial setting process, the timer interrupt is first prohibited (Sa01). After that, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 is prohibited until the timer interrupt is permitted again. After that, in the initial setting process, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48 is in the ON state by referring to the predetermined area of the input port (Sa1). Then, when the power failure detection signal is in the ON state, it waits until the power failure detection signal is in the OFF state. After that, after the power supply voltage of the slot machine 1 becomes normal and the power failure detection signal is turned off, the parity of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa3), and a predetermined initial address is set in the stack pointer. (Sa4). Then, it is determined whether or not the parity calculated in the step of Sa3 is normal (Sa5), and if the parity is normal, the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the time of power failure is acquired. Then (Sa6), it is diagnosed whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed based on the fixed data for the RAM destruction diagnosis (Sa7).

When it is determined that the parity is normal in the step of Sa5, and when the stored content of the RAM 41c is diagnosed in the step of Sa7, the RAM 41c is determined based on the parity of the RAM calculated in the step of Sa3 and the result of the diagnosis in Sa7. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality (Sa8). The case where the RAM 41c has an abnormality is a case where the parity is not normal, or a case where it is diagnosed that the parity is normal but the storage content is abnormal.

Then, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the value of the flag register in which the calculation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is set to the game stack area of the game RAM area by using the second save instruction described above. After saving by storing in a predetermined order (Sa9), the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called up by using the above-mentioned CALL instruction (Sa10).

In the non-game RAM area initialization process, first, the above-mentioned LD instruction is used to obtain the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. Read, store in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and save. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. By doing so, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register. Are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program as the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called from the game program. Therefore, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the non-game RAM area initialization process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the non-game RAM area initialization process is the game. It may be different from the register state when the program calls the non-game RAM area initialization process.

After that, the start address (the first address of the unused area 4) and the end address (the last address of the non-gaming RAM area) of the initialization target RAM are specified, and the start address is set as the initial value of the specified address and the data of the specified address. By repeatedly executing the process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the above until the specified address becomes the end address, the area from the start address to the end address of the RAM to be initialized (in this embodiment, The area from the beginning of the unused area 4 to the end of the non-game RAM area) is initialized. In the non-game RAM area initialization process, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated by designating the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, and the RAM area corresponding to the capacity is used as the initialization target RAM. By clearing sequentially from the start address, the area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM may be initialized.

Then, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started are not saved in the reverse order of the saving. By sequentially reading from the game stack area and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are returned to the state when the non-game RAM area initialization process was started. After that, using the above-mentioned LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started is read and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. As a result, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-game RAM area initialization process was started, and the non-game RAM area initialization process is terminated. In addition, in order to end the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the values of all the registers saved at the start of the non-game RAM area initialization process are restored. Then, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the LD instruction is used, so that the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the LD instruction is executed. The state of the flag register may change before and after the program. That is, the state of the register when the non-game RAM area initialization process is completed may be different from the state of the register saved when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started.

When the non-game RAM area initialization process is performed in the step of Sa10, the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c is initialized, and the initial setting process is returned, the game is played in the step of Sa9 by using the second return instruction described above. By sequentially reading the value of the flag register saved in the stack area from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving and setting it in the flag register, the flag register is set to the state before the non-game RAM area initialization processing is performed. (Sa11). The non-game RAM area by performing the save processing and the return processing of all the registers inside the non-game RAM area initialization processing in the step of Sa10 and the save processing and the return processing of the flag registers in the steps of Sa9 and Sa11. After the initialization process is performed, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the process was performed.

When it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c in the step of Sa8, or when the register is restored in the step of Sa11, the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sa12), and the RAM 41c is abnormal. If there is, the initialization start address at the time of RAM destruction for designating the address of the game RAM area to be initialized is set (Sa13). After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state with reference to the input port 2 (Sa14).

If it is determined in the step of Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state, the setting change process is performed. In the setting change process, the set value is confirmed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in a predetermined procedure, and it is detected that the setting key switch 37 is turned off, so that the setting change process is performed. Exits and shifts the game to a state where it can proceed. Further, in the setting change process, when the setting change process is started, a setting command (start) indicating that the setting change process is started is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and when the setting change process is finished, the setting change process is completed. A setting command (end) is provided to indicate that the setting change process is finished. Further, in the setting change process, when the setting change process is completed, the start address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of setting change is specified, and the process returns to the step of Sb47 of the main process. Then, by performing the RAM initialization process in the step of Sb47, the area from the start address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of setting change to the end address of the game RAM area, that is, all the game RAM areas are initialized. It has become so. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that all game RAM areas other than the stack area in use of the RAM 41c are initialized. In the RAM initialization process performed after the setting change process is completed, the area to be initialized includes a storage area in which information about the advantageous section is stored, and the information about the advantageous section is initialized. The area to be initialized does not include a storage area in which information about the carry-over state in which the winning of the special role (BB or CB) is carried over is stored, and the information about the carry-over state is not initialized. ..

When it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in the step of Sa14, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c based on the parity of the RAM calculated in the step of Sa3 and the diagnosis result in Sa7 (Sa15). If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c, the output buffer for outputting the external output signal is cleared (Sa16). Further, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and clears a reel error counter for counting the number of times a reel rotation error is detected in the main process described later (Sa17). After that, by setting the address at the time of power failure in the stack pointer SP based on the stored contents of the RAM 41c, the stack pointer is returned to the state at the time of power failure (Sa18), and the port input process is performed twice in succession (Sa19). , Sa20).

In the port input process, input status data related to the input status such as detection signals of various switches input to the parallel input port 511 (input data indicating the current input status of various switches, the previous input data and the current input data are the same. This is a process of updating the confirmed data indicating that the confirmation data is, and the edge data indicating that the confirmed data has changed from the previous time. Input buffers 0 to 2 for storing input state data of various switches are provided in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, and input state data of various switches updated by port input processing (this embodiment). (Input data, finalized data, edge data) are stored in predetermined bits of an input buffer predetermined for each type of switches and input state data. In the port input process, among the input state data of various switches, the detection state (ON state or OFF state) of various switches is stored as input data in the input port 0 of the parallel input port 511 to input various sensors. The data is updated to the detection status at the execution timing of the port input process this time. The input data of the various switches is stored in a predetermined bit of the input port 0 corresponding to each switch. Further, in the port input process, when the input data is stored in the input buffer 0, the input data stored in the input buffer by the previous port input process and the input data stored in the input buffer by the current port input process are stored. Compared with each sensor, the current input data detection status (ON status) for various sensors whose current and previous input data are in the same state (previous and current ON status or previous and current OFF status) Confirmation data is created to indicate (or OFF state) and stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 1, while the input data of this time and the previous time are different (OFF state this time in the previous ON state or ON this time in the previous OFF state). For various sensors that are in the state), by creating definite data so as to maintain the detection state of the previous input data and storing it in the predetermined bit of the input buffer 1, various sensors stored in the input buffer 1 Update the confirmed data of. Further, in the port input process, when the confirmed data is stored in the input buffer 1, the confirmed data is compared with the previous confirmed data, and the confirmed data is turned OFF for various sensors whose confirmed data has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. ON edge data indicating that the state has changed from the ON state to the ON state is stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2, and the confirmed data changes from the ON state to the OFF state for various sensors whose confirmed data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. By storing the OFF edge data indicating that the data has been performed in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2, the edge data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 2 is updated. The input data, confirmed data, and edge data of the various switches stored in the port input buffers 0 to 2 can be referred to from the gaming program and the non-gaming program.

Further, in the initial setting process, the port input process is performed twice in succession, and when the port input process is subsequently performed, the input state of various switches after the initial setting process is performed, that is, the slot machine 1 Since input status data related to the input status such as the detection signal of various switches is created based on the input status of various switches after the power supply to is restarted, an unintended input status is specified. Can be prevented. Further, in the port input process, the finalized data may be created based on the input data acquired by the port input process three or more times (for example, the input data of this time, the previous time and the time before the previous time). In such a configuration, the initial setting process is performed by continuously performing the port input process in the initial setting process one less than the number of port input processes required to create the finalized data. After that, when the port input process is performed, the input state data can be created based on the input state of various switches after the initial setting process is performed.

After performing the port input processing in the steps of Sa19 and Sa20, referring to the predetermined input port (Sa21), it is determined whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state (Sa22), and the reset / setting is performed. When the switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the reset / setting switch 38 is pressed and the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the switch 38 is in the ON state, it is advantageous to initialize the advantageous section information related to the advantageous section. The section information initialization process is performed (Sa23). In the advantageous section information initialization process, information on the advantageous section in the storage area of the RAM 41c (output buffer of signal in advantageous section, flag in advantageous section, output buffer of section display LED19, number of games in advantageous section, net increase of medals in advantageous section). Initialize the area where the number of sheets etc. is stored. In the advantageous section information initialization process, an area in which information related to the special role's internal winning flag (non-winning: 0, BB winning: 1, CB winning: 2) and set values (1 to 6) are stored. Is not initialized, and information about the special role's internal winning flag and set values (1 to 6) is maintained as it was when the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped last time. Will be done.

In this embodiment, in the initial setting process, when the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset / setting switch 38 is pressed and kept in the ON state. Is configured to initialize the information about the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c by the advantageous section information initialization process, but the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset / setting switch 38 is pressed and turned on. When this is done, the information about the internal winning status and the information about the set value among the information stored in the RAM 41c are maintained without being initialized, while at least the information about the advantageous section is initialized. Any information may be sufficient, and information other than the information regarding the internal winning status and the information regarding the set value may be initialized together with the information regarding the advantageous section.

When it is determined that the reset / setting switch 38 is not in the ON state in the step of Sa22, and after executing the advantageous section information initialization process in the step of Sa23, a return command indicating that the control state before the power failure has been restored is issued. After transmitting to the sub-control unit 91 (Sa24), in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main), the door command transmission flag indicating that the door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is transmitted is set in the RAM 41c. It is set in a predetermined area (Sa25). In the command transmission process, normally, the door command is transmitted when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes, but when the door command transmission flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the door open detection switch 25 is transmitted. A door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is transmitted regardless of whether or not the detection state of the door has changed.

Then, after setting the door command transmission flag in the step of Sa25, all the registers are returned to the state before the power failure stored in the RAM 41c (Sa26). By this process, a power failure recovery flag indicating that the power failure has been recovered is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. After that, the timer interrupt is set to allow (Sa27), the initial setting process is terminated and the process shifts to the timer interrupt process (main), and then the operation is executed before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. It returns to the processing in the main processing that was being done. As a result, the timer interrupt that was prohibited in Sa01 is permitted, and the process that was executed before the power failure is performed again. For example, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the reel stop control process (Sb48) in the main process described later, after the power failure is restored, the reel stop control process (Sb48) in the main process is performed again after the initial setting process. Is executed. At this time, since the timer interrupt is prohibited while the initial setting process is being executed after the power failure, the counter update process by the timer interrupt described later is not executed, and the timer for one game time management is not updated. It will be.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sa15 that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the game RAM initialization process is performed (Sa28), and the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is performed from the RAM destruction initialization start address set in the step of Sa13. Initialize the area up to the end of. After that, similarly to the processing from the steps of Sa9 to Sa11, the value of the flag register in which the flag is set is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area (Sa29), and then the non-game included in the non-game program. After calling the game RAM area initialization process (Sa30) to initialize all the non-game RAM areas of the RAM 41c, the player returns to the caller and restores the register saved in the step of Sa29 (Sa31).

After returning the register in the step of Sa31, the door command transmission flag is set (Sa32), the timer interrupt is set to allow (Sa33), and the RAM error code (E8) indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c. Is prepared in a predetermined register (Sa34), the initial setting process is terminated, and the process proceeds to error processing.

In the error processing, the error state is controlled so that the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of identifying the error code (E8) prepared in the predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E8) is transmitted to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing (for example,). It is set as an error flag that can be referred to in the sensor monitoring process described later). Further, the error code (E8) is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E8) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the RAM error error code (E8) is prepared in a predetermined register and the error state is entered, the setting change state is entered by turning on the power switch 39 with the setting key switch 37 turned on. By initializing all the game RAM areas, it is possible to surely eliminate the abnormality of the data in the RAM 41c and release the error state. On the other hand, when the power switch 39 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 37, an abnormality in the RAM 41c is detected again, and an error state occurs again.

In this way, the main control unit 41 performs the initial setting process first after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and in the initial setting process, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is performed. Depending on the state of the main control unit 41 when it is started, the process shifts to one of timer interrupt processing (main), setting change processing, and error processing. Then, when migrating to these processes, a command that can specify the type of the process to be transferred is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and when migrating to the timer interrupt process (main), that is, the slot. When returning to the control state before the power supply to the machine 1 is stopped, a return command is sent to the sub-control unit 91 to start the setting change process and shift to the setting change state. , The setting command (start) is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and when the error processing is started due to the abnormality of the RAM 41c and the state shifts to the error state, the error command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

After shifting from the initial setting process to the setting change process, the main control unit 41 returns to a state in which the game can proceed through the setting change state, and the game can proceed. When returning to the state, the setting command (end) that can specify that the setting change state is terminated is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but the return command is not transmitted. Further, after shifting to error processing due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the error state is released by shifting to the setting change processing as described above, so that the game can proceed to a state where it can proceed. Even when the error processing is completed and the game returns to a state in which the game can proceed, the return command is not transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is activated when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, performs the startup setting processing included in the game program, and all the startup setting processing is performed. Output ports 0 to 9 are initialized.

Further, the main control unit 41 performs the initial setting process included in the game program after performing the startup setting process. Then, in the initial setting process, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM initialization process included in the game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, and the game RAM area is initialized by the game program and is not a game. The RAM area is configured to be initialized by a non-game program.

Further, in the initial setting process, when the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state, the advantageous section information initialization process is executed to initialize the information regarding the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c. .. As a result, as information regarding the advantageous section, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 set in the RAM 41c can be initialized, and the slot machine 1 can be started with the section display LED 19 turned off. There is. Further, in the initial setting process, by executing the advantageous section information initialization process, the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section and the flag in the advantageous section are also initialized as information on the advantageous section. Therefore, after the slot machine 1 is started, Until the condition for shifting to the advantageous section is satisfied, the gaming state is controlled to the normal section and the section display LED 19 is maintained in the off state.

Further, in the RAM initialization process performed after the setting change process is completed, the information regarding the advantageous section is initialized, but the information regarding the carry-over state of the special role is not initialized, and the set value. Even if is changed, the carry-over state of the special role before the setting value is changed is maintained.

[Main processing]
The control content of the main process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. 13 to 15 are flow charts showing the control contents of the main process performed by the main control unit 41. The main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. And one cycle of the main process corresponds to one unit of the game. In addition, the main process is included in the game program and includes a plurality of processes. Hereinafter, processes not particularly indicated to be included in the non-game program are included in the game program. In addition, some game programs called by the game program call non-game programs.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 41 first sets the timer interrupt to prohibit (Sb1), and then sets the final address value of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the HL register (Sb2). ), The address one before the final address value of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized is set in the DE register (Sb3). Then, 0 is written to the area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register value and initialized (Sb4), and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register and the DE register is set by Sb58 or Sb87 described later. 0 is written in each storage area corresponding to the RAM initialization target size to be sequentially initialized (Sb5).

After that, the current game state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, the value corresponding to the game state is read into the A register (Sb6), and the game end command that can specify that one game has ended is issued. Set the value in the D register (Sb7). Then, the communication data storage process is performed (Sb8). In the communication data storage process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and the D register and set in the command queue. For example, when the game state is set in the A register and the value of the game end command is set in the D register, a game end command containing information that can identify the current game state is generated and set in the command queue. To do. The commands set in the command queue will be sequentially transmitted by the command transmission process included in the subsequent timer interrupt process.

After the communication data storage process is performed in the step Sb8, the values of the flag registers in which the calculation results are stored among the registers are placed in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order by using the second save instruction described above. After saving the data by storing it in (Sb9), the RT information output process included in the non-game program is called up by using the above-mentioned CALL instruction (Sb10).

In the RT information output process, first, the above-mentioned LD instruction is used to read the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, and the value is not set. It is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. By doing so, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register. Are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. As in the case where the non-game RAM area initialization process is called, the stack pointer SP is changed from the game program to the non-game as the RT information output process included in the non-game program is called from the game program. When the LD instruction is used when changing for a program, the second zero flag of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the RT information output process is called from the game program, the game program determines the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the RT information output process. It may be different from the register state when you call.

After that, the information on the game state of the slot machine 1 set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area is referred to, and the information on the game state (for example, the RT state) is transmitted to the test device connected to the slot machine 1. It is set to be output from the output port 7 as a test signal to be output. Then, the values of the registers stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the RT information output process is started are sequentially read from the non-game stack area in the reverse order of saving, and correspond to the order. By setting to the register, all the registers are restored to the state when the RT information output processing was started. After that, by using the LD instruction described above, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the RT information output process is started is read out and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the RT information output process was started, and the RT information output process is terminated. As in the case where the non-game RAM area initialization process is completed, the RT information output process is started in order to end the RT information output process included in the non-game program and return to the game program. When the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program after the values of all the registers saved at that time are restored, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register. It will be changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, the state of the register when the RT information output process is finished may be different from the state of the register saved when the RT information output process is started.

After performing the RT information output processing in the step of Sb10, the values of the flag registers saved in the step of Sb9 are sequentially moved from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving by using the second return instruction described above. It is restored by reading it out and setting it in the flag register (Sb11). The RT information output processing is performed by performing the save processing and the return processing of all the registers inside the RT information output processing in the step of Sb10 and the save processing and the return processing of the flag registers in the steps of Sb9 and Sb11. After that, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing was performed.

After returning the flag register in the step of Sb11, a value corresponding to a predetermined test signal standby time is set in the BC register (Sb12), and the timer is waited until the interrupt is performed the number of times of the BC register value. Interrupt BC to wait for BC times (Sb13). In the interrupt BC times wait process, the process of setting the timer interrupt to enable, waiting until the timer interrupt process is performed, and subtracting 1 from the BC register value each time the timer interrupt process is performed is performed by the BC register. Repeat until the value of is 0. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC times wait processing is terminated. In the step of Sb12, a value (29) corresponding to 16.24 msec is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the waiting time for the test signal, and the interrupt BC waiting process is performed in the step of Sb13. As a result, at least the waiting time for the test signal (16.24 ms) is secured from the RT information output process of Sb10 to the transition to the next process.

Further, by performing the interrupt BC times wait processing, it is possible to perform the processing performed after the interrupt BC times wait processing in a state where the maximum time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed is secured. , The timer is not interrupted unintentionally in the middle of a series of processes performed after the interrupt BC wait process. By performing the interrupt BC times wait processing in the Sb13 step, the timer interrupt is unintentionally performed in the middle of the processing from the Se1 step to the Se10 step of the game start wait processing performed after the interrupt BC times wait processing. It is possible to prevent the process from being carried out and perform the processes from the step of Se1 to the step of Se10 as a series of processes.

Further, by performing the interrupt BC times wait processing, the timer interrupt processing is surely performed once or more, and the interrupt BC times wait processing is performed in the state after each processing included in the timer interrupt processing is performed. It is possible to perform a series of processes performed after. For example, by performing interrupt BC times wait processing in the step of Sb13, the port input processing described later included in the timer interrupt processing is performed, and the game is played with the input data of various switches and sensors updated. It is possible to perform the processes from the Se1 step to the Se10 step of the start waiting process.

Then, after the timer interrupt processing is performed, the game start waiting processing is performed (Sb14), and the processing from the end of the control of the previous one game to the start of the next one game is performed. In the game start waiting process, the number of bets is set according to the insertion of medals, etc., and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the specified number of bets set, so that the next game is played. Perform the process to start.

Then, an internal lottery process for determining whether or not to allow the occurrence of winning (internal lottery) is performed (Sb15). In the internal lottery process, the occurrence of winning is allowed based on the preset values (1 to 6) set in advance in the slot machine 1 and the random value for the internal lottery acquired at the same time as the start of the game by detecting the start switch 7. An internal lottery is conducted to determine whether or not (that is, whether or not to allow the derivation of the display result). Then, the winning combination number (including the winning number and the loss) corresponding to the winning combination is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c so that the winning result in the internal lottery can be specified. Further, the group information setting process (general combination) is performed, and the group information (general combination) that can specify the type of the general combination that has been won based on the combination number (winning number) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, when a special role is won in the internal lottery (including the case where the special role is won in the internal lottery of the game and the case where the special role is won in the internal lottery of the game before the game and carried over). An internal winning flag indicating that the special combination (BB or CB) has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If a special role (BB1 or CB) is won in the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the BB is won, and if it is determined that the BB is won, the RAM 41c It is set in a predetermined area, and a predetermined value (ON state value: 1) for controlling the lighting state is set in the output buffer (output buffer of the status display LED 17) for controlling the lighting state of the status display LED 17. To do.

By setting the value of the ON state in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, the status display LED 17 is controlled to the lit state by the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process that is performed thereafter. The main control unit 41 of this embodiment starts the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by performing the reel rotation processing (Sb45) described later after performing the internal lottery processing, and all the reels are in a constant speed state. The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled on the condition that the result is satisfied, and the interrupt BC times wait processing (Sb28) is performed in the period from the internal lottery processing to the reel rotation processing. )I do. As a result, when the timer interrupt process is performed at least once during the period and the value of the ON state is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, that is, when BB1 is won, the stop switch is used. The status display LED 17 is controlled to be lit before the operation of the 8L, 8C, 8R is enabled, and the status notification is surely started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is enabled. It is possible to make it. Further, when a special combination (BB) is won by an internal lottery, a predetermined value (ON state value: 1) is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, and the status display LED 17 is turned on by the subsequent timer interrupt processing. Since the status is controlled, the status display starts immediately after the special combination (BB) is won, so the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R can be operated to set the time to check whether the status is displayed. It is possible to secure enough before it becomes effective.

Then, after performing the internal lottery process, a ball ejection control process for performing a process related to the game section and a process related to the navigation notification is performed as will be described later (Sb16). In the payout control process, a process of determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section based on the value of the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section, and when it is determined that the game is not in the advantageous section, three bets are set. In addition, advantageous section transition-related processing performed on the condition that the game state is not a special state (BB or CB) (for example, processing for determining whether or not an advantageous section transition combination has been won in an internal lottery, or advantageous in an internal lottery When it is determined that the section transition combination has been won, it is related to the process of shifting to the advantageous section by setting the advantageous section middle flag indicating that the control to the advantageous section is performed by continuous data processing, and the transition to the advantageous section. (Processing to make various settings, etc.), when it is determined that the advantageous section is set, regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2, the game after the advantageous section starts. A process of adding and updating the number of advantageous section games counter that counts the number of advantageous section games, which is a number, and a process related to navigation notification (for example, ED in which navigation notification is controlled over a period until the advantageous section ends. A section on the condition that the process of updating the ED transition game number counter for specifying the game to be shifted to control and the control to a predetermined payout state (for example, advantageous section AT or advantageous section special zone) are performed. The process of setting ON data (predetermined value: 1) to control the lighting state in the output buffer of the display LED 19, the navigation number corresponding to the winning combination is specified based on the navigation number based on the general combination winning number, and the navigation number is specified. A process of setting a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of performing various processes according to a currently controlled ball ejection state, and the like) are performed. The navigation number set in the ball ejection control process is referred to in the game start command transmission process (Sb22) described later, and a command capable of specifying the navigation number is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The navigation number is also referred to in the reel stop control process (Sb48), and corresponds to the navigation number before the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is enabled by the reel stop control process. The display data for displaying the navigation display is set in the output buffer of the game assistance display 12, and the navigation display is displayed on the game assistance display 12. In addition, the number of advantageous section games counter updated in the advantageous section by the ball ejection control process has reached the specified number of advantageous section games (second specified number) in the AT state management process (Sb60) described later. It will be referred to when determining whether or not.

After that, as in the step of Sb11, the value of the flag register in which the calculation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is placed in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order by using the second save instruction described above. After saving by storing in (Sb17) and setting the timer interrupt to prohibit (Sb18), the operation information signal output processing included in the non-game program is performed using the above-mentioned CALL instruction (Sb19). As will be described later, a process of outputting an operation information signal for designating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the winning result of the internal lottery from the output port to the test apparatus is performed.

In the operation information signal output processing, first, in the same manner as the above-mentioned RT information output processing, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read by using the above-mentioned LD instruction, and the non-game RAM area. Save to the specified area of. After that, by using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read, and the value stored as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP is set to set the stack pointer SP. Set for non-gaming programs. Then, by using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register described above are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order to save the values. Let me. It should be noted that the LD instruction is used when the stack pointer SP is changed from the game program to the non-game program as the operation information signal output process included in the non-game program is called from the game program. The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the operation information signal output process is called from the game program, the game program determines the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the operation information signal output process. It may be different from the register state when the signal output process is called.

After that, the process of referring to the lottery result of the internal lottery set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area and outputting the operation information signal for specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the winning result of the internal lottery is performed. Do.

Then, in the same manner as the RT information output processing described above, the values of the registers saved when the operation information signal output processing is started are sequentially read from the non-game stack area by using the first return instruction described above. Operation information Restores all registers to the state when signal output processing was started. After that, when the operation information signal output processing is started by using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area is read out and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the operation information signal output processing was started, and the operation information signal output processing is terminated. In order to end the operation information signal output processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, after returning the values of all the registers saved at the start of the operation information signal output processing, When the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, and the flag is changed before and after the LD instruction is executed. The state of the register may change. That is, the state of the register when the operation information signal output process is completed may be different from the state of the register saved when the operation information signal output process is started.

The operation information signal output process is performed after the section display LED 19 is controlled to be lit to display the section and the ball ejection control process for setting the navigation number is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the signal output processing, the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started.

After the operation information signal output processing is performed in the step of Sb19, the timer interrupt is set to allow (Sb20). Then, similarly to the step of Sb11, the value of the flag register saved in the game stack area in the step of Sb17 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of the saving by using the second return instruction described above. By setting the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before the operation information signal output processing is performed (Sb21). The operation information signal output processing is performed by performing the save processing and the return processing of all the registers inside the operation information signal output processing in the step of Sb19 and the save processing and the recovery processing of the flag registers in the steps of Sb17 and Sb21. After that, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the process was performed.

After returning the register in the step of Sb21, the game start command transmission process is performed (Sb22), and it is possible to specify that one game has started, and it is possible to specify various control states at the start of one game. A control state command group including a plurality of commands is set in the command queue, and the sub-control unit 91 is sequentially transmitted.

After performing the game start command process in the step of Sb22, the transmission data is set in the A register (Sb23), and the communication data storage process is executed (S24). After that, the number of the external output signal output at the start of the game is read into the A register (Sb25), and the external output signal processing for outputting the external output signal to the external device such as the ring lamp or the hall computer is performed (Sb26). In the external output signal processing, the external output signal corresponding to the value set in the A register at the start of the external output signal processing is output from a predetermined output port.

After performing the external output signal processing in the step of Sb26, a value corresponding to the predetermined game start waiting time is set in the BC register (Sb27), and the timer is waited until the interrupt is performed the number of times of the value of the BC register. Interrupt BC to wait for BC times (Sb28). In the interrupt BC times wait process, the process of setting the timer interrupt to enable, waiting until the timer interrupt process is performed, and subtracting 1 from the BC register value each time the timer interrupt process is performed is performed by the BC register. Repeat until the value of is 0. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC times wait processing is terminated. In the step of Sb27, a value (238) corresponding to 133.28 msec is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the waiting time for starting the game, and the interrupt BC waiting process is performed in the step of Sb28. Therefore, at least the game start waiting time (133.28 msec) is secured between the processing of the external output signal of Sb26 and the transition to the next processing.

After the interrupt BC waiting process is performed in the step of Sb28, a waiting time effect determination process for controlling the freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period is performed (Sb29). In the waiting time effect determination process, it is determined whether or not it is determined to control the freeze state when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started, based on the freeze flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When the determination is made and it is determined that the control to the freeze state is determined, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, interrupt BC waiting processing is performed, and the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set so that it can be specified that the freeze state is controlled, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball ejection control process. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect determination process, when it is determined that the control to the freeze state is not determined based on the freeze flag, the process waits without setting the BC register or interrupt BC times waiting process. The time production determination process is terminated.

After performing the waiting time effect determination process in the step of Sb29, an external output signal process for outputting an external output signal from a predetermined output port to an external device such as a ring lamp or a hall computer is performed (Sb30). Then, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and it is determined whether or not it is determined to generate a short freeze (a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined short period, hereinafter may be referred to as SF). The identifiable SF flag value is read into the A register (Sb31), and it is determined whether or not it is determined to generate SF based on the SF flag value (Sb32). The SF flag is set so that it can be specified to be generated in SF, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball ejection control process.

If it is determined in the step of Sb32 that SF is to be generated, the start address of the SF time setting table in which the period to be controlled in SF is registered in advance is set in the HL register (Sb33). , The addition process is executed (Sb34). In the addition process, the address value (HL) is added to the address value (HL) set in the HL register by adding the addition value (A) set in the A register at the start of the addition process to the addition value (HL). A) Perform the process of advancing by the amount. Further, in the addition process, the data stored in the storage area of the ROM 41b specified by the address value (HL) after the addition value (A) is added is acquired and set in the A register. .. By setting the SF flag value in the A register, setting the address of the SF time setting table in the HL register, and performing addition processing, the period for controlling SF based on the SF flag value and the SF time setting table is set. The set value for setting is acquired in the A register.

After the addition process is performed in the step of Sb34, the set value of the period controlled by the SF acquired in the A register is set in the B register (Sb35). Then, a reel effect number capable of specifying the type of reel effect is set in the A register (Sb36), and the reel rotation start process is executed (Sb37). In the reel rotation start processing, the reel rotation control is started in the rotation mode specified based on the A register value. After that, the B register value is reset to the A register, and the waiting time execution process is performed (Sb37). The waiting time execution process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times specified based on the A register value, and the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times to end the waiting time execution process.

After determining that it is determined to generate SF in the step of Sb32, performing the waiting time execution process, and performing SF, the RAM 41c is used to time the elapsed time from the start of reel rotation in the previous game. The address of the one-game time management timer set in the predetermined area of is set in the HL register (Sb39), and the one-game time management timer is referred to based on the HL register value, and the one-game time management timer is used. Determines whether or not is in operation (Sb40). After the initial value (value corresponding to the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game) is set for the timer for one game time management, a predetermined value is subtracted each time the timer interrupt processing is performed, and the initial value From the time when is set until the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game elapses, it becomes 1 or more, while the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game elapses from the time when the initial value is set. After that, it becomes 0.

In the step of Sb40, when the timer value for one game time management is not 0, it is determined that the timer for one game time management is operating, and when the timer value for one game time management is 0, it is for one game time management. Determine that the timer is not running. Then, if it is determined that the specified time has not elapsed since the previous game was started based on the one-game time management timer, the specified time of one game elapses based on the one-game time management timer. Wait until (Sb40).

As shown in FIG. 14, after the specified time of one game has elapsed based on the one-game time management timer, after the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited (Sb41), a predetermined setting index at the start of the game is set. Data is set in the A register (Sb42), and continuous data processing is performed (Sb43). In continuous data processing, as will be described later, predetermined data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the value (A) set in the A register at the start of the continuous data processing and the continuous data processing table described later. It is a process to perform a process to be performed. Setting at the start of the game By performing continuous data processing with the index data set in the A register, the timer for one game time management has an initial value (a value corresponding to the specified time (4.1 seconds) of one game). ) Is set, the stop switch operation counter that counts the number of times the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are effectively operated in one game is set to the initial value (3 in this embodiment), and each stop switch. Performs processing such as setting an initial value in the stop switch operating status flag that can specify the operating status of 8L, 8C, and 8R.

The initial value set in the one-game time management timer by performing continuous data processing in the step of Sb43 is referred to in the timer interrupt processing performed thereafter, and the initial value is set in the one-game time management timer. Based on the above, the time counting of the predetermined time by the test signal output timer for managing the output time of the test signal is newly started. Further, the one-game time management timer is subtracted each time the counter update process (Sv20) performed by the timer interrupt process is performed so that the value becomes 0 after the time corresponding to the initial value has elapsed. Will be updated. Based on the fact that the timer for one game time management is 0, when the initial value is set for the timer for one game time management, that is, when the reel rotation start process is started in the previous game, one game It is possible to identify that the specified time (4.1 seconds) has passed.

After the continuous data processing is performed in the step of Sb43, the data without reel effect indicating that the effect using the reel is not performed is set in the A register (Sb44), and the reel rotation start process is performed (Sb45). In the reel rotation start processing, the reel rotation control is started in the rotation mode specified based on the A register value, that is, the rotation mode of the normal game. After that, after setting the timer interrupt to allow (Sb46), a reel rotation start command for transmitting a reel rotation start command that can specify that the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is to be started is sent to the sub control unit 91. The transmission process is performed (Sb47). On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sa40 that the specified time of one game has elapsed based on the timer for managing one game time, the steps of steps Sb41 to Sb47 are immediately processed.

After performing the reel rotation start command transmission process in the step of Sb47, the reel stop control process for controlling the reel stop is performed (Sb48). In the reel stop control process, first, the navigation number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the display data for performing the navigation display according to the navigation number (when the navigation number is 0, it is hidden). If it is data and the navigation number is 1 or more, the navigation display data corresponding to the navigation number) is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to the display mode according to the display data by the subsequent timer interrupt processing. After setting the display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, it is determined whether the reel under rotation control is rotating at a predetermined constant speed rotation, and there is a reel that is not rotated at the constant speed rotation. Is set to an excitation pattern that detects a reel error and accelerates the corresponding reel to a constant speed rotation, and controls so that all the reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed rotation. On the other hand, when all the reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed, the acceptance of the reel stop operation during rotation control is enabled, and until the player performs the reel stop operation with the stop switch. stand by. By enabling the acceptance of the stop operation, the stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R of the corresponding stop switch are controlled to be lit by the timer interrupt process performed thereafter. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for the reel for which the stop operation is enabled (ON edge data is detected for the stop switch for which the stop operation is valid), the reel for which the effective stop operation is performed is performed. Reel stop control for stopping at a predetermined stop position is performed based on the information set in the reel stop initial setting process. Such reel stop control is repeatedly performed for the reel under rotation control to stop the rotation of all the reels, thereby ending the reel stop control process.

Then, after the reel stop control process is completed, the winning determination process (Sb49) is performed. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred based on the internal lottery result and the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. More specifically, in the winning determination process, whether or not a winning is generated based on the internal lottery result and the symbol combination that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Is determined.

Then, after the winning determination process in the step of Sa49 is performed, the interrupt one-time wait process is performed (Sb50), and the process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed. Then, on condition that the timer interrupt process is performed once, the interrupt wait process is terminated once.

After the interrupt wait processing is performed once in the step of Sb45, the calculation result among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is stored by using the second return instruction described above as in the step of Sb9 and the step of Sb17. The value of the flag register is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order (Sb51), and after the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited (Sb52), the above-mentioned CALL instruction is used to display the data. Data processing for the combination monitor included in the game program is performed (Sb53).

In this way, by performing the data processing for role ratio monitoring (Sb53) after performing one interrupt wait processing in the step of Sb50, the maximum time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed is secured. In this state, the data processing for the role ratio monitor can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from being unintentionally performed during the data processing for the combination ratio monitor. Further, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited in the step of Sb52, the data processing for the role ratio monitor is performed in the state where the timer interrupt is prohibited, and the prohibition setting of the timer interrupt is released in the subsequent step of Sb54. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the timer interrupt from being unintentionally performed during the data processing for the role ratio monitor. Further, in the step of Sb50, the timer interrupt process is performed by performing the interrupt wait process once before setting the timer interrupt to the prohibited state in order to perform the data processing for the role ratio monitor, thereby performing the timer interrupt process. Is prohibited (Sb52 to Sb54), it is possible to prevent the timing of timer interrupt, and timer interrupt is prohibited (Sb52 to Sb54). By timing the interrupt, when the prohibition of the timer interrupt is lifted, the timer interrupt is not performed and the timer interrupt process is not performed at an unintended timing. There is.

Further, by setting the timer interrupt to be prohibited in the step of Sb52, the role ratio is changed from the time when the flag register is saved in the step of Sb51, as in the case of setting the timer interrupt to be prohibited in the step of Sb18 described above. The timer interrupt process is performed during the period from the start of monitor data processing to the process of saving the values of all registers, so that the register status changes from the state when the flag register was saved. It is designed so that it will not be changed.

In the data processing for the role ratio monitor, first, in the same manner as the above-mentioned RT information output processing, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read by using the above-mentioned LD instruction, and the non-game Save to a predetermined area of the RAM area. After that, the LD instruction is used to read the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program and set it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP to set the stack pointer SP as a non-game. Set for the program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the LD instruction is used when the stack pointer SP is changed from the game program to the non-game program as the data processing for the role ratio monitor included in the non-game program is called from the game program. , The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the combination monitor data processing is called from the game program, the game program determines the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the combination monitor data processing. It may be different from the register state when the data processing for role ratio monitoring is called.

After that, each state count process included in the non-game program is performed for a predetermined period (for example, a period from the current game to 6000 games before, a period from the current game to 175,000 games before, for the player. Update the data on the number of medals paid out in the section controlled to the advantageous state (advantageous section, etc.).

Then, using the first return instruction described above, the register values stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the combination monitor data processing is started are stored in the non-game stack area in the reverse order of the saving. By sequentially reading from the stack area and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the data processing for role ratio monitoring is started. After that, using the LD instruction described above, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the data processing for the combination monitor is started is read out and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Then, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the data processing for the role ratio monitor is started, and the data processing for the role ratio monitor is terminated. In addition, in order to end the data processing for the role ratio monitor included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the values of all the registers saved at the start of the data processing for the combination ratio monitor were restored. Later, when the stack pointer SP is changed from a non-game program to a game program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, and before and after the LD instruction is executed. The status of the flag register may change with. That is, the state of the register when the role ratio monitor data processing is completed may be different from the state of the register saved when the role ratio monitor data processing is started.

After performing the combination monitoring data processing in the step of Sb53, the timer interrupt is set to allow (Sb54). Then, similarly to the step of Sb11 and the step of Sb21, the value of the flag register saved in the step of Sb51 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of the saving by using the second return instruction described above. By setting it in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before the data processing for the combination monitor is performed (Sb55). By performing the save processing and recovery processing of all the registers inside the data processing for role ratio monitoring in the step of Sb53 and the saving processing and recovery processing of the flag registers in the steps of Sb51 and Sb55, the data for role ratio monitoring is performed. After the processing is performed, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

After returning the flag register in the step of Sb55, the door command indicating the detection status of the door open detection switch 25 is set in the command queue (Sb56), and the door command is issued in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main). It is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

After that, an illegal winning check process is performed (Sb57). In the fraudulent winning check process, it is determined whether or not fraudulent winning has occurred based on the combination of symbols stopped at the winning line LN of the reel and the winning result of the internal lottery, and when fraudulent winning has occurred. Is set in the A register to end the fraudulent winning check process, while the fraudulent winning check process is performed without setting the error code when no fraudulent winning has occurred.

After performing the fraudulent winning check process in Sb57, the combination end check process is performed (Sb58). In the combination end check process, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special state (BB or CB), and if it is in a special state, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the special state is satisfied in the game. .. Then, when it is determined that the end condition of the special state is satisfied, a process of setting an end flag indicating the end of the special state in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

After performing the combination end check process in Sb58, the game state setting process is performed (Sb59). In the game state setting process, it is determined whether or not the BB or CB won in the internal lottery has won, and if it is determined that the BB or CB has won, the special state in which the game state has been won is determined. Perform the process of migrating to.

After performing the game state setting process in Sb59, an AT state management process for performing a process related to the game section and a process related to navigation notification is performed (Sb60). In the AT state management process, a process of determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section based on whether or not the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), or a process of determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section. Update the net increase counter that counts the net increase of medals paid out in the advantageous section regardless of whether 3 bets are set or 2 bets are set in the game when it is determined. Processing, processing to set the advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is terminated when it is determined that the net increase number of medals exceeds the first specified number based on the updated net increase counter, for the number of advantageous section games Processing to set the advantageous section end flag when it is determined that the number of advantageous section games specified based on has reached the second specified number, the state where the number of bets is 2, or the game state other than RT1 Processing related to navigation notification performed under the conditions (for example, processing for setting an ED transition flag indicating that ED control is performed when it is determined that the net increase number specified based on the net increase number counter exceeds the third specified number, ED Processing to set the ED transition flag indicating that ED control is performed when it is determined that the number of ED transition games specified based on the transition game number counter has reached the fourth specified number, various types according to the ball ejection state Processing, etc.).

The advantageous section end flag set by the AT state management process is referred to in the process (Sb70) described later in the main process, and when the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the storage area of the RAM 41c Information about the advantageous section (for example, advantageous section game number counter, net increase number counter, ED transition game number counter, ball ejection status information, section display LED19 output buffer, advantageous section signal output buffer, etc.) is stored. By performing the advantageous section data initialization process (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing the predetermined area, a series of advantageous sections is completed. The advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the setting of the advantageous section end flag, and the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized, so that the section display LED 19 is controlled to be turned off and the section display is displayed. Is terminated. Further, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, so that the signal during the advantageous section is controlled to the OFF state.

After performing the AT state management process in Sb60, perform batch transmission data storage process (Sb61), and collectively set a plurality of commands to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 at the end of one game in the command queue. .. A plurality of commands set by the batch transmission data storage process will be sequentially transmitted by the subsequent timer interrupt process.

After performing the batch transmission data storage process in the step of Sb61, the freeze process between stops is performed (Sb62). In the freeze process between stops, it is determined based on the freeze flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c whether or not it is determined to control the freeze state when the third stop operation is performed, and the freeze state is determined. When it is determined that the control is determined to be performed, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, interrupt BC waiting processing is performed, and the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set so that it can be specified that the freeze state is controlled, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball ejection control process. On the other hand, in the inter-stop freeze processing, when it is determined that the control to the freeze state is not determined based on the freeze flag, the inter-stop freeze processing is performed without setting the BC register or interrupt BC times waiting processing. End the freeze process.

After the stop-to-stop freeze process is performed in the step of Sb62, a medal payout process is performed to pay out the number of medals according to the winning prize generated as a result of the game (Sb63). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals are given to the player according to the winning combination, and the number of medals to be given is added to the credits, and the credit is the maximum number ( In this embodiment, when 50) is reached, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out the medals not added to the credit from the medal payout outlet 9.

After the medal payout process is performed in the step of Sb62, the transmission data indicating that the medal payout process is completed is set in the A register (Sb64), and the value of the payout end command is set in the D register (Sb65). Communication data storage processing is performed (Sb66). In the communication data storage process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and the D register and set in the command queue, and transmission data indicating that the dull payout process is completed in the A register Is set and the value of the payout end command is set in the D register, a payout end command indicating that the medal payout process is completed is generated and set in the command queue.

After performing the communication data storage process in the step of Sb66, the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game is set in the HL register (Sb67), and the waiting time effect process is performed (Sb68). In the waiting time effect processing, it is determined whether or not it is determined to control the freeze state at the end of the game based on the data set in the game end freeze setting address in the RAM 41c, and the freeze state is controlled. When it is determined that the game is to be performed, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, interrupt BC waiting processing is performed, and the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period. At the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, for example, data that can specify that the freeze state is controlled when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball ejection control process is set. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect processing, when it is determined that the data that can be specified to control the freeze state is not set in the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, the BC register is set or the interrupt BC is set. The waiting time effect processing is terminated without performing the waiting process or the like.

After performing the waiting time effect in the step of Sb68, the setting process at the end of the game is performed (Sb69). In the setting process at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the re-game combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and if the symbol combination of the re-game combination is stopped, in the next game. Process for setting the number of bets for performing the re-game (In this embodiment, the same number of bets as the specified number of the game is set as the re-game medal in the re-game medal counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. ), A process of setting the replaying flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of controlling the LED 20 during replay to the ON state (lighting state), and the like.

Then, after performing the setting process at the end of the game in the step of Sb69, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is ended is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb70), which is advantageous. When it is determined that the section end flag is set, the advantageous section data initial period that initializes the predetermined area in the storage area of the RAM 41c in which the data related to the control in the advantageous section is stored and ends the advantageous section. Chemical treatment (Sb71 to Sb79) is performed.

In the advantageous section data initialization process, first, the number of divisions of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the process (2 in this embodiment) is set in the predetermined register (D) as the number of initialization area divisions (Sb71). .. Then, the RAM initialization table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas (capacity, the number of included addresses) to be initialized correspond to the values indicated by the number of divisions. The address of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which the set table) is stored is set in the predetermined register (HL) (Sb72). After that, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is acquired from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, the predetermined register (B) is set as the number of addresses of the initialization target area, and the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is acquired and used as the initialization target RAM address. It is set in the predetermined register (C) (Sb73, Sb74).

Then, after the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A), the predetermined register (A) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in the predetermined register (C). By setting the initialization data set in), the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sb75). After that, by adding 1 to the value of the predetermined register (C), the initialization target RAM address is advanced by one (Sb76).

Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), the number of remaining addresses is subtracted by 1, and then it is determined whether or not the number of remaining addresses is larger than 0 to determine whether or not the initialization target range is completed. Is determined (Sb78). If it is determined that the number of remaining initial addresses is larger than 0 in the step of Sd78 and the initialization target range is not completed, the process returns to the step of Sb75, and the number of remaining addresses becomes 0 in each process of Sb75 to Sb78. This is repeated until the initialization target determination is completed. As a result, the storage area (initialization target range) of the number of storage areas (addresses) to be initialized is changed from the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized, which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table. , It is initialized with the initialization data.

When it is determined in the step of Sb78 that the number of remaining addresses is not larger than 0 and the initialization target range is completed, that is, when all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table are initialized. By subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (D), the value indicated by the number of divisions in the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized is subtracted by 1 (Sb78), and whether or not the value indicated by the number of divisions after subtraction is 0. (Sb79), and if the value indicated by the number of divisions is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sb73, and based on the value indicated by the number of divisions, the number of storage areas to be initialized next is stored in the RAM initialization table. The value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is acquired from the RAM initialization table while being set in the predetermined register (B) as the number of addresses of the initialization target area. After setting the initialization target RAM address in the predetermined register (C) (Sb73, Sb74), the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) and set in the predetermined register (C). After initializing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c with the initialization data by setting the initialization data set in the predetermined register (A) in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address. (Sb75), the process of advancing the initialization target RAM address by one by adding 1 to the value of the predetermined register (C) (Sb75) is repeated until it is determined that the number of addresses becomes 0 in the step of Sb79. As a result, the storage area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) is initialized. By repeating each process in the steps Sb73 to Sb78 until the number of divisions of the storage area becomes 0, the predetermined storage area of the RAM 41c designated by the number of divisions is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of divisions in the storage area of the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The data related to the control in the advantageous section includes data related to the control of the AT state, and a predetermined area in which the data related to the control in the advantageous section in the RAM 41c is stored by the advantageous section data initialization process. By initializing, the data related to the control in the advantageous section and the data related to the control of the AT state are initialized, and the advantageous section is terminated and the AT state is terminated.

In this embodiment, in the advantageous section data initialization process, the initial value of the number of sections is set to 2, and the storage areas in the two predetermined sections in the RAM 41c are initialized. However, the advantageous section data initialization process is used. The RAM 41c may be configured to initialize a predetermined storage area of one division or a storage area of three or more divisions.

As shown in FIG. 15, after determining that the advantageous section end flag is set in the step of Sb70 and performing the advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79), and in the step of Sb70, the advantageous section ends. After determining that the flag is not set, the currently controlled game section is set based on whether or not the flag in the advantageous section indicating that the flag is set in the advantageous section is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section (Sb80). As for the advantageous section middle flag, a predetermined advantageous section transition combination is set by the internal lottery in a game in which three bets are set as a specified number by the ball ejection control process in the step of Sb16 described above and are not controlled by the BB. By winning, the game section is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c on condition that the game section is shifted to the advantageous section.

When it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set in the step of Sb80, the data (1) indicating the ON state is set in the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb81). ), Proceed to the step of Sb82. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is not set in the step of Sb80, the process proceeds to the step of Sb82 without setting the data indicating the ON state in the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section. When the data indicating the ON state is not set in the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section, the value of the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section is 0 value (OFF state) when it is initialized by the above-mentioned advantageous section data initialization process. Data indicating) is maintained.

After that, in the step of Sb82, the value of the data set in the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section is the initial value (data indicating the 0: OFF state) with reference to the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section. Judge whether or not. Then, when it is determined in the step of Sb82 that the value of the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section is the initial value (0), that is, when it is determined that the game section is not controlled to the advantageous section, the section display LED is turned off. After setting the hour data number in the A register (Sb83) and performing continuous data processing (Sb84), the process proceeds to the step of Sb85. In the continuous data processing in Sb84, a process of setting the output state of the signal during the advantageous section to the OFF state is performed based on the data number when the section display LED is turned off and the continuous data processing table described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sb82 that the value of the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section is not the initial value (0), that is, the predetermined value (1) is set and the game section is controlled to the advantageous section. If it is determined, the process proceeds to the step of Sb85 without processing the steps of Sb83 and Sb84.

In the step of Sb85, after setting the capacity (RAM initialization target size) of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized at each end of one game in the BC register (Sb85), the BB end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the special states (BB1, BB2) have ended in the game based on whether or not the game has ended (Sb86). The BB end flag is a flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) has been completed in the game by the above-mentioned combination end check process.

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the capacity (RAM initialization target size) of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized each time the special state ends is set in the BC register. (Sb87), the process returns to the process of the step of Sb1. On the other hand, if it is not determined in the step of Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the process of the step of Sb87 is not performed and the process returns to the process of the step of Sb1.

After that, the steps Sb1 to Sb87 are repeated. When the main process goes through, the process related to the control of one unit of the game is completed, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of the game.

As described above, the initial setting process and the main process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment are the processes included in the game program to the processes included in the non-game program, for example, the non-game RAM area initialization process and the RT information output. Processing, medal sensor processing, data processing for role ratio monitoring, etc. are called. Then, when calling the process included in the non-game program, each time the process of the corresponding non-game program is called, the game program of the caller sets the value of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41. It is stored in the stack area and saved, and the value of the stack pointer SP used in the game program is stored and saved in the non-game RAM area on the called non-game program side, and all the main control unit 41 has. The value of the register of is stored in the non-game stack area and saved. Then, processing according to the called non-game program (for example, a process of initializing the non-game RAM area in the non-game RAM area initialization process, a medal sensor check process in the medal sensor process described later, and a role ratio monitor described later). Each state count processing in data processing, etc.) is performed.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the values of all the registers saved in the non-game stack area at the start of the non-game program on the non-game program side after processing the non-game program. The register is restored to the state at the start of the non-game program, and the value of the stack pointer SP stored in the non-game RAM area at the start of the non-game program is set in the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the start of the game program, and the value of the flag register stored in the game stack area before the call of the non-game program on the calling game program side is set to the corresponding flag register. The process of reading and returning the register to the state before calling the non-game program is performed.

Further, when the main control unit 41 performs various processes according to the non-game program, the main control unit 41 calls the non-game program from the game program by using the above-mentioned CALL instruction or the like to perform various processes according to the non-game program. When each process corresponding to the non-game program is completed, the game program of the caller is restored.

The main control unit 41 (main CPU 41a) of the present embodiment may call RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, data processing for role ratio monitoring, etc. included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program. It is possible, and the processes included in the non-game program called by the main process (RT information output process, operation information signal output process, data processing for role ratio monitoring, etc.) are called when the predetermined process is started. First, the LD instruction is used by the main process of the calling game program to read the value of the stack pointer SP and save it in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the LD instruction is used to perform the previous process. By reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved at the end of the non-game program and setting it as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP, the process of setting the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is performed.

Further, in the non-game program called by the main process, after setting the stack pointer SP for the non-game program by using the LD instruction, all the registers are set to the RAM 41c by using the first evacuation instruction (PUSH ALL). Performs a process of saving to a predetermined area. At this time, by using the LD instruction to set the stack pointer SP for the non-game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the flag register is changed before and after the execution of the LD instruction. The state of the flag register when the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by changing the state of is different from the state when the main process calls the non-game program. That is, on the non-game program side, among all the registers saved by using the first save instruction, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program. , The flag register may be different from the state when the main process calls the non-game program.

In addition, the non-game program called by the main process ends the first return command (POP) when the non-game program is terminated and returned to the main process included in the game program.
ALL) is used to restore the values of all the registers saved at the start of the processing of the non-game program, and then the LD instruction is used to set the stack pointer SP for the game program and use it for the main processing. Return. At this time, by using the LD instruction, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register changes before and after the execution of the LD instruction, so that the game program shifts to the main process. The state of the flag register at the time of returning may be different from the state when the main process calls the non-game program. That is, among all the registers when returning from the non-game program to the main process, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program, while the flag register is in the same state. , The main process may be different from the state when the non-game program is called.

In this way, the state of the flag register saved and restored by using the first save instruction and the first return instruction on the non-game program side is the state when the main process calls the non-game program, that is, the main process. The state of the flag register used by is different from that of the flag register, and the non-game program side protects the state when the main process calls the non-game program for all the registers including the flag register provided in the main control unit 41. It is difficult to do.

On the other hand, in the main process of this embodiment, when calling the processes included in the non-game program (RT information output process, operation information signal output process, data processing for role ratio monitor, etc.), the corresponding non-game program is used. Each time the process of is called, the main processing side of the caller uses the second save instruction (PUSH AF) to store the state of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 in the game stack area and save it. Then, when returning to the main processing from the processing included in the non-game program, the main processing side uses the second return instruction (POP AF) to save the state of the flag register to the game stack area. Restore. As a result, in the main processing, when returning from the processing included in the called non-game program, the state of the flag register can be restored to the state saved when the non-game program is called on the main processing side. Of the registers returned by the non-game program, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program, while the flag register is in the same state as the non-game program. When returning from the non-game program to the main process, the state of all registers can be returned to the state when the main process called the non-game program, even if it may be different from the state when calling. It has become like.

Further, in the process included in the non-game program called from the main process included in the game program, the state of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is set to the non-game stack area by using the first save instruction (PUSH ALL). It is saved and the state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 is returned to the state saved in the non-game stack area by using the first return instruction (POP ALL), while the main process is the second save instruction ( PUSH AF) is used to save the state of only the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the game stack area, and the second return instruction (POP AF) is used to move the state of the flag register to the game stack area. It is designed to return to the retracted state. As a result, in the game program, the state of the flag register is saved and restored by using the 1-byte second save instruction and the second return instruction. Therefore, the 2-byte first save instruction and the first return used in the non-game program are used. The capacity of the game program can be reduced as compared with the case where the state of the register is saved and restored by using an instruction. Further, in the game program, since the state of only the flag register among the plurality of registers is saved in the game stack area by using the second save instruction, the state of all the registers is saved by using the first save instruction used in the non-game program. The capacity of the game stack area can be reduced as compared with the case of saving.

In the processing included in the game program such as the main processing of the present embodiment, the value of the second zero flag in the flag register is not used for the determination for advancing various processing based on the program.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when calling the processing included in the non-game program (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, data processing for role ratio monitoring, etc.), timer interrupt is set to prohibit and called. By setting the timer interrupt to allow when the process returns to the main process, the timer interrupt is prohibited for the period during which the process included in the non-game program is being executed.

In the main process of this embodiment, when calling the process included in the non-game program (operation information signal output process, data process for role ratio monitor, etc.), the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited after saving the flag register. Then, when returning from the called process to the main process, the timer interrupt is set to allow and then the flag register is restored.

In the main process included in the game program of this embodiment, it is possible to call the operation information signal output process, the medal sensor process, the combination ratio monitor data process, etc. included in the non-game program, and these non-game programs If the processing included in is executed by the main control unit 41 in a state where sufficient time is secured until the next timer interrupt processing is performed, until the next timer interrupt processing is performed. If all the processes included in the process are completed within the time, but the main control unit 41 executes the process when the time until the next timer interrupt process is not sufficiently secured is not secured. Within the time until the next timer interrupt process is performed, all the processes included in the process may not be completed, and it may be the timing when the next timer interrupt process is performed during the execution of the process. It is composed of capacity programs.

Then, in the game program of this embodiment (main process, game start wait process, etc.), when the non-game program is called, the interrupt process is performed once to perform the timer interrupt process, and then the non-game program is not executed. A series of processes including a process of calling a game program are performed, and a non-game program is called. That is, by calling the non-game program triggered by the one-interrupt wait process, the non-game program is executed in a state where sufficient time is secured until the next timer interrupt process is performed. It has become.

As described above, in the main process of the present embodiment, the advantageous section end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the advantageous section is terminated, the signal output in the advantageous section stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is output. After performing the advantageous section data initialization process (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing the information regarding the advantageous section including the buffer and initializing the signal output buffer in the advantageous section to control the signal in the advantageous section to the OFF state. Continuous data processing is performed based on the initial value (0) of the signal output buffer in the advantageous section (Sb82 to Sb84), data in the OFF state is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and the section is displayed. Is supposed to be terminated. As a result, since the section display is terminated after the signal in the advantageous section is turned off, it is possible to prevent the section display from ending when the advantageous section-related information is not initialized, and the advantageous section can be prevented from ending. Since the medium signal output buffer is not initialized, it is possible to prevent the section display from ending even though the signal during the advantageous section is output to the test apparatus.

In the main process of this embodiment, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing the information regarding the advantageous section is performed, and the timer interrupt process performed thereafter causes the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section to be in the OFF state. When the indicated initial value (0) is set, the signal during the advantageous section is controlled to the OFF state. Thereby, by initializing the signal in the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section, the signal in the advantageous section can be turned off without individually setting the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section to the OFF state.

In the main process of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the user is in the advantageous section based on the advantageous section flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80), and when it is determined that the user is in the advantageous section, the signal in the advantageous section is output. A predetermined value (1) indicating an ON state is set in the buffer (Sb81), and when the predetermined value is set in the signal buffer during the advantageous section by the timer interrupt processing performed thereafter, the signal during the advantageous section is turned ON. It is designed to control the state. As a result, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section at each end of the game, and if it is determined that the game is in the advantageous section, the ON state is set in the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the signal from being turned off during the advantageous section. The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can execute a main process that is repeatedly executed for each game of one unit and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals. Then, it is possible to perform specific processing (processing by the game program) and special processing (processing by the non-game program) in the main processing, and one game time management for timing the minimum time of one game in the timer interrupt processing. It is possible to perform timer processing (Sv20) for updating the timer value. While the specific process (game program) is being executed, the timer interrupt process may be executed, and the timer value for one game time management is updated, while the timer is being executed during the special process (non-game program). The interrupt process is not executed, and the timer value for one game time management is not updated. As a result, by updating the timer value for one game time management as much as possible, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, but the timer value for one game time management is not updated during the period when the special processing is performed. As a result, the process of updating the timer value for one game time management and the special process are not mixed. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly.

In the main process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, in the initial setting process performed after the power failure is restored, from the time when the timer interrupt is prohibited by Sa01 until the timer interrupt is permitted by Sa27. The timer interrupt process is not executed. Therefore, in the initial setting process, the timer value for one game time management is not updated by the counter update process. As a result, the timer value for one game time management is not updated until the initial setting process is performed after the power failure is restored and the game can be advanced, so that the game can be smoothly advanced.

In the main process of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) before the start of reel rotation in one game (Sb40), and the timer value for one game time management. If it is determined that is not a specific value (0), the game waits without progressing until the timer value for one game time management is determined to be a specific value (0), and the timer value for one game time management When it is determined that is a specific value (0), the game is advanced. As a result, the game is not advanced until it is specified that the minimum time has elapsed based on the timer value for one game time management, and the game is advanced when the minimum time has elapsed, so that the minimum time per game is achieved. Can be secured.

In the main process of this embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) (Sb40), the execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited (Sb41), and then continuous data processing is performed. By doing so (Sb43), an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) is set in the one-game time management timer. As a result, the timer interrupt process is prohibited when setting the initial value for the one-game time management timer. Therefore, the one-game time management is used while the initial value is set for the one-game time management timer. It is possible to prevent the timer value from being updated. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly.

As a special process (non-game program), the main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes a medal sensor process (Sg9) for monitoring the passing status of medals flowing down the medal receiving flow path 29b. As a result, during the period during which the medal sensor process to be monitored is performed, the timer value for one game time management is not updated, which is related to the process of updating the timer value for one game time management and the detection of fraud. Medal sensor processing is not mixed.

As a special process (non-gaming program), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is data for calculating the bonus payout ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, which is the total cumulative payout number, the total cumulative bonus payout number, and the total cumulative total. The data processing for the winning combination monitor that updates the number of continuous bonus payouts is executed. As a result, during the period during which the data processing for the role ratio monitor that updates the data for calculating the bonus payout ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is being performed, the timer value for one game time management is not updated. The process of updating the timer value for game time management and the data process for role ratio monitoring related to the performance display of the game machine are not mixed.

As a special process (non-gaming program), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs an operation information signal output process (Sb19) for outputting a stop execution position signal to the test device for testing the slot machine 1. It has become. As a result, during the period during which the operation information signal output processing for outputting the test signal to the test device for testing the slot machine 1 is being performed, the timer value for one game time management is not updated. The process of updating the game time management timer value and the operation information signal output process related to the test of the slot machine 1 are not mixed.

In the main process of this embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) (Sb40), the setting index data at the start of the game is set in the A register (Sb42), and continuous data. By performing the processing (Sb42), the continuous data processing starts the time counting of the minimum time by setting the initial value in the timer value for one game time management, and the initial value in the timer value for one game time management. The test signal is output when is set. As a result, the test signal is output when the initial value is set for the timer value for one game time management. Therefore, by specifying the time interval at which the test signal is output, the minimum of one game on the test device side. It is possible to identify whether time is reserved.

[Continuous data processing]
The control content of the continuous data processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16 and 17 are flow charts showing the control contents of continuous data processing performed by the main control unit 41. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a continuous data processing table. The continuous data processing is a subroutine that is included in the game program and is called in the main processing or the like included in the game program. The continuous data processing is called from the main processing or the like with the data number set in the A register. The data number is data indicating the type of processing performed in continuous data processing.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the continuous data processing, first, it is determined whether or not the data number set in the A register when the continuous data processing is started is a number indicating that the data setting processing is performed. (Sd1). If it is determined in the step of Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that a process other than the data setting process is to be performed, the process proceeds to the step of Sd18 and the 1-byte data lottery process is performed. The 1-byte data lottery process is a process of performing a predetermined lottery specified based on the data number of the A register. After performing the 1-byte data lottery process in the step of Sd18, the continuous data process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that the data setting process is performed, the reference address of the index data of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register. (Sd2), addition processing is performed (Sd3). In the addition process, the A register value is added to the HL register, and the data stored at the address specified by the added HL register value is acquired in the A register. In the index data table, the relative distance from the reference address to the start address of the setting data table corresponding to the data number is stored in the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number (see FIG. 18). By performing the addition process in the step of Sd3, the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number is set in the HL register, and the start address of the setting data table corresponding to the data number is set in the A register. The relative distance will be set. For example, when the data number 1 is set in the A register and the addition processing is performed, the address m2 + 1 (reference address m2 + data number 1) of the index data of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register as shown in FIG. Then, the relative distance data α (m6- (m2 + 1)) stored in the address m2 + 1 is set in the A register.

After performing the addition process in the step of Sd3, the value of the A register is added to the HL register (Sd4), and the address specified by the HL register value is advanced by the A register value. As a result, for example, when the data number is 1, the start address m6 of the setting data table corresponding to the data number 1 is set in the HL register.

After that, the total number of settings stored in the area of the address specified by the HL register value, which is an area in the setting data table, is read into the B register, and the number of initializations is read into the C register (Sd5). Then, after the HL register value is added by 1 and updated (Sd6), the HL register value is added by 1 and updated (Sd7). After that, the set destination address value stored in the address of the HL register value is read into the E register (Sd8).

Then, it is determined whether or not the C register initialization number is 0 (Sd9), and if it is determined that the C register initialization number is 0, the HL register value is added by 1 and updated (Sd9). Sd10), the setting data value stored in the address of the updated HL register value is read into the A register (Sd11), and it is determined whether or not the value of the A register is 0 (Sd12). When it is determined in the step of Sd12 that the A register value is not 0, the setting data set in the A register is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the address specified by the E register value (Sd13).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sd9 that the C register value is not 0, the number of initializations of the C register is subtracted by 1 (Sd16), and then the exclusive OR of the A register values is calculated to perform A. Initialization data (0) is set in the register (Sd17). Then, the initialization data is set in the A register in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the address specified by the E register value (Sd13). As a result, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the address specified by the E register value is initialized. The Rukoto.

After setting the A register value in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the address specified by the E register value in the step of Sd13, the total set number of times is decremented by 1 and updated by subtracting 1 from the B register (Sd14). After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of remaining settings is 0 based on the B register value (Sd15).

If it is determined in the step of Sd15 that the B register value is 0 and the total number of remaining settings is 0, the continuous data processing is terminated and the process returns to the caller's processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sd15 that the B register value is not 0 and the total number of remaining settings is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sd7 and the processing of each step of Ad7 to Sd15 is specified based on the B register value. Repeat until the total number of settings to be set becomes 0.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, when it is determined that the value of the A register is 0 in the step of Sd12, the BC register value is set to the predetermined value of the RAM 41c after subtracting 1 from the total number of times the B register is set (Sd19). Save to the area (Sd20). After that, the set destination address value specified based on the HL register value is read into the DE register (Sd21). Then, it is determined whether or not the E register value is a predetermined waiting time setting code value (Sd22). If it is determined that the E register value is not a predetermined waiting time setting code value, port output processing is performed (Sd29). In the port output process, the output signal from the output port specified by the HL register is set to the state (ON state or OFF state) specified by the A register.

If it is determined in the step of Sd22 that the E register value is a predetermined waiting time setting code value, the determination code set in the predetermined bit of the E register value is deleted (Sd23), and DE After setting the register value in the BC register as the waiting time (Sd24), the interrupt BC wait processing is performed (Sd25). As a result, the timer interrupt processing is waited for the number of times set in the BC register.

After the interrupt BC wait processing is performed in the step of Sd25, the total set number of BC registers saved in the step of Sd20 is restored (Sd26). Further, when it is determined that the E register value is not the waiting time code in the step of Sd22 and the port output process is performed in the step of Sd29, each process of the steps Sd23 to Sd25 is not performed and the process proceeds to the step of Sd26. , Restores all the set times of the BC register saved in the step of Sd20.

After returning the total number of settings of the BC register in the step of Sd26, the B register is subtracted by 1 and the total number of sets is subtracted by 1 (Sd27). Then, it is determined whether or not the total number of remaining settings specified based on the B register value is 0 (Sd28), and if it is determined that the total number of remaining settings is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sd20. Each process of the steps Sd20 to Sd28 is performed until it is determined that the total number of remaining settings is 0. Then, when it is determined that the total number of remaining settings is 0 in the step of Sd28, the continuous data processing is terminated and the process returns to the caller's processing.

As described above, in the continuous data processing, the process of initializing the predetermined area specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table, and the data number and the continuous in the predetermined area specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table. Processing to set predetermined data specified based on the data processing table, set the output signal from the predetermined output port specified based on the data number and continuous data processing table to the output state (ON state or OFF state). Perform processing etc.

For example, as shown in FIG. 18, when the data number is 1 (setting data at the time of starting switch operation), the maintenance permission flag and the payout number display displayed on the game assistance display 12 are displayed based on the setting data table. (Higher digit), Initialize the number of payouts display (lower digit). If the data number is 4 (setting data when the section display LED is off), output port processing is performed based on the port output code being set, and the external output signals 1 and 2 are turned off. Set and set the signal in the advantageous section to the OFF state. Further, when the data number is 27 (setting data at the time of transition to the advantageous section), the advantageous section (01) is set in the section state information that can specify the game section to be controlled, and the ball is controlled. The high accuracy state (1) is set in the high accuracy state flag indicating the state.

[Game start waiting process]
The control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41. The game start waiting process is included in the game program and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the game start waiting process, first, the medal insertion number display process is performed (Se1), and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 according to the number of medals inserted in the slot machine 1 are turned ON (lighting state). Control to. After that, an error number corresponding to an error code (E1) capable of identifying that the hopper tank 34a is full is prepared in a predetermined register (A) (Se2), and the predetermined port input buffer is referred to. It is determined whether or not the hopper tank 34a is in the full tank state based on the definite data of the full tank sensor 35a (Se3).

If it is determined in the step of Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is full, an error process is performed (Se4). In error processing, control is performed in an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of identifying the error code (E1) prepared in the predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E1) can be referred to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in other processing. Set as an error flag. Further, the error code (E1) is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E1) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E1) is set in the register and the state shifts to the error state, it waits until the confirmed data of the full tank sensor 35a is turned off, and the confirmed data of the full tank sensor 35a is turned off. , An error command (cancellation) to cancel the error state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the error processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to the Se5 step.

When it is determined that the hopper tank 34a is not full in the step of Se3, and when the error processing in the step of Se4 is completed, the value of the replay medal counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to a predetermined value. Read into the register (Se5). The re-game medal counter is set with a value according to the result of the previous game by the game end setting process in the previous main process, and the re-game combination is awarded in the previous game and the re-game is given. If this is the case, a numerical value (for example, 3) corresponding to the specified number of bets required to play the game is set, but if the re-game is not given in the previous game, it is 0. Is set.

After that, the replay medal counter of the RAM 41c is cleared (Se6), and it is determined whether or not the value of the replay medal counter read in the step of Se5 is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the replay is granted. (Se7) If a replay is granted, a medal insertion execution process is performed (Se8). In the medal insertion execution process, the value of the medal counter for replay is set as the bet number, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the ON state (lighting state) to set the specified number of bets (3 in this embodiment). Notifies that is set. Further, a command for the number of inserted medals that can specify the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

When it is determined that the value of the medal counter for re-game is 0 in the step of Se7, that is, the re-game is not given, and after the medal insertion execution process is performed because the re-game is given in the step of Se8. Performs a medal care permission setting process (Se9). In the medal care permission setting process, the value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and when the value of the credit does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment), the medal insertion unit 4 starts. A medal care permission flag indicating that the insertion of the medal is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After performing the medal care permission setting process in the step of Se9, the process of waiting for one interrupt is performed (Se10). By performing the interrupt wait processing once, the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed and the detection status of various switches, the lighting status of the LED, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection of these various switches is performed. In the state where the state is updated, subsequent processing (for example, medal insertion / withdrawal error check processing, medal insertion signal processing, operation input reception processing, which will be described later) can be performed.

After the interrupt wait process is performed once in the Se10 step and the timer interrupt is performed once, the input / payout error check process is performed in the same manner as in the Sb32 step of the main process described above (Se11). Then, based on whether or not the error execution flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not the error processing is executed in the error check processing (Se12).

If it is determined in the error check process that the error process has been executed in the step of Se12, the process returns to the step of Se10, and each process of the steps of Se10 to Se12 is performed again. After that, each process of the steps Se10 to Se12 is performed in a state where no abnormality is detected in the transition of the medal payout signal or the transition of the medal insertion signal, so that the error execution flag is not set and the step of Se12 is performed. Processing will be performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the error execution flag is not set in the step of Se12, the medal insertion signal processing is performed (Se13). In the medal insertion signal processing, the medal insertion status is determined based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. Then, when a normal medal insertion is detected, the medal is accepted for setting the number of bets and credits, and the medal insertion signal processing is completed. On the other hand, when an abnormal medal insertion is detected, an error code (E5) is prepared and error processing is performed. After that, the error state is released and the error processing is completed, so that the medal insertion signal processing is completed.

After performing the medal insertion signal processing in the step of Se13, the operation input reception process for accepting the operation by the switch is performed by enabling the operation of the various switches to be accepted and operating the switch for which the operation is enabled. (Se14).

In the operation input reception process, the total value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the already set bet number (set bet number) when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. Determines whether or not is greater than or equal to the value (3) required to set the number of three bets. Then, when it is determined that the total value of the credit and the set bet number is equal to or more than the value (3) required for setting the three bet numbers, the edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is referred to and the ON edge is turned on. Determine if the data is set. Then, when it is determined that the ON edge data is set, the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted, the number of medals is set to the number of bets so that the number of bets is 3, and the amount set to the number of bets is set. Performs the process of subtracting the number of medals from the credit. When it is determined that the ON edge data is not set, the BET switch effective LED 21 is controlled to the ON state (lighting state) by setting the ON state data in the output buffer of the BET switch effective LED 21. On the other hand, the total value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the already set bet number (set bet number) is not equal to or more than the value (3) required for setting the three bet numbers. If it is determined, neither the process of determining whether or not the ON edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is set nor the process of controlling the BET switch effective LED 21 to the ON state is performed. If it is determined that the total value of the credit and the already set number of bets (set number of bets) is not equal to or greater than the value (3) required to set the number of three bets, the BET switch enabled LED21 Keeps off. As a result, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the number of bets of 3, the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6 by a player or the like. On the other hand, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is insufficient to set the number of bets of 3, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted and only the number of bets of 2 (second bet) can be set. Since the number of two bets is not set even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, it is possible to prevent the game from being played with the second bet number as much as possible.

Further, in the operation input reception process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, if the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number (2 or 3), the start is started. Enables the acceptance of operations by the switch 7. Further, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the settlement switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is enabled.

Further, in the operation input reception process, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in the predetermined register. After that, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off and the medal flow path is switched to the medal payout outlet 9 side. Further, when the operation by the setting key switch 37 is enabled and the operation by the setting key switch 37 is detected, the setting value display process for displaying the set value on the setting value display 24 is performed. Further, when the operation by the settlement switch 10 is enabled and the operation by the settlement switch 10 is detected, the settlement process of returning the medals stored in the credit to the player is performed. After performing the processing according to the switches for which the operation is detected, the operation input acceptance processing is terminated.

After performing the operation input acceptance process in the step of Se14, it is determined whether or not a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected based on the start flag (Se15). If it is determined that the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and the effective operation by the start switch 7 is not detected, the process proceeds to the step of Se16 and the LED display process for controlling the lighting state of the start effective LED 18 is performed. ..

In the LED display processing, when the operation by the start switch 7 is effectively set by the operation input reception processing in the step of Se14 and the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is not detected, the start effective LED 18 is turned on. When the operation of switches other than the reset switch 23 is detected in the state where the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled while controlling to (lit state), and the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled. If not, the start effective LED 18 is controlled to the OFF state (off state), and it is notified whether the operation by the start switch 7 is valid or invalid depending on the lighting state of the start effective LED 18.

In the step of Se15, when the start flag is set in the predetermined register and it is determined that the effective operation by the start switch 7 is detected, the random number value for the internal lottery is acquired from the random number circuit 42 and the RAM 41c Set to a predetermined area (Se17). After that, the medal insertion state data that can specify the set number of bets is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se18), the start valid LED18 is set to the OFF state (off state) (Se19), and the medal care permission flag is set. It clears from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se20), controls so as to clear the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 (Se21), ends the game start waiting process, and returns to the main process. After that, in the main process, an internal lottery is performed using the random number value acquired in the step of Se17, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started according to the detection of the operation of the start switch 7. Then, one game will be started.

In this way, in the game start waiting process included in the game program, it is possible to call the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, and when calling the medal insertion signal processing, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. The medal insertion signal processing is called after the interrupt wait processing that waits until it is performed once is performed. As will be described later, in the timer interrupt process (main), port input process for updating the input data of the sensors including the input medal sensors 31a to 31c is performed, and one interrupt is waited by the game start wait process. By calling the medal insertion signal processing after performing the process 1, in the medal sensor processing called by the medal insertion signal processing, processing based on the latest input data updated by the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed. It is possible to do it.

Further, in the operation input reception process performed in the game start waiting process, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted when the number of bets already set and the number of credits can be added up to set the number of three bets. ing. As a result, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the number of bets of 3, the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6 by a player or the like. On the other hand, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is insufficient to set the number of bets of 3, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted and only the number of bets of 2 (second bet) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, the number of bets for two cards is not set.

Further, in the operation input reception process performed in the game start waiting process, the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is a specified number (2 or 3) when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. In some cases, the start switch 7 is designed to enable the acceptance of operations, and the start is started regardless of whether the number of bets of 3 is set or the number of bets of 2 is set. It is possible to start the game by operating the switch 7.

[Medal insertion signal processing]
Next, the control content of the medal insertion signal processing that the main control unit 41 of this embodiment calls from the game start waiting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the medal insertion signal processing performed by the main control unit 41. The medal insertion signal processing is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the game start waiting process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the medal insertion signal processing, first, in the above-mentioned medal maintenance permission setting process of the game start waiting process, a medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the medal insertion from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set. It is determined whether or not it is (Sg1). If the medal care permission flag is not set, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated and the process returns to the caller's game start waiting process. On the other hand, when the medal care permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal state transition data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sg2). The medal insertion signal state transition data is data that can identify the state transition of the detection signals (hereinafter, may be referred to as medal insertion signals) of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c, and is a medal sensor check included in the non-game program. By the processing, it is updated at a predetermined timing based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and is set in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c.

Then, based on the medal insertion signal state transition data referred to in the step of Sg2, the detection range A (see FIGS. 4 and 5) of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c in the medal selector 29 is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4. It is determined whether or not the medal is passing (Sg3). When it is determined that the medal is not passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to the ON state (Sg4), and the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is the medal selector. A hopper provided inside the housing 1a with a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 so as to flow down the medal inflow flow path 29a and the medal receiving flow path 29b in 29 and be guided to the hopper tank 34a. It is controlled to switch to the tank 34a side. After that, the medal insertion signal ignore timer is cleared (Sg6).

Here, the medal insertion signal ignore timer sets the output of the control signal that turns the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state at least when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the OFF state, and then sets the flow path switching solenoid 30. The passage of the switching time until the 30 is activated and the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is actually switched to the medal payout outlet 9 side is timed, and the medal is processed in a predetermined process during the timing of the switching time. It is a timer for controlling so as to ignore the input signal. When the output of the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set in the medal insertion signal ignore timer in order to switch the flow path of the medal, at least the output of the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set before the actual operation. A predetermined time (504 milliseconds in this embodiment) until the flow path of the medal is switched to is set. After that, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is subtracted and updated by the counter update process of the timer interrupt process, and when it becomes 0, it is possible to specify that the switching time has elapsed.

When it is determined that the medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c in the step of Sg3, and after the medal insertion signal ignore timer is cleared in the step of Sg6, the above-mentioned second evacuation command is used. Then, among the registers provided in the main control unit 41, the values of the flag register in which the calculation result is stored are saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order (Sg7), and then the timer is interrupted. Is set to prohibition (Sg8), and the medal sensor process included in the non-game program is called up by using the above-mentioned CALL instruction (Sg9).

In the medal sensor processing, first, in the same manner as the RT information output processing described above, the LD instruction described above is used to move the current stack pointer from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. The value of the address indicated by the SP is read, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. By doing so, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register. Are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. In addition, when the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program, so that the flag register The second zero flag TZ of is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the medal sensor process is called from the game program, the game program calls the medal sensor process for the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the medal sensor process. It may be different from the state of the register at the time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal. Then, when the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) indicating that the medal has normally passed the detection range A of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c or the medal is the insertion medal. The medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that the detection range A of the sensors 31a to 31c has been detected, and the passing state of the medal in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are determined in the previous time. The medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that the medal has not changed from time is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. After that, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the input data of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the medal insertion signal state transition data, the medal-related error data that can identify the error code (E5) indicating that the abnormality related to the medal insertion signal has been detected is placed in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. Perform processing such as setting.

Then, in the same manner as the RT information output process described above, the value of the register saved when the medal sensor process is started is sequentially read from the non-game stack area by using the first return instruction described above, and the medal sensor is used. Restores all registers to the state they were in when processing started. After that, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the medal sensor processing is started is read out and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP to obtain the medal. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the sensor processing was started, and the winning information output processing is completed. In order to end the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the stack pointer SP is set after returning the values of all the registers saved at the start of the medal sensor processing. When changing from a non-game program to a game program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, and the state of the flag register changes before and after the execution of the LD instruction. May change. That is, the state of the register when the medal sensor processing is completed may be different from the state of the register saved when the medal sensor processing is started.

After performing the medal sensor processing in the step of Sg9, when the timer interrupt is set to allow (Sg10) and the value of the register saved in the step of Sg7 is saved by using the above-mentioned second return instruction. By sequentially reading from the game stack area and setting it in the flag register in the reverse order of the above, the flag register is restored to the state before the winning information output process is performed (Sg11). After the medal sensor processing is performed by performing the evacuation processing and restoration processing of all registers inside the medal sensor processing in the step of Sg9 and the evacuation processing and restoration processing of the flag registers in the steps of Sg7 and Sg11. In, the states of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing is performed.

After that, the medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register (Sg12) with reference to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and whether or not the error code (E5) is set by the medal sensor processing (medal sensor check processing) is determined. Judgment (Sg13). Then, when the error code (E5) is set, that is, when the medal-related error data is read into the predetermined register and the error code (E5) is prepared in the predetermined register, error processing is performed. (Sg14), control is performed in an error state that disables the progress of the game.

In error processing, control is performed in an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Further, an error command capable of identifying the error code (E5) prepared in the predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E5) can be referred to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in other processing. Set as an error flag. Further, the error code (E5) is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E5) prepared in the predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register and the state shifts to the error state, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the OFF state and the reset / setting switch is set as a condition for releasing the error state. Until it is established that the 38 or the reset switch 23 is in the ON state, the player waits without controlling the progress of the game. Then, when the release condition is satisfied, an error command (release) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, the error processing is terminated, and the process returns to the medal insertion signal processing.

When it is determined that the error code (E5) is not set as the medal-related error data in the step of Sg13, and after the error processing of the step of Sg14 is completed, it is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. The content of the medal passing state reference data is determined by referring to the medal passing state reference data (Sg15) (Sg16, Sg17).

If it is determined in the step of Sg16 that the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated and the process returns to the game start waiting process. If it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is set in the step of Sg17, the process proceeds to the step of Sg18, and the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set in the step of Sg17. If it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is not set, the process proceeds to the step of Sg21.

When it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal passing) is set in the step of Sg17, the insertion status determination process is performed (Sg18). In the insertion status determination process, the credit counter that counts the current number of credits set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the credit counter is the maximum value of the credit of the slot machine 1 (50 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the situation is one less, that is, the next medal to be accepted is the final medal that can be added to the credit. Then, a final acceptance flag that can specify whether or not the next medal to be accepted is the final medal that can be added to the credit is set in a predetermined register, and the insertion status determination process is completed.

After the insertion status determination process is performed in the step of Sg18, if it is determined that the next medal to be accepted is the final medal that can be added to the credit based on the final acceptance flag set in the predetermined register. By performing the medal blocker off process (Sg20) and setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is moved from the hopper tank 34a side to the medal payout outlet 9 side. By switching, the medal inserted into the medal insertion unit 4 after the medal detected by the insertion medal sensor 31c is controlled to be returned from the medal payout outlet 9 via the medal return flow path 29c. Further, in the medal blocker off processing, after the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the OFF state, the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is referred to with reference to the medal insertion signal state transition data set in the game RAM area. If the medal is passing through the detection range A, the above-mentioned medal insertion signal ignore timer is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds). ) Is set to start counting the predetermined time by the medal insertion signal ignore timer. As a result, in the sensor monitoring process described later for a predetermined time after the end of the medal blocker off process, an abnormality of the medal insertion signal is determined and sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) is set regardless of the state of the medal insertion signal. It is designed so that it will not be done.

After the medal blocker off processing is performed in the step of Sg20, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated and the process returns to the game start waiting processing. On the other hand, if it is determined based on the final reception flag that the next medal to be accepted is not the final medal that can be added to the credit, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated without performing the medal blocker off processing, and the game start waiting processing is performed. Return to.

When it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set in the step of Sg17 and the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is not set, the predetermined area of the port input buffer is referred to. , The confirmation data of the input medal sensor 31b is acquired (Sg21), and it is determined whether or not the confirmation data is in the ON state (Sg22). Then, when it is determined that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31c is acquired by referring to the predetermined area of the port input buffer (Sg23), and the input data is turned OFF. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (Sg24).

When it is determined that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is not in the ON state in the step of Sg19, and the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the step of Sg20. When it is determined that the state is not OFF, that is, when a medal is passing through the medal receiving flow path 29b or when there is no medal in the medal receiving flow path 29b, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sg22 that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and in the step of Sg24 it is determined that the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the OFF state, that is, the medal acceptance flow path. When the medal has passed the detection position where the inserted medal sensor 31c can detect the medal in 29b, the medal insertion process is performed (Sg25).

In the medal insertion process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of bets is set by referring to the currently set number of bets stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, when the specified number of bets is not set, 1 is added to the current bet number, and when the specified number of bets is already set, 1 is added to the credit counter.

After the medal insertion process is performed in the step of Sg25, the medal care permission setting process is performed (Sg26), and the credit value does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) based on the credit counter. , A medal care permission flag indicating that the medal insertion from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

If the medal care permission flag is not set after the medal care permission setting process is performed in the step of Sg26, it corresponds to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 504 milliseconds) set in advance in the medal insertion signal ignore timer. After setting the value) and starting the timing of the predetermined time by the medal insertion signal ignore timer (Sg28), the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the medal care permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated without setting the medal insertion signal ignore timer. The medal insertion signal ignore timer is decremented at predetermined time intervals after a predetermined value (value corresponding to 504 milliseconds in this embodiment) is set in the step of Sg28, and the predetermined time (predetermined time) ( In this embodiment, it becomes 0 when 4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed based on whether or not the medal insertion signal ignore timer is 0. ing.

In this way, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, it is possible to call the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, and when calling the medal sensor processing, the value of the flag register is set to the game stack of the RAM 41c. When the medal sensor processing returns to the medal insertion signal processing after saving to the area, the value of the flag register is returned to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

Further, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, the timer interrupt is set to prohibit, the medal sensor processing is performed, and then the medal sensor processing is performed. When returning to the medal insertion signal processing, the timer interrupt is set to allow, so that the timer interrupt is prohibited during the execution of the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program. ..

Further, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, after saving the value of the flag register, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited and the medal sensor is set. It is designed to perform processing.

Further, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is performed with the timer interrupt set to be prohibited and then the medal sensor processing returns to the medal insertion signal processing, After setting the timer interrupt to allow, the value of the flag register is restored to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

Further, the medal insertion signal processing is a process called by the game start waiting process, and as described above, in the game start waiting process, an interrupt one waiting process that waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once is performed. After performing the above, the medal insertion signal processing is called. Further, in the medal insertion signal processing, the medal insertion signal processing is started, and after performing the predetermined processing, the timer interrupt is set to prohibit and the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is called and performed. ing. In this way, in the game machine start wait processing and the medal insertion signal processing, the medal insertion signal processing is called after the game start wait processing performs the interrupt one-time wait processing, and the medal sensor processing is performed in the medal insertion signal processing. , At least the timer interrupt process (main) is performed by the interrupt one-time wait process in the game start wait process, and the input data of the sensors is updated by the port input process included in the timer interrupt process (main). So, the medal sensor processing is performed.

[Medal sensor processing and medal sensor check processing]
The control contents of the medal sensor processing and the medal sensor check processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the medal sensor processing performed by the main control unit 41. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the medal sensor check process performed by the main control unit 41. FIG. 23 is a timing chart for explaining the state transition of the medal insertion signal in which the normal passage of the medal is determined in the medal insertion signal processing and the medal sensor check processing. The medal sensor processing is included in the non-game program, and is a subroutine called in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program. Further, the medal sensor check process is included in the non-game program, and is a subroutine called in the medal sensor process included in the non-game program.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the medal sensor processing, first, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area by using the LD instruction described above. And evacuate (Sh1). After that, by using the above-mentioned LD instruction to set a predetermined value of the non-game stack area (a value stored at the end of the previous non-game program) as the value of the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is set to non-game. Set for the program (Sh2). Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are stored in the non-game stack area in a predetermined order to save them (Sh3). After that, the medal sensor check process included in the non-game program is performed (Sh4).

After the medal sensor check process is performed in the Sh4 step, the register values saved in the Sh3 step are sequentially read from the non-game stack area by using the first return instruction described above, and the winning information output process is performed. After returning all the registers to the state at the time of starting (Sh5), the value of the stack pointer SP stored and saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the step of Sh1 is set by using the LD instruction. By setting the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the medal sensor processing was started (Sh6), the medal sensor processing is terminated, and the process returns to the caller's medal insertion signal processing.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the medal sensor check process, first, the medal passing state reference data and the medal-related error reference data set in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the RAM 41c are cleared (Si1, Si2). The medal passing state reference data is data that can identify the passing state of medals in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c as a processing result of the medal sensor check processing, and the inserted medal sensor 31a to 31a by the medal sensor check processing. Based on the input data of 31c and the like, it was determined that the medal normally passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the medal began to pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It is possible to identify that it is determined that this has been detected and that the medal detection state by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed since the previous determination. The initial value of the medal passing state reference data is the medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that the medal detection state has not changed since the previous determination. Further, in the medal-related error reference data, as a result of the medal sensor check processing, an abnormality (error code E5) related to the detection signals (hereinafter, may be referred to as medal insertion signals) of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c was detected. It is data that can identify the effect. Further, the medal passing state reference data and the medal-related error reference data can be referred to and updated by the non-game program by being set in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c, while can only be referred from the game program. is there.

After clearing the medal passing state reference data and the medal-related error reference data in the steps of Si1 and Si2, the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are acquired by referring to the predetermined area of the port input buffer (Si3), and the medal is inserted. Correct / incorrect data for determining whether or not the transition of the signal state is normal is acquired by referring to the predetermined area of the ROM 41b (Si4), and the medal center check process before the previous time is performed by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The medal insertion signal state transition data stored in the above is acquired (Si5).

Then, the medal insertion signal state transition data acquired in the Si5 step is compared with the correct / incorrect data acquired in the Si4 step to determine whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct (Si6).

When it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct in the step of Si6, new medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the current data of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in the step of Si3. The medal insertion signal state transition data is created and stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si7).

Then, referring to the medal passing time timer set in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si8), and based on the medal insertion signal state transition data updated in the step of Si7, the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c It is determined whether or not the current and previous detection states are in the OFF state (Si9, Si10). The medal passing time timer is a timer that measures the duration of a period in which it is determined that a medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. As will be described later, based on the medal insertion signal state transition data, after the time counting is started when the medal insertion signal is in the ON state, it is updated by the timer interrupt process (main). ..

When it is determined in the steps of Si9 and Si10 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the OFF state and the previous detection state is not the OFF state, that is, within the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. If there is a possibility that the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state because the medal that was in the position has exited the detection range, the medal passing time referred to in the step of Si8 The timer determines whether or not it is less than the shortest value (10.08 milliseconds in this embodiment) of the normal passing time range required for the medal to normally pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. (Si11). The normal passing time range includes the measured value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving flow path 29b of the medal selector 29, and the insertion in the medal receiving flow path 29b. It is predetermined based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the like (in this embodiment, the range is 10.08 ms to 99.68 ms).

Then, when it is determined that the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value in the normal passing time range in the step of Si11, the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in the step of Si7 is cleared (Si12), and the medal passing time timer is used. After clearing (Si13), the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) indicating that the medal has normally passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. Then, the medal sensor check process is completed. On the other hand, if the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value in the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to the step of Si19 described later.

When it is determined in the steps of Si9 and Si10 that the current and previous detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are both OFF states, that is, the medal has not passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. When the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c have not changed since the previous determination, the medal passing state reference data is initialized in the Si1 step, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change) is obtained. The medal sensor check process ends while maintaining the state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

When it is determined in the step of Si9 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not the OFF state, that is, the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c When it is in the ON state, it is determined whether or not the medal passing time timer referred to in the step of Si8 exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range (99.68 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Si15).

Then, when it is determined in the step of Si15 that the medal passing time timer does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passing time range, it is determined whether or not the medal passing time timer is operating (Si16). When the medal passing time timer is not operating, that is, when a medal newly enters the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c changes from the OFF state to the ON state. When it is time and the time counting by the medal passing time timer has not been started yet, after the medal passing time timer is set to 0 and started (Si17), the medals are inserted into the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. The medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that the medal has begun to pass the detection range A is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming area of the RAM 41c, and the medal sensor check process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Si15 that the medal passing time timer exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to the step of Si19 described later. Further, when it is determined in the step of Si16 that the medal passing time timer is operating, that is, the medal has passed the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c continues. If so, the medal passing state reference data is maintained in the initialized state in the step of Si1, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the medal End the sensor check process. The medal passing time timer is set to 0 in the step of Si17 and started, and then added at predetermined time by the timer interrupt process. After being set to 0 in the step of Si17, The elapsed time of, that is, the elapsed time from the time when it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct and the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state is timed by the medal passing time timer. ..

If it is determined in the step of Si6 that the medal insertion signal state transition data is not correct, and if it is determined in the step of Si11 that the medal passage time timer is less than the minimum value of the normal passage time range, the medal passage time timer in the step of Si15. When it is determined that the value exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the medal-related error reference data (E5) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the medal insertion signal is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. (Si19), after clearing the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Si7 (Si20), clearing the medal passing time timer and stopping the counting (Si21), the medal sensor check process. Is finished and returns to the medal sensor processing. When the medal-related error reference data (E5) is set in the step of Si19 and the process returns to the medal sensor check process, the medal-related error is referred to in the medal insertion signal processing of the game start waiting process included in the game program. By referring to the data (E5), the error state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the determination of whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition in the Si6 step of the medal sensor check process included in the non-game program is correct, the insertion medal sensors 1 to 3 (insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c) When it is detected that the medal has started to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 (inserted medal sensor 31a) is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, and then the inserted medal is inserted. The transition from the OFF state to the ON state of the sensor 2 (inserted medal sensor 31b) and then from the OFF state to the ON state of the inserted medal sensor 3 (inserted medal sensor 31b) is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. In this case, it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct.

Further, when it is detected by the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 that the medal has passed the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the inserted medal is inserted. When the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the sensor 2 and then from the ON state to the OFF state of the inserted medal sensor 3 is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data, and when the inserted medal sensor 1 is changed from the ON state. When the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the inserted medal sensor 3 and then from the ON state to the OFF state of the inserted medal sensor 2 is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. , The medal insertion signal state transition is determined to be correct.

Then, in the medal sensor check process, it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct, and it is determined that any of the insertion medal sensors 1 to 3 is in the ON state, so that the medal passing state reference data ( Detection) will be set. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 1 of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 first changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct, so that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct. The medal passing state reference data (detection) is set when the insertion medal sensor 1 is turned on.

Further, the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set when it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct and all of the insertion medal sensors 1 to 3 are in the ON state. It will be. That is, the medal insertion signal transition occurs when the insertion medal sensor 2 of the insertion medal sensors 1 to 3 finally changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and when the insertion medal sensor 3 finally changes from the ON state to the OFF state. Since it is determined that the state data is correct, when the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct and the inserted medal sensors 2 and 3 are in the OFF state, the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is displayed. It will be set.

In the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after determining that the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is set by the steps Sd16 and Sd17, the input of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is performed by the steps Sd21 to Sd24. When it is specified that the data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the process proceeds to the subsequent medal insertion process. That is, when the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set by the medal sensor check process, the falling of the inserted medal sensor 2 or 3 from the ON state to the OFF state is detected, so that the normal medal Input is detected.

[Ball ejection control process]
The control content of the ball ejection control process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the ball ejection control process performed by the main control unit 41. The ball ejection control process is included in the game program and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the ball ejection control process, first, the output buffer value of the signal in the advantageous section is set to an initial value (OFF) by referring to the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is 0) indicating the state (Sj1). Then, when it is determined in the step of Sj1 that the output buffer value of the signal in the advantageous section is the initial value (0) and the signal in the advantageous section is not output, that is, the state is not controlled in the advantageous section. , The number of bets in the game set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the A register (Sj2), and it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the game is three (Sj3).

If it is determined in the step of Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is three, the game state determination process for determining the game state is performed (Sj4) to acquire the currently controlled game state, and then the present It is determined whether or not the controlled gaming state is a special state (BB, CB) (Sj5). Then, when it is determined that the state is not a special state (BB, CB), the general winning number that is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can specify the winning result of the general winning combination in the internal lottery is acquired in the A register ( Sj6), it is determined whether or not the general winning combination winning number is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (Sj7), and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section shifting combination that shifts the game section to the advantageous section has won in the internal lottery.

Then, in the step of Sj7, when the general winning combination winning number is equal to or higher than the predetermined value and it is determined that the advantageous section transition combination has been won, the data number for setting the advantageous section winning is set in the A register (Sj8). , Continuous data processing is performed (Sj9). By setting the data number for setting when winning the advantageous section in the A register and performing continuous data processing, processing such as setting the flag in the advantageous section indicating that the advantageous section is controlled in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed. It has come to be called. By setting the advantageous section flag in the step of Sj9, the advantageous section flag is referred to in the above-mentioned main process (Sb80), and a predetermined value (1 indicating the ON state) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section signal. It is set and the output of the signal during the advantageous section is started.

After performing continuous data processing in the step of Sj9, after performing advantageous section transition-related processing for making various settings related to the transition to the advantageous section (Sj10), the ball ejection control process is terminated and the main process is performed. Return to.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is 3 and it is an internal lottery, and when it is determined that the game state currently controlled in the step of Sj5 is a special state (BB, CB), Sj7 If it is determined in the step 1 that the general winning combination winning number is less than the predetermined value and the advantageous section transition combination has not been won in the internal lottery, the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section in the steps Sj8 to Sj10 is performed. Instead, the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

In the step of Sj1, the output buffer value of the signal in the advantageous section is not the initial value (0 in the OFF state) but a predetermined value (1 indicating the ON state), and the signal in the advantageous section is output, that is, the advantageous section. When it is determined that the game is controlled to, the advantage section game number counter is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and counts the number of advantageous section games, which is the number of games since the start of the advantageous section. Add 1 (Sj11). The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area that is initialized when it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set by the above-mentioned main process, which is advantageous. The section game number counter is initialized at the end of the advantageous section and is set to the initial value (0).

After adding 1 to the advantageous section game number counter in the step of Sj11, the bet number and the game state determination process are performed (Sj12) to acquire the bet number set in the game and the currently controlled game state. .. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets set in the game is two or the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1 (Sj12).

If it is determined in the step of Sj12 that the number of bets set in the game is two or the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, the payout control process is terminated and the main process is performed. Return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of bets set in the game is two or the currently controlled gaming state is not a gaming state other than RT1, that is, the number of bets set in the game is three. When it is determined that the currently controlled gaming state is RT1, 1 is added to the ED transition game number counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj14).

The ED transition game number counter is performed in a predetermined state (a state in which the number of bets set in the game is 3 and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1) after the advantageous section is started. It is a counter for counting the number of games played. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the ED transition game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area that is initialized when it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set by the above-mentioned main process. Like the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter, the ED transition game number counter is initialized at the end of the advantageous section and set to the initial value (0). The ED transition game number counter is referred to in the AT state management process described later, and when the ED transition game number counter value reaches a specified value, the navigation notification is controlled for a period until the end of the advantageous section. It is supposed to be migrated to.

After adding 1 to the ED transition game number counter in the step of Sj14, freeze setting processing is performed (Sj15), and freeze control is performed to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period based on the ball ejection state and the winning status of the small winning combination. When it is decided whether or not to perform the freeze control and the freeze control is performed, the setting for the freeze control is performed.

After the freeze setting process is performed in the step of Sj15, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the next ball ejection state information set by the ball ejection state processing and the ball ejection state related processing in the AT state management processing, which will be described later, is stored. The address is set in the HL register (Sj16), and the next ball ejection status information stored in the address is acquired in the A register (Sj17). Then, the current ball ejection state information indicating the ball ejection state to be controlled in the game is updated to the next ball ejection status information acquired in the step of Sj17 (Sj18), and the ball ejection state controlled based on the current ball ejection state information is changed. It is determined whether or not the ball ejection state A or the ball ejection state B, which may perform navigation notification, is determined (Sj19). As for the value of the ball ejection state information, a value of 1 or more is assigned to the ball ejection state A and the ball ejection state B, and 0 is assigned to the ball ejection states other than the ball ejection state A and the ball ejection state B. By determining whether or not the ball ejection state information is 1 or more this time, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball ejection state controlled this time is the ball ejection state A or the ball ejection state B.

When it is determined in the step of Sj19 that the ball ejection state is the ball ejection state A or the ball ejection state B, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 suggesting that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section is turned on. After setting the state data (Sj20), wait processing for one interrupt is performed (Sj21). By setting the ON state data in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 and performing the interrupt one-time wait process, the timer interrupt process is performed by the interrupt one-time wait process, and the section is performed by the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process. The display LED 19 is controlled to be lit.

After performing the interrupt one-time wait process in the step of Sj21, the ball ejection status information is acquired in the A register (Sj22), the initial value (1) of the external output signal number is set in the B register (Sj23), and then. External output signal number correction processing is performed (Sj24). In the external output signal number correction process, the value of the B register is corrected to the external output signal number corresponding to the ball ejection state information set in the A register.

After that, the corrected external output signal number set in the B register is set in the external output signal output buffer (Sj25). The external output signal number set in the external output signal output buffer is referred to when performing the external output signal processing in the above-mentioned main processing (Sb25), and corresponds to the external output signal number by the external output signal processing (Sb26). The external output signal will be output, and when the AT control is started, the output of the AT signal indicating that the AT is in control will be started.

After setting the external output signal number in the external output signal output buffer in the step of Sj25, the ball ejection status information is acquired in the A register again (Sj26), and the general winning combination winning number is acquired in the B register (Sj27). , Navi number identification processing is performed (Sj28). In the navigation number specifying process, a predetermined navigation number is specified according to the ball ejection status information and the general winning combination winning number (winning number).

After performing the navigation number specifying process in the step of Sj28, the navigation number specified by the navigation number specifying process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj29). Further, even when it is determined in the step of Sj19 that the ball ejection state is not the ball ejection state A or the ball ejection state B, the process proceeds to the step of Sj29, and the value of the ball ejection state information, that is, 0 is stored as the navigation number. By setting 0 as the navigation number, the navigation notification is not performed and the navigation display is hidden. By setting 1 to 6 as the navigation number, the navigation display indicating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the navigation number is performed. The navigation number stored in the step of Sj29 is referred to in the game start command transmission process (Sb22) in the above-mentioned main process, and a push order command capable of specifying the navigation number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. It becomes.

After storing the navigation number in the step of Sj29, the ball ejection state processing is performed (Sj30). In the payout status processing, processing according to the current payout status specified based on the payout status information, and processing for determining whether or not to shift the payout status based on the winning result of the internal lottery, etc. When it is determined to shift the ball state, a process of setting the next ball output state information in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

When the ball ejection state process is completed in the step of Sj30, the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is advantageous because the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1) in the ball ejection control process (first process) called from the main process at the start of the game. When it is specified as a section (Sj1), the advantageous section game number counter is added and updated by one game regardless of whether three or two bets are set (Sj11). ). Then, in the AT management process (second process) that is called from the main process at the end of the game, the value of the advantageous section game number counter updated by the ball ejection control process in the game becomes the specified number of games (second specified number). It is determined whether or not the game has been reached, and if it is determined that the specified number of games has been reached, the advantageous section end flag is set. After that, in the main process, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the setting of the advantageous section end flag, so that the information regarding the advantageous section is initialized and the advantageous section is terminated.

When the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 updates the advantageous section game number counter regardless of whether the number of bets of 3 is set or the number of bets of 2 is set. Advantageous section game number Since the advantageous section is terminated when the counter value reaches the specified number of games (second specified number), the predetermined game is selected regardless of whether three bets are selected or two bets are selected. The number of games in the advantageous section is limited so that the game is not controlled in the advantageous section for a long period of more than the number (1500 games in this embodiment). This makes it possible to prevent the slot machine 1 from being excessively gambling.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is advantageous in determining whether or not the signal in the advantageous section is being output based on whether or not the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section is the initial value in the ball ejection control process. Determine if it is in the section. Then, when it is determined that the game is in the advantageous section, the process of updating the advantageous section game number counter, the state where the number of bets is two, or the process related to the advantageous section (Sj11 to Sj30) in the ball ejection control process is performed. Processing related to navigation notification performed on condition that the game is in a game state other than RT1 (for example, the number of ED transition games for specifying a game to be shifted to ED control in which navigation notification is controlled over a period until the end of an advantageous section. ON data (predetermined value) that controls the output buffer of the section display LED 19 to be lit on the condition that the counter is updated and the ball is controlled to a predetermined ball ejection state (ball ejection state A, ball ejection state B). 1) The process of setting, the process of identifying the navigation number corresponding to the winning combination based on the navigation number based on the general combination winning number, and setting it in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the currently controlled payout Processing that performs various processing according to the state, etc.) is performed. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the processing related to the advantageous section is performed in the state where the signal during the advantageous section is output.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section is not the predetermined value (1) and is not the advantageous section in the ball ejection control process called from the main process at the start of the game ( Sj1), as the start condition of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section transition combination is won by the internal lottery (Sj6, Sj7), and it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. In this case, a flag in the advantageous section indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous section is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj9). In the subsequent main processing, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80), and when it is determined that the advantageous section flag is set and the area is in the advantageous section. A predetermined value (data (1) indicating an ON state) is set in the signal buffer during the advantageous section. After that, the LED dynamic display process is performed in the timer interrupt process to output the signal during the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the process (Sj8, Sj8) of shifting to the advantageous section is performed when the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section is not the predetermined value (1) and the signal in the advantageous section is not being output. it can.

In the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the signal is in the advantageous section based on the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section, and the signal in the advantageous section is a slot. This is a signal output to the test apparatus for performing the performance test of the machine 1. As a result, the processing related to the advantageous section is performed in the state where the signal in the advantageous section used for the performance test is output, and the processing for shifting to the advantageous section is performed in the state where the signal in the advantageous section is not output. It can be guaranteed that. Further, in the ball ejection control process, it is determined whether or not the ball ejection control process is in the advantageous section based on the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section. There is no need to set a separate flag, and the data capacity can be reduced.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines in the ball ejection control process that it is not an advantageous section (Sj1) based on the signal buffer in the advantageous section, and determines that three bets are set. (Sj3), while the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8) is performed, it is determined that the section is not the advantageous section based on the signal buffer in the advantageous section (Sj1), but the number of bets of three is not set. When it is determined (Sj3), the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process without performing the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8). As a result, in the payout control process, if the number of three bets (first bet) is not set, the process of shifting to the advantageous section is not performed, so that three bets are placed on the player or the like. You can be encouraged to play the game by number (first bet).

In the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is determined not to be an advantageous section (Sj1) based on the signal buffer in the advantageous section, and is determined not to be controlled in a special state (BB1, BB2). In that case (Sj5), the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8) is performed, while it is determined that the section is not advantageous (Sj1), but it is determined that the control is performed in the special state (BB1, BB2). In this case, the ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process without performing the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8). As a result, in the ball ejection control process, when the game state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the process of shifting to the advantageous section is not performed, so that the special state (BB1, BB1) for the player or the like is not performed. You can be encouraged to play a game other than BB2).

In the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is determined not to be an advantageous section based on the signal buffer in the advantageous section (Sj1), and is determined to have three bet numbers set (Sj3). If it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) is not controlled (Sj5), the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8) is performed, while it is determined that the section is not advantageous (Sj1). ), If it is determined that the number of three bets is not set, or if it is determined that the bet number is controlled to a special state (BB1, BB2), the process (Sj7, Sj8) of shifting to the advantageous section is performed. The payout control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process without performing the ball ejection control process. As a result, in the payout control process, when three bets (first bet) are not set, or when the game state is controlled to a special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section is set. Since the process of shifting is not performed, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play the game in a gaming state other than the special state (BB1, BB2) and with three bets (first bet).

In the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1) and is in the advantageous section (Sj1), and sets the number of bets of three. If it is determined that this is done (Sj13), processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1) and is determined to be an advantageous section. However (Sj1), if it is determined that the number of bets for three cards is not set (Sj13), the ball ejection control process is terminated without performing the processes related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30), and the main It is designed to return to processing. As a result, in the payout control process, if the number of three bets (first bet) is not set, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the three bets are placed on the player or the like. You can be encouraged to play the game by number (first bet).

In the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1) and is in the advantageous section (Sj1), and the gaming state is BB1. When it is determined that the RT1 is carried over (Sj13), the processing related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1) in the advantageous section. Although it is determined that there is (Sj1), if it is determined that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1 (Sj13), the ball ejection control processing is performed without performing the processing related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30). It ends and returns to the main process. As a result, in the ball ejection control process, when the game state is a game state other than RT1, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the player or the like is urged to play the game at RT1. it can.

In the ball ejection control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer in the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1) and is an advantageous section (Sj1), and three bets are set. If it is determined that the gaming state is RT1 in which the winning of BB1 is carried over (Sj13), processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is increased. When it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is an advantageous section (Sj1), but the number of bets of 3 cards is not set, or when it is determined that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1. The ball ejection control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process without performing the processes (Sj14 to Sj30) related to the navigation notification. As a result, in the ball payout control process, when the three bets (first bet) are not set, or when the game state is a game state other than RT1, the process related to the navigation notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge a player or the like to play a game with three bets (first bet) and RT1.

In the ball ejection control process of this embodiment, in a game after the game in which the above-mentioned game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section (Sj1 to Sj10), the external output signal number is converted to an external output signal. Each process of the steps Sj11 to Sj30 including the process (Sj25) to be set in the output buffer is performed, and when the output of the AT signal is started, the game in which the output of the AT signal is started. In the previous game, since the processing (Sj1 to Sj10) for shifting to the advantageous section is performed, the output of the AT signal is started in the state where the section is displayed.

In the ball ejection control process of this embodiment, when the output of the AT signal is started, the ON state data (predetermined value 1) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and after one interrupt wait process is performed. , Since the process (Sj25) of storing the external signal number in the output buffer is performed, the AT signal is output after the section display is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent an external device that has received the AT signal from being able to identify that the section is controlled to an advantageous section before the section display is started.

In the ball payout control process of this embodiment, when three bets (first bet) are set, processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while two bets (sj14 to Sj30) are performed. When the second bet number) is set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed, and one of the multiple bells and the three-card combination is won in the internal lottery in the advantageous section. In this case, when three bets (first bet) are set, the winning multi-bell bell and the operation mode corresponding to the type of the three-card combination (correct answer stop order) are notified. When two bets (second bet) are set, the operation mode (correct answer stop order) corresponding to the winning multi-bell and three-card combination is not notified. ing. As a result, when two bets (second bet) are set, the navigation notification does not indicate an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so three bets (second bet) are used. You can encourage them to play the game.

[Operation information signal output processing]
The control content of the operation information signal output processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the operation information output process performed by the main control unit 41. The operation information signal output process is included in the non-game program and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the operation information signal output processing, first, the current stack pointer SP is moved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program by using the above-mentioned LD instruction. The value of the indicated address is read out, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and saved (Sz501). After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. By doing so, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sz502). Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register. Are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order (Sz503). It should be noted that the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program as the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called from the game program. Therefore, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the non-game RAM area initialization process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the non-game RAM area initialization process is the game. It may be different from the register state when the program calls the non-game RAM area initialization process.

After saving all the registers in the step of Sz503, the communication setting process is performed (Sz504). In the communication setting process, the baud rate value of the communication signal is set and the signal transmission function provided in the main control unit 41 is set.

After performing the communication setting process in the step of Sz504, the navigation number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the A register (Sz505). Then, it is determined whether or not the navigation number is 0 and the navigation notification is not performed (Sz506). When it is determined that the navigation number is 0, the winning status of the general winning combination specified based on the general winning combination winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the flag register Z (Sz507), and then small. A value (0) indicating an operation mode (recommended operation mode) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that minimizes missing combinations is set in the A register (Sz508). Then, based on the winning status of the general winning combination read into the flag register Z in the step of Sz507, it is determined whether or not the general winning combination is a loss that has not been won (Sz509).

If it is determined in the step of Sz509 that the general combination has not been won and is lost, the start address of the symbol stop signal pattern setting table can be set in the HL register (Sz510), and the winning status of the special combination can be specified. The value of the internal winning flag (non-winning: 0, BB1 winning: 1, BB2 winning: 2) is read into the A register (Sz11), and data acquisition processing for setting the symbol stop signal pattern is performed (Sz512). In the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process, the symbol stop signal pattern setting data is acquired in the A register based on the symbol stop signal pattern setting table and the value of the internal winning flag. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data is data for acquiring the reel number setting value by the addition process (Sz516) described later according to the winning status of the special combination when none of the general combinations are won.

When the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in the step of Sz512, and when it is determined in the step of Sz506 that the navigation number is not 0 and the navigation notification is performed, the general combination is won in the step of Sz509. If it is determined, the process proceeds to the step of Sz513, and the start address of the reel number signal data table is set in the HL register. After that, the A register value is corrected by performing a predetermined correction process (Sz514), the values of the A register and the flag register are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz515), and an addition process is performed (Sz516). In the addition process, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the reel number setting value stored in the address of the added HL register value is acquired in the A register. Then, the A register value is set as a reel number signal in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz517).

When it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 in the step of Sz506 and the processing of the steps after Sz513 is performed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and in the step of Sz517, the navigation number is set. A reel number signal indicating the stop order according to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, when it is determined that the general combination has been won in the step of Sz509 and the processing of the steps after Sz513 is performed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set. The reel number signal indicating is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, in the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in the step of Sz512 and the process of the steps after Sz513 is performed, and the special combination is won, the A register is won. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the reel number signal indicating the stop order indicating the stop order in which the special winning combination can be won is set, and the winning special winning combination can be won. A reel number signal indicating the order is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, in the case where the data acquisition process for setting the symbol stop signal pattern is performed in the step of Sz512 and the process of the steps after Sz513 is performed, and the special combination is not won, the DDT point is stored in the A register. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to is set, and the reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become.

After setting the reel number signal in the step of Sz517, the values of the A register and the flag register saved in the step of Sz515 are restored (Sz518), and the start address of the stop execution symbol number table is set in the HL register (Sz519). .. Then, the addition process is performed. In the addition process, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the stop execution symbol number stored in the address of the added HL register value is acquired in the A register. Then, the A register value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the stop execution symbol number (Sz521).

After that, a stop execution step calculation process for calculating the stop execution step based on the stop execution symbol number is performed (Sz522), and the stop execution step acquired by the calculation is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a identifiable stop execution position signal. (Sz523).

When it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 in the step of Sz506 and the processing of the steps after Sz518 is performed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and in the step of Sz523, the navigation number is set. A stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing according to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, when it is determined that the general combination has been won in the step of Sz509 and the processing of the steps after Sz518 is performed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set. The stop execution position signal indicating is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, in the case where the data acquisition process for setting the symbol stop signal pattern is performed in the step of Sz512 and the process of the steps after Sz518 is performed, and the special combination is won, the A register is won. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing that can win the special winning combination is set, and it is possible to win the winning special winning combination. A stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, in the case where the data acquisition process for setting the symbol stop signal pattern is performed in the step of Sz512 and the process of the steps after Sz518 is performed, and the special combination is not won, the DDT point is stored in the A register. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to the above is set, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become so.

After setting the stop execution position signal in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Sz523, the value of the reel number signal set in the step of Sz517 is read into the A register (Sz524), and the reel number signal output process is performed (Sz525). In the reel number signal output process, a process is performed in which a reel number signal capable of specifying the stop order of each reel specified based on the A register value is output from a predetermined output port to the test apparatus.

After the reel number signal output processing is performed in the step of Sz525, the value of the stop execution position signal set in the step of Sz523 is read into the A register (Sz526), and the stop execution position signal output processing is performed (Sz527). In the stop execution position signal output process, a process of outputting a stop execution position signal capable of specifying the stop timing of each reel specified based on the A register value from a predetermined output port to the test apparatus is performed.

Then, after the stop execution position signal output processing is performed in the step of Sz527, the values of all the registers saved in the step of Sz503 are restored (Sz528), and the values of the stack pointer saved in the step of Sz501 are restored. Then, the operation information signal output process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

As described above, in the operation information signal output processing of the present embodiment, the stop execution position signal and the stop execution position signal are output to the test apparatus as the operation information signals for designating the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible. In the above-mentioned ball ejection control process, a predetermined value (1 indicating the ON state) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 when the AT control is started, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to be lit by the timer interrupt process. After starting the section display indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous section, the operation information signal output process is called in the main process. In the operation information signal output process, the operation is performed after the section display is started. The information signal is output to the test device. As a result, the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started, so that the test device can specify the operation mode specified in the state where the section display is being performed.

In the operation information signal output processing of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the navigation notification instructing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed based on the navigation number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz506), when it is determined that the navigation notification is performed, the process of outputting the stop execution position signal (Sz523) that specifies the operation mode instructed based on the navigation number is performed, and the navigation notification is not performed. When the determination is made, the winning number indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is referred to (Sz509), and the process of outputting the stop execution position signal for specifying the operation mode corresponding to the winning number (Sz509) is performed. There is. As a result, in the operation information signal output processing, when it is determined that the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is instructed, the process of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery can be omitted, so that the operation mode is specified. The process for outputting the stop execution position signal can be simplified.

[Reel stop control process]
The reel stop control process performed by the main control unit 41 in the main process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the reel stop control process performed by the main control unit 41.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the reel stop control process, first, the reel rotation process is performed (Sc1), and the number of slip frames for all reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be specified for each timing when the stop operation is performed. A stop control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. As a result, the stop control table for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is set during the acceleration control of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R by the timer interrupt processing.

In the timer interrupt process, the reel motor is excited so as to control the rotation and stop of the reel motor in a manner corresponding to various requests (for example, acceleration request, stop request, etc.) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A pattern is set, and the excitation state of each excitation phase is sequentially updated. As a result, for example, by setting the acceleration request to the RAM 41c, an excitation pattern for accelerating the reel motor is selected as the excitation pattern for the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and each excitation phase of the reel motor is based on the excitation pattern. The exciting state of the above is sequentially updated, and the control of starting the rotation of the reel and accelerating to a predetermined constant speed state is started. Then, when the rotation state of each reel reaches the constant speed state, a reel speed state flag that can specify that the rotation state of the corresponding reel has reached the constant speed state is set for each reel in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, it is controlled so that the rotation in the constant speed state is maintained.

After performing the reel rotation process in the step of Sc1, the timer interrupt wait process is performed (Sc2). In the timer interrupt waiting process, the timer interrupt is set to allow and waits until the timer interrupt process is performed once.

After the timer interrupt waiting process in the Sc2 step is completed, the timer interrupt is set to prohibit (Sc3), and then the reel speed status flag updated by the timer interrupt process and set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set. With reference to the reel speed state flag, it is specified for each reel whether or not the rotation state of the reel under rotation control is the constant speed state, and all the reels under rotation control are rotated at the constant speed rotation. It is determined whether or not (Sc4). Then, in the step of Sc4, if it is determined that at least one of the reels is not rotating at a constant speed and all the reels under rotation control are not rotating at a constant speed, Sc2 Returning to the step of, each process of the steps Sc2 to Sc4 is repeated, and waits until all the reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed.

After returning to the Sc2 step and repeating the steps Sc2 to Sc4 to wait, the timer interrupt process performed in the timer interrupt wait process of the Sc2 step causes the rotation state of all the reels under rotation control to be at a constant speed. By updating the reel speed state flag so that it can be identified as a state, it is determined that all the reels under rotation control are rotated at a constant speed in the subsequent Sc4 step. Become.

On the other hand, in the step of Sc4, when it is determined that all the reels under rotation control for which the stop operation has not been completed are rotated at a constant speed, the corresponding stop switch is provided for all the reels for which rotation control is performed. Enables the acceptance of the stop operation by (Sc5). If the acceptance of the stop operation is already enabled for the reel whose rotation is controlled, the valid state is maintained.

Then, after the stop operation reception is effectively set in the Sc5 step, it is determined whether or not an effective stop operation by the stop switch is detected while the stop operation reception is valid for the reel under rotation control. (Sc6). In the determination of whether or not the stop operation is detected, the finalized data of the stop switches corresponding to the reels under rotation control is determined by referring to the edge data of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R updated by the timer interrupt processing. When there is a change from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that an effective stop operation has been detected for the stop switch. As a result, on condition that the ON state of the stop switch is continuously detected for a certain period of time (at least about 2.24 milliseconds), an effective stop operation by the stop switch is detected. It is possible to prevent the ON state of the stop switch from being erroneously detected due to noise.

In this embodiment, it is detected that the confirmation data of the stop switch has changed from the OFF state to the ON state while the reception of the stop operation is valid for the reel under rotation control, that is, a predetermined number of consecutive times. By detecting the ON state of the stop switch in the timer interrupt process, it is determined that an effective stop operation has been detected for the reel under rotation control. Specifically, when the ON state of the stop switch is continuously detected four times (equivalent to about 2.24 ms) by the timer interrupt process performed about every 0.56 ms, the rotation is controlled. It is configured to determine that a valid stop operation has been detected for the reel inside. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be configured in which it is determined that an effective stop operation has been detected by detecting the ON state of the stop switch in one timer interrupt process.

If it is determined that no effective stop operation has been detected in the Sc6 step, the process returns to the Sc2 step, the steps Sc2 to Sc6 are repeated, and the process waits until an effective stop operation is detected. On the other hand, when it is determined that an effective stop operation is detected in the Sc6 step, the reel stop process is performed (Sc7) to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the effective stop operation detected in the Sc6 step. Control for. After that, it is determined whether or not the corresponding reel whose stop control has been performed has stopped in the step of Sc7 (Sc8), and if it is determined that the reel has not stopped, it waits until the reel stops. When it is determined that the reel is stopped, it is determined whether or not all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R have been stopped by performing an effective stop operation (Sc9), and all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are determined. If is not stopped, the process returns to the Sc2 step, and the Sc2 to Sc9 steps are controlled for the remaining reels that are not stopped.

Then, an effective stop operation is performed for all reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped in the step of Sc9, that is, the excitation for all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is lost. If it is determined, after initializing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the power failure recovery flag indicating that the power failure has been restored is set (Sc10), the timer interrupt waiting process is performed (Sc11). After that, whether or not the stop switch of the third stop is being operated, that is, whether or not the confirmation data of the stop switch is in the OFF state after the pressing of the stop switch of the third stop is completed (released). (Sc12), and if the confirmation data of the stop switch is in the ON state and is in operation, the process returns to the Sc10 step, and while performing each process of the Sc10 to Sc12 steps, the stop of the third stop is performed. Wait for the switch operation to finish.

Then, in the step of Sc12, the operation of the stop switch of the third stop is completed, and the confirmation data of the stop switch is updated to the OFF state by the timer interrupt waiting process of Sc11, so that the stop of the third stop is stopped. It is determined that the switch is not in operation. After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery flag is set by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc13).

As described above, since the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the power failure recovery flag is set is initialized in the step of Sc10, the predetermined area is the period during which the steps Sc10 to Sc12 are performed. That is, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the power supply is restarted, and the initial setting process is performed during the period in which the pressing operation of the stop switch of the third stop is continued, the initial setting is performed. It means that the power failure recovery flag is set in the step of Sa26 of the process. On the other hand, if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is not stopped while the operation of pressing the stop switch of the third stop is continued, the power failure recovery flag is not set. Further, after the completion of the initial setting process performed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the timer interrupt process is performed and before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. It is designed to return to the processing in the main processing, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is supplied during the period in which the pressing operation of the stop switch of the third stop is continued (the period in which the steps from Sc10 to Sc12 are performed). When the power supply is stopped and the power supply is restarted, the main process is restarted from the Sc11 step of the reel stop control process. Then, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, if the operation (pressing) of the stop switch of the third stop is continued, the timer interrupt processing performed after the completion of the initial setting processing corresponds to the operation. Confirmation data of the ON state is created for the stop switch. Then, in the Sc12 step, the processing of the Sc10 to Sc12 steps is repeated until it is determined that the stop switch of the third stop is being operated based on the confirmed data and the operation of the stop switch of the third stop is completed. It will be done. Further, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the pressing of the stop switch of the third stop is completed, the stop switch is subjected to the timer interrupt processing performed after the initial setting processing is completed. When the confirmation data of the OFF state is created and it is determined in the step of Sc12 that the stop switch of the third stop is not in operation, the process proceeds to the step of Sc13.

When it is determined in the step of Sc13 that the power failure recovery flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the timer interrupt processing is performed a predetermined number of times (Sc14), and the timer interrupt processing is performed a predetermined number of times (this execution). In the example, it waits until it is performed (twice), and after the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the power failure recovery flag is set is initialized to clear the power failure recovery flag (Sc15). ), Ends the reel stop control process and returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sc13 that the power failure recovery flag is not set, the reel stop control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process without performing each process of the steps of Sc14 and Sc15.

In the main process after the reel stop control process is completed, the winning determination process is performed as shown in Sb49 of FIG.

As described above, in the reel stop control process, the excitation for all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is lost, all the reels are stopped, and the pressing of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is released, and the stop switch 8L is released. , 8C, 8R, respectively, on condition that the player's hand is released, the process returns to the main process and the winning determination process is performed.

[Data processing for role ratio monitor]
The control content of the data processing for the role ratio monitor performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the data processing for the combination monitor performed by the main control unit 41. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the control contents of each state count process performed by the main control unit 41. The combination monitor data processing is included in the non-game program and is a subroutine called in the main processing included in the game program. Further, the data processing for the role ratio monitor calls each state count process which is a subroutine included in the non-game program, and each state count process is a function ratio update process and a continuous combination which are subroutines included in the non-game program. The object ratio update process and the instruction-included combination ratio update process are further called.

The main control unit 41 displays the credit display 11 composed of a two-digit 7-segment display and the game assistance display as a ratio display of the character payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the character payout ratio to the total cumulative number of games paid out. Control the display on the device 12. The credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 are indicators that display information according to the progress of the game, and cannot always display the ratio display. Therefore, the game store is in a situation where the game is not performed. The ratio display is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by a clerk of.

Specifically, when the game is not being played, the normally locked front door 1b is unlocked with a key possessed by a clerk of a game store to open it, and then provided inside the housing 1a. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, the main control unit 41 switches the current display contents of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 to start the display of the ratio display.

In addition, the ratio display is composed of four-digit alphanumeric characters consisting of the upper two-digit alphanumeric characters that constitute the abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display and the lower two-digit numbers that indicate the ratio, and the upper two digits. The display content is displayed on the credit display 11 and the display content of the lower two digits is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and the ratio display is displayed by switching at predetermined time intervals in a predetermined display order from the start of the ratio display.

With the ratio display displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, the front door 1b is closed, medals are inserted into the slot machine 1, an error occurs, the setting key switch 37 is operated, and the settlement switch 10 is displayed. Operation or stop of power supply to the slot machine 1 is detected. The ratio display is terminated by switching to the original display content that was displayed before the ratio display was displayed.

The main control unit 41 performs a process of determining whether or not a prize has been generated according to the display result derived to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in the prize determination process (Sb49 in FIG. 14) of the main process. After performing one interrupt wait processing (Sb50), save the flag register value (Sb51), set timer interruption to disabled (Sb52), and then perform data processing for role ratio monitoring included in the non-game program. Execute.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the data processing for role ratio monitoring, first, using the above-mentioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is determined in the non-game RAM area. It is stored in the area and saved (Sk1), and then a predetermined value of the non-game stack area (value stored at the end of the previous non-game program) is set as the value of the stack pointer SP by using the LD instruction. By doing so, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sk2). Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are stored in the non-game stack area in a predetermined order to save them (Sk3). Then, after executing each state counting process (Sk4) included in the non-game program, the values of the registers saved in the Sk3 step are sequentially read from the non-game stack area by using the first return instruction described above. After returning all the registers to the state when the data processing for the role ratio monitor was started (Sk5), the LD command is used to store and save the register in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the Sk1 step. By setting the value of the stack pointer SP to the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the combination monitor data processing was started (Sk6), and the combination monitoring data processing is terminated. The process returns to the main process of the caller and proceeds to the step of Sb54. The timer interrupt is permitted in the step of Sb54 of the main process, and the flag register value saved before the subsequent execution of the data processing for the role ratio monitor is restored (Sb55).

As shown in FIG. 28, in each state counting process, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of games can be added (Sp1). The total cumulative number of games is stored in a storage area of 3 bytes, and up to 16777215 games can be counted as an upper limit.

If the total number of games cannot be added, the process proceeds to Sp22. If the total number of games can be added, 1 is added assuming that the game has been played (Sp2 to Sp4). As described above, since the microcomputer used in the game machine can only perform operations between values of a maximum of 2 bytes, this addition is executed by calling a subroutine of 3-byte data addition & storage processing (Sp4). Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit (Sp4). If the total number of games has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to Sp7. When the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit, a value indicating that the upper limit has been reached is set in the total cumulative count stop flag (Sp5, Sp6), and the process proceeds to the step of Sp7. In the Sp1 step described above, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of games can be added by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag.

In the step from Sp7, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games is in the range of 0 to 5999 games, in the range of 6000 to 174999 games, or in the range of 175000 games or more (Sp7 to Sp20). Depending on the result of the determination, a value indicating that it is in each range is set as a lighting identification segment (Sp8, Sp18, Sp19). The set lighting identification segment is stored in the display monitor digestion game determination flag. Then, after sequentially executing the bonus ratio update process (Sp22), the continuous bonus ratio update process (Sp23), and the instruction-included combination ratio update process (Sp24) included in the non-game program, the process returns to the role ratio monitor data processing. To do.

In the bonus ratio update process, the bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is calculated from the updated total cumulative payout number and total cumulative bonus payout number. Then, the calculated value is stored as the bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number. The total cumulative number of medals paid out is the total number of medals awarded to the player. The total cumulative number of medals paid out is the total number of medals granted in a special state (BB, CB) with respect to the total number of medals granted to the player (total cumulative number of medals paid out).

The bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number and the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games are referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and the game machine information display is accompanied by an abbreviation indicating the type of displayed ratio display. It will be displayed sequentially at 50.

Next, the control content of the continuous accessory ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the continuous bonus ratio update process, the address of the continuous bonus payout counter (6000G cumulative total) that counts the number of medals paid out in the special state (BB, CB) is set in the HL register, and the above-mentioned bonus ratio update process is performed. The address of the payout counter (6000G cumulative total) that counts the total number of medals paid out in the slot machine 1 updated by is set in the DE register, and the division process is performed. In the division process, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a continuous accessory ratio between the past 6000 games.

The bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games is referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and is displayed on the game machine information display 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of the displayed ratio display.

Next, the control content of the instruction-in combination ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the instruction-included accessory ratio update process, the address of the instruction-included accessory payout counter (total cumulative total) for counting the total number of medals paid out in the game in which the navigation notification is performed and the game in the special state is set in the HL register. Then, the address of the payout number counter (total cumulative total) updated by the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio update process is set in the DE register, and the division process is performed. In the division process, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the instruction-included accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number.

The instruction-included accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number is referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and is displayed on the game machine information display 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of the displayed ratio display. ..

[Timer interrupt processing]
The control content of the timer interrupt process (main) performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process performed by the main control unit 41. The timer interrupt process (main) is a subroutine included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the timer interrupt process (main), first, after exchanging all the front registers and the back registers (Sv1), the timer interrupt is set to prohibit (Sv2), and then the timer interrupt is set to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Acquire the value of the set voltage drop state counter (Sv3). Then, referring to the input port to which the voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48 (Sv4), it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sv5). When a voltage drop signal is input, the voltage drop state counter determines whether or not it has reached a predetermined upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Sv6), and the voltage drop state counter is the upper limit. When the value is reached, the power interruption process (main) is performed (Sv7).

In the power failure process, all the front and back registers are exchanged, and the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order, and the stack pointer is saved. The current address of the game stack area indicated by the SP is saved in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. The predetermined area of the game RAM area including the game stack area of the game RAM area in which the main control unit 41 stores the register value and the predetermined area of the game RAM area in which the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP is stored is backed up. It is backed up by the power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the stored contents of the game RAM area are saved as long as the power is supplied by the backup power supply.

Then, among the parallel output ports provided in the main control unit 41, the output port 3 from which the drive signal of the hopper motor 34b is output is initialized, and the output state is turned off. As a result, when medals are paid out by the hopper unit 35, the medals are paid out first with priority. After that, among the parallel output ports, the output ports 0 and 1 to which the drive signals of the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R are output are initialized, and when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are rotationally controlled, the reels 2L, Stop the rotation of 2C and 2R.

After that, among the parallel output ports, the control signals of the left / middle / right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R and the output port 2, the credit display 11, and the game auxiliary display 12 that output the control signals of the flow path switching solenoid 30 are displayed. Output output ports 4 and 5, output ports 6 and 7 that output test signals, and output ports 8 and 9 that send commands to the sub-control unit 91 are sequentially initialized to control signals to various switches. Stop the output such as.

After initializing the output ports 0 to 9, the destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the parity adjustment data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is used. clear. Then, the parity adjustment data of the new RAM 41c is calculated so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, the parity adjustment data is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the access to the RAM 41c is performed. Is set to prohibit and the loop processing is started.

In the loop processing, the standby is performed while monitoring the output status of the voltage drop signal. In this state, when the voltage drop signal is no longer input, the voltage recovery is determined, and the program is started from the start processing (main). On the other hand, if the voltage drops while the voltage drop signal is being input, the operation is stopped internally.

When the power supply of AC100V is stopped by the above processing, the power interruption processing (main) is executed, the value of the register before the power interruption is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area, and the game is concerned. Since the contents of the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c including the stack area are also held by supplying the backup power, in the startup process (main) executed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. , It is possible to return to the control state before the power failure. Furthermore, it is possible to specify whether or not the stop operation was effective in the control state before the power failure.

If it is determined that the voltage drop signal has not been input in the Sv5 step of the timer interrupt process, or if it is determined that the voltage drop state counter has not reached the upper limit value in the Sv6 step, the process proceeds to the Sv8 step. Update the voltage drop status counter. When the step from the Sv5 step to the Sv8 step is performed, the current value is maintained by adding 0 to the voltage drop state counter, while when the Sv5 step is advanced to the Sv8 step, the voltage is maintained. Update to add 1 to the drop state counter.

Then, the detection states of various switches are input from the input port, and the port input process for generating input data, confirmation data, and edge data (ON edge data and OFF edge data) is performed (Sv9). After that, using the above-mentioned second save instruction, the values of the flag register in which the calculation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order to save. After the evacuation (Sv10), the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program is performed (Sv11). After that, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the values of the flag registers saved in the game stack area in the step of Sv10 are sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving and set in the flag register. Then, the flag register is restored to the state before the time monitoring update process is performed (Sv12).

In the time monitoring update process, first, the above-mentioned LD instruction is used to read the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, and the value is not set. It is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. By doing so, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register. Are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program as the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program is called from the game program. The second zero flag TZ of the register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the time monitoring update process is called from the game program, the game program determines the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the time monitoring update process. May differ from the state of the register when you call.

After that, the sensor monitoring process for detecting abnormalities related to the input medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, the test signal output process for outputting the test signal generated in relation to the result of the game, and various timers used by the non-game program are updated. The timer update process and the role ratio monitor output data selection process for selecting the output data to be displayed on the role ratio monitor are sequentially performed. Further, in the sensor monitoring process, when an abnormality related to the input medal sensors 31a to 31c or the payout sensor 34c is detected, the sensor error reference data capable of identifying the type of the detected abnormality is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is designed to be set.

Then, using the first return instruction described above, the values of the registers stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the time monitoring update process is started are stored in the non-game stack area in the reverse order of saving. By sequentially reading from and setting to the register corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the time monitoring update process is started. After that, by using the LD instruction described above, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the time monitoring update process is started is read out and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the time monitoring update processing was started, and the time monitoring update processing is terminated. In order to end the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program and return it to the game program, after returning the values of all the registers saved at the start of the time monitoring update process, the stack pointer When the SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, and the flag register before and after the LD instruction is executed. The state may change. That is, the state of the register when the time monitoring update process is completed may be different from the state of the register saved when the time monitoring update process is started.

After returning the flag register in the step of Sv12, the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update process in the step of Sv11 is referred to (Sv13), and is set by the time monitoring update process in the timer interrupt this time. The logical sum of the sensor error reference data and the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update process in the previous timer interrupt is calculated (Sv14). Then, a sensor error flag, which is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and can identify whether or not an abnormality related to the input medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c is detected, is calculated in the step of Sv14. Update based on the logical sum. If it is specified that an abnormality has been detected based on the sensor error reference data by performing the steps Sv13 to Sv15, whether or not the sensor error flag is in a state indicating that an abnormality has been detected. Regardless, the sensor error flag is updated to indicate that the anomaly has been detected. On the other hand, when it is specified that no abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the state of the sensor error flag is maintained. That is, when it is specified that an abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the content of the sensor error reference data is reflected in the sensor error flag, while the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data. When it is specified that the data has not been set or the abnormality has been cleared, the contents of the sensor error reference data are not reflected in the sensor error flag.

After updating the sensor error flag in the step of Sv15, a random number value update process for updating the random number value in the random number circuit provided inside the main control unit 41 is performed (Sv16), and the random number value is provided inside the main control unit 41. Clear the register of the watchdog timer (WDT) (Sv17). After that, the value of the branching counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c for branching the processing included in the timer interrupt is read into the predetermined register, and the predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) is added and updated. , The updated value is set as the value of the branching counter in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sv18). In the process of updating the branch counter, if the branch counter is 0 to 2, 1 is added, and if the branch counter is 3, it is initialized and returned to 0, in the range of 0 to 3. Update. That is, the value of the branch counter loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0 ... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. Then, the value of the branch counter is referred to in each process executed in the timer interrupt process (main), and in each process, for example, a predetermined control is executed when the branch counter reaches a predetermined value. Control will be branched.

After updating the branch counter in the step of Sv18, it is determined whether or not the branch counter is 4 (Sv19), and if the branch counter is 4, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Counter update process (Sv20) to update various predetermined timers, indicators such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BETLED 14-16, status display LED 17, start valid LED dynamic display processing (Sv21) that controls the lighting state of LED18, section display LED19, replaying LED20, etc.) by setting a lighting signal for dynamically lighting according to the setting of each processing such as main processing and transmitting. )I do.

When it is determined that the branch counter is not 4 in the step of Sv19, and after the LED dynamic display processing is performed in the step of Sv21, a medal insertion signal or a medal payout indicating that a medal has been inserted among the external output signals The output setting of the medal payout signal indicating that is performed is updated, and the medal insertion / payout signal transmission process (Sv22) to be transmitted to the outside of the slot machine 1 and the security signal (door open signal, setting change signal) among the external output signals , Input error signal, payout error signal) update the output settings, and send various commands such as security signal transmission processing (Sv24) to the outside of slot machine 1, door command set in command queue, and operation end command. The command transmission process (Sv25) for transmitting or the like is sequentially performed.

After that, the branch counter is referred to to determine whether or not the branch counter is 2, and if the branch counter is 2, if an abnormality related to the reel has occurred (during a reel error). It is determined whether or not a reel error is occurring based on whether or not the set reel error flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sv26). If the reel error is not occurring, the reel control process for controlling the rotation and stop of the reels is performed by setting the excitation patterns of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R according to the progress of the game (Sv27). ..

Then, when it is determined that the branching timer is not 2 in the step of Sv25, when it is determined that a reel error is occurring in the step of Sv26, and when the reel control process in the step of Sv27 is completed, it is set by the reel control process. Reel motor drive signal output processing that rotates and stops each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R in a predetermined control mode by outputting a drive signal corresponding to the excited excitation pattern to each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R ( Sv29), processing to send a control signal to the solenoid drive circuit 46, processing to update the lighting state of the left / middle / right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, processing to set the signal in the advantageous section to the OFF state, etc. After sequentially performing the port output update process (Sv30) to be performed, the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and a predetermined value indicating the ON state in the output buffer (in this embodiment, It is determined whether or not 1) is set (Sv31). By setting the flag in the advantageous section by the ball ejection control process of the main process, a predetermined value indicating the ON state in the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section by the process (Sb82) at the end of the game in the main process (this embodiment). Then, 1) is set.

In the step of Sv31, when it is determined that a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) indicating the ON state is set in the output buffer of the signal in the advantageous section, the signal in the advantageous section is controlled to the ON state. After starting the output of the signal during the advantageous section to the test apparatus (Sv32), the process proceeds to the step of Sv33. On the other hand, in the step of Sv31, an initial value (0 in this embodiment) indicating an OFF state is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section, and a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) indicating an ON state is set. If it is determined that the setting is not set, the process of the step of Sv32 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the step of Sv33.

In the step of Sv33, all the front and back registers are exchanged (Sv33), the timer interrupt is set to allow (Sv34), the timer interrupt process (main) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Return to the main processing when (main) was started.

As described above, in the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the counter update process (Sv20) for updating a plurality of timer values used in the specific process (game program) including the timer value for one game time management and the special process (Sv20) The time monitoring update process (Sv11) for updating the timer value used in the non-game program) is performed separately. As a result, the time monitoring update process for updating the timer value used by the special process is not mixed with the counter update process for updating the timer value used by the specific process.

In the timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the time monitoring update process including the process of outputting the test signal is performed before the counter update process of updating the timer value for one game time management. As a result, after the output of the test signal is started, the update of the timer value for one game time management is started, so that the time interval at which the test signal is output can be surely set to the minimum time or more of one game. ..

[Time monitoring update processing]
The control content of the time monitoring update process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the time monitoring update process performed by the main control unit 41. The time monitoring update process is included in the non-game program and is a subroutine called by the timer interrupt process (main) included in the game program. In addition, the time monitoring update process sequentially calls the sensor monitoring process, the test signal output process, the medal passage time timer update process, and the display monitor output data selection process included in the non-game program.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the time monitoring update process, first, the above-mentioned LD instruction is used to set the value of the current address of the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. It is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and saved (Sv201). After that, using the LD instruction, a predetermined value of the non-game stack area is stored as the value of the stack pointer SP (stored in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program). By setting the value), the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sv202). Then, using the first evacuation instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are set in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. It is saved by storing it (Sv203). After that, it is included in the non-game program, and is connected to the slot machine 1 in the sensor monitoring process (Sv204) for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signals of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c. Test signal output processing (Sv205) that outputs a test signal to the test device, medal passing time timer update processing (Sv206) that updates the timer that measures the passing time of medals in the detection range of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c, The combination monitor display data selection process (Sv207) for selecting the combination data to be displayed on the monitor is sequentially performed.

After the combination monitor display data selection process in the step of Sv207 is performed, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area in the step of Sv203 is stored by using the first return instruction described above. By sequentially reading from the non-game stack area in the reverse order of saving and setting the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the time monitoring update process is started (Sv208). After that, by using the LD instruction described above, the value of the stack pointer SP for the game program saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the step of Sv201 is read, and the value is set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the monitoring update processing was started (Sv209), the time monitoring update processing is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (main) of the caller.

In this way, the main control unit 41 performs various processes (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passage time timer update process, combination monitor display data selection process) according to the time monitor update process included in the non-game program. In this case, the time monitoring update process is called from the timer interrupt process (main) (Sv11) included in the game program to perform various processes of the time monitor update process, and the call is made when each process is completed. It returns to the original timer interrupt process (main).

Further, in the time monitoring update processing, after being called from the timer interrupt processing (main) which is a game program, first, the stack pointer SP and the register are saved, and then the sensor monitoring processing and the test signal output processing are performed. , Performs multiple processes such as medal passage time timer update process and combination monitor display data selection process. Then, after all of these processes are completed, the stack pointer SP and the register saved when called from the game program are restored, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main) of the caller. In such a configuration, that is, in a non-game program called from a game program by a single call process, a plurality of processes (for example, sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passage time timer update process, combination monitor display data selection) In the configuration for performing processing, etc.), the processing for saving the stack pointer SP and the register and the processing for returning the stack pointer SP and the register are not performed for each of a plurality of processing performed in the non-game program, and the processing can be collectively performed once.

Further, when a non-game program (for example, time monitoring update processing) is called from a game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the calculation result of the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is stored on the game program side. After saving the value of the flag register to be stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area, the non-game program is called, and after the non-game program is terminated, it is saved before calling the non-game program. By sequentially reading the value of the flag register from the game stack area and setting it in the corresponding flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before calling the non-game program. As a result, when the game program returns to the game program even if the value of the flag register is changed by calling the non-game program and the non-game program uses the flag register to perform an operation. In addition, the value of the flag register can be restored to the state before calling the non-game program, and the subsequent processing can be performed.

Further, in the non-game program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by the game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), first, the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is used. The value of the current address of the game stack area indicated by is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and saved. Then, after performing a predetermined process according to the non-game program, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the non-game program is started when the non-game program is terminated. Is set in the stack pointer SP to return the stack pointer SP to the state when the non-game program was started. As a result, even if the non-game program uses the stack pointer SP in the non-game program to change the stack pointer SP, when the non-game program is terminated, the non-game program is started. With the stack pointer SP returned to the state, it is possible to return to the calling game program.

Further, in the non-game program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by the game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are set to the non-game. It is saved by storing it in the non-game stack area of the RAM area. Then, after performing a predetermined process according to the non-game program, when the non-game program is terminated, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the non-game program is started is performed. Is sequentially read from the non-game stack area and set in the corresponding register, so that all the registers are returned to the state when the non-game program was started. As a result, even if the non-game program uses a register to perform various processes in the non-game program and the value of the register is changed, the non-game program is terminated when the non-game program is terminated. It is possible to return to the calling game program with the values of all the registers restored to the state when the was started.

Further, in the non-game program, when called by the game program, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area to be saved, and the non-game program is saved. By setting the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area to the corresponding register when terminating, all the registers are restored to the state when the non-game program was started. It has become. The register values used by the game program are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, saved, and returned to the register from the non-game stack area. Therefore, all the register values are stored in the game stack area. Since it is not necessary to provide an area for saving, and only an area for saving the value of the flag register needs to be provided in the game stack area, the capacity of the game stack area can be reduced.

Further, the main control unit 41 requires a program capacity of 1 byte for the instruction to save the values of the flag registers, while the main control unit 41 requires a program capacity of 2 bytes for the instruction to save the values of all the registers. To do. Then, when the non-game program is called from the game program, the value of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area on the game program side, and then the non-game program is executed. On the calling and non-game program side, the values of all the registers are saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and the program of the game program is better than the case where all the registers are saved on the game program side. The capacity can be reduced.

[Sensor monitoring process]
31 and 32 are flow charts showing the control contents of the sensor monitoring process performed by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 31, in the sensor monitoring process, the branch counter of the timer interrupt process (main) updated in the timer interrupt process (main) and set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to. It is determined whether or not it is the timing (timing when the branch timer is 0) for performing the process related to the payout sensor for monitoring whether or not the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is abnormal (Sz101). Then, when it is time to perform the process related to the payout sensor, the process proceeds to the step of Sz102. On the other hand, if the processing related to the payout sensor is not the timing, the process proceeds to the step of Sz117, and the processing related to the insertion sensor that monitors whether or not the detection state of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c is abnormal is performed.

When it is determined in the step of Sz101 that it is the timing to perform the process related to the payout sensor, a sensor error set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c in order to transmit the monitoring result by the sensor monitoring process to the game program. Clear the reference data (Sz102). Then, referring to the error flag which is set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and can identify whether or not the error codes E1 to E5 have occurred (Sz103), the error codes E2 and E3, It is determined whether or not an abnormality of E4 has occurred (Sz104).

If it is determined that an abnormality of error codes E2, E3, E4 has occurred in the step of Sz104, the process proceeds to the step of Sz117, while if it is determined that an abnormality of error codes E2, E3, E4 has not occurred. After referring to the predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the definite data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are stored (Sz105), the medal is paid out by the hopper unit 35 with reference to the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the payout flag indicating that the control is being performed is set (Sz106).

When it is determined that the payout flag is set in the step of Sz106, whether or not one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state based on the confirmed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in the step of Sz105. (Sz107), and when one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state, the edge data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is referred to a predetermined area of the port input buffer (Sz108) and the edge is stored. It is determined whether or not the data (ON edge data or OFF edge data) is set (Sz109).

Then, when it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON in the step of Sz107 and the edge data is set in the step of Sz107, that is, one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 is When it starts to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or when one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 finishes passing through the detection range of the payout sensor, the non-gaming RAM of the RAM 41c The sensor check timer 1 set in the predetermined area of the area is initialized and set to 0 (Sz110), and the time counting of the passing time of a new medal is started. Then, when it is determined that the edge data is not set in the step of Sz109, and after the sensor check timer 1 is initialized in the step of Sz110, 1 is added to the sensor check timer 1 to update (Sz111).

The sensor check timer 1 starts from the time from when the medal starts to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d to when the medal finishes passing, and from the time when the medal finishes passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It is a timer for measuring the time until the next medal starts to pass. By being updated by the step of Sz111 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 1 relates to the payout sensor during the period in which the payout flag is set, that is, the medal payout control is performed by the hopper unit 35. It is updated every timing (timer interrupt processing (main) is once every four times and 2.24 milliseconds).

When it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON in the step of Sz107 and the edge data is not set in the step of Sz109, that is, the medal payout control is one piece paid out from the hopper unit 35. If the medal is passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or if it is the period between the payout of one medal and the payout of the next medal during payout control, the sensor The check timer 1 is updated by adding one unit time (2.24 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sz111).

Then, after updating the sensor check timer 1 in the step of Sz111, whether or not the value of the sensor check timer 1 exceeds the maximum value of the predetermined monitoring time (11.20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is determined. Judgment (Sz112).

Here, the maximum value of the monitoring time of the sensor check timer 1 is at least the maximum value of the time required from when the medals are paid out by the hopper unit 35 and the medals start to pass through the detection ranges of the payout sensors 34c and 34d to the end. Then, after the medals paid out by the hopper unit 35 have passed through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, the next medal is paid out by the hopper unit 35 and passes through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It is set to be longer than the longer time required to start the operation. As a result, at least the time during which the detection states of the payout sensors 34c and 34d can continue in the ON state and the payout sensors 34c and 34d are based on the sensor check timer 1 during the period when the payout control for paying medals is performed. It is determined whether or not a period longer than the time during which the detection state of the above can be continued in the OFF state has elapsed.

When it is determined in the step of Sz112 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 exceeds the maximum value of the monitoring time, sensor error reference data (payout sensor) indicating that an abnormality has been detected based on the detection states of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. ) Is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 14c (Sz113), the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0 (Sz114), and the time counting of the passing time of a new medal is started to start the time counting of the Sz114. The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in the step is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to the step of Sz117. On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sz112 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 does not exceed the maximum value of the monitoring time, the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and Sz117 is stored. Proceed to the step of.

Further, when it is determined in the step of Sz106 that the payout flag is set, and when it is determined in the step of Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, the processing of the steps Sz108 to Sz113 is performed. By proceeding to the step of Sz114 without performing, the sensor error reference data is maintained in the state cleared in the step of Sz102, the step of Sz114 is performed, the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0, and then the relevant The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in the step of Sz114 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to the step of Sz117.

When it is determined that the payout flag is not set in the step of Sz106, both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state based on the confirmed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in the step of Sz105. Whether or not it is determined (Sz116), and if both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to the step of Sz107. Then, when it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state in the step of Sz107, the process proceeds to the step of Sz117 without setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sz106 that the payout flag is not set and it is determined in the step of Sz116 that both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are not in the OFF state, the process proceeds to the step of Sz113. After setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor) in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 14c, the sensor check timer 1 is initialized (Sz114), and the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz115), the process proceeds to the step of Sz117.

By performing the above steps of Sz11 to 116, the processing related to the payout sensor for determining whether or not an abnormality related to the payout of medals has occurred based on the detection states of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is performed. After the processing is performed, the processing related to the input sensor is performed following the processing related to the payout sensor by performing the processing after the step of Sz117.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the process related to the insertion sensor in the sensor monitoring process, first, whether or not the medal care permission flag indicating that the medal insertion from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz117), and if the medal care permission flag is not set, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's time monitoring update process.

When it is determined that the medal care permission flag is set in the step of Sz117, the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sz118), and an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c (hereinafter, medals). It is determined whether or not a medal sensor error is occurring based on whether or not a sensor error flag that can identify whether or not (sometimes referred to as a sensor error) is detected is set (Sz119). Then, if the medal sensor error is in progress, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's time monitoring update process.

If it is determined in the step of Sz119 that the medal sensor error is not occurring, the current medal sensors 31a to 31c (in FIG. 32, the medal sensors 1, 2, and 3) set in the port input buffer in the game RAM area are present. With reference to the data (Sz120), it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state (Sz121).

When it is determined that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state in the step of Sz121, the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz122), and the RAM 41c is not turned on. With reference to the sensor check timer 2 set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area, it is determined whether or not the sensor check timer 2 is 0 (Sz123).

The sensor check timer 2 is a timer for measuring the time from when the medal starts to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c to when the medal finishes passing. By being updated by the step of Sz127 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 1 is at each timing (timer interrupt process (main)) in which the sensor monitoring process is performed during the period when the input medal sensor 31a is in the ON state. , 0.56 milliseconds).

When it is determined that the sensor check timer 2 is 0 in the step of Sz123, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c referred to in the step of Sz120 are in the ON state (Sz124), and the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are determined. Is not in the ON state, within the medal insertion signal ignoring time without referring to the medal insertion signal based on the medal insertion signal ignoring timer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the medal insertion signal processing (flow path switching in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is within 504 milliseconds after the start of the medal flow path switching control by the solenoid 30 (Sz125), and if it is not within the medal insertion signal ignore time, one unit is set in the sensor check timer 2. The time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) is added and updated (Sz126), and the value of the sensor check timer 2 after the addition is for the medal to normally pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensor 31a. It is determined whether or not the maximum value of the required normal transit time range (99.68 m in this embodiment) has been exceeded (Sz127). The normal passing time range includes the measured value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving flow path 29b of the medal selector 29, and the insertion in the medal receiving flow path 29b. It is predetermined based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the like (in this embodiment, the range is 10.08 ms to 99.68 ms).

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sz127 that the value of the sensor check timer 2 exceeds the maximum value of the normal passage time range, and when it is determined in the step of Sz124 that the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are in the ON state, the inserted medals are inserted. After setting the sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) indicating that an abnormality has been detected based on the detection states of the sensors 31a to 31c in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 14c (Sz128), the sensor check timer 2 is set. Initialize and set to 0 (Sz129) to start timing the passing time of new medals. Then, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's time monitoring update process.

Further, when it is determined in the step of Sz121 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are not in the ON state, and when it is determined in the step of Sz126 that the insertion medal signal is not within the medal insertion signal ignore time based on the medal insertion signal ignore timer, the sensor is determined in the step of Sz127. If it is determined that the value of the check timer 2 does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passage time range, the value of the sensor check timer 2 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz130), and the sensor monitoring process is terminated. Return to the caller's time monitoring update process.

As described above, in the sensor monitoring process, by performing the steps of Sz101 to Sz116, the process related to the payout sensor is performed, and an abnormality related to the payout of medals occurs based on the detection states of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality related to the insertion of medals based on the detection state of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c by performing the processing of the steps Sz117 to Sz130. It has become like.

Further, in the sensor monitoring process, after determining whether or not an abnormality related to the payout of medals has occurred by performing the process related to the payout sensor, the process related to the insertion sensor is continuously performed regardless of the result of the determination to perform the medal. It is designed to determine whether or not there is an abnormality related to the input of.

[Test signal output processing]
The test signal output process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the test signal output process performed by the main control unit 41. The main control unit 41 performs the above-mentioned sensor monitoring process and then continuously performs the test signal process.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the test signal output processing, first, the one-game time management timer set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c by the main processing is referred to (Sz201), and the one-game time management timer is used. It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, it is a value at which the time counting by the one-game time management timer is started, and is a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) (Sz202). If the Sb43 step of the main process is performed before the timer interrupt process (main), which is the caller of the time monitoring update process that called the test number output process, is performed, one game time. The value of the management timer is set to a predetermined value.

When it is determined in the step of Sz202 that the timer for one game time management is the initial value, the branch counter set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c by the timer interrupt processing (main) is referred to (Sz203). When the branching counter has a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment), a predetermined value (output to the test device) predetermined to the test signal output timer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is output. It is a value according to the number of output data, and in this embodiment, the time ((22.4 milliseconds) × number of output data (4)) for continuing the output of the test signal that can identify one output data is set. And start the time measurement (Sz204). On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sz202 that the timer for managing one game time is not the initial value, if it is determined that the timer for branching is not 3 in the step of Sz203, after setting the test signal output timer in the step of Sz204, The initial address of the output data address for specifying the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the output data to be output as the test signal is stored is acquired (Sz205). The output data is data that can identify the winning status of the special role and the winning status of the general role in the internal lottery.

After that, the value of the test signal output timer is referred to (Sz206), and it is determined whether or not the time counting of the predetermined time by the test signal output timer has ended (Sz207). Then, when the test signal output timer is not 0 and the time counting of the predetermined time by the test signal output timer is not completed, it is determined whether or not the output data fixed mode is set (Sz208). The output data fixed mode is set when the output data set by the RT information output process performed in the step Sb2 of the main process described above is output as a test signal.

Then, when the output data fixed mode is not set, the test signal output timer is decremented by 1 unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) and updated (Sz209), and then in the step of Sz206. When the value of the referenced test signal output timer is divided by a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to the time (22.4 milliseconds) for continuing the output of the identifiable test signal). It is determined whether or not the remainder value is 0 (Sz210). Then, when the remainder value is 0, the process returns to the step of Sz205, and the steps of Sz205 to Sz210 are processed based on the value of the test signal output timer updated in the step of Sz209. On the other hand, when the remainder value is not 0, the value of the test signal output timer referred to in the step of Sz206 is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, the time for continuing the output of the test signal capable of specifying one output data (22. The quotient when divided by (value corresponding to 4 milliseconds)) is calculated, the quotient value is added to the output data address of the initial address acquired in the step of Sz205 (Sz211), and the process proceeds to the step of Sz212. Then, the output data address is further advanced by one address, and the output data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sz213).

If it is determined that the output data fixed mode is set in the step of Sz208, the process proceeds to the step of Sz212, and the output data address of the initial address set in the step of Sz206 is advanced by one address (Sz212). The output data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sz213).

After that, the output data acquired in the step of Sz213 is set as a test signal output (Sz214), and the test signal output is set to the output port 6 and output (Sz215). If it is determined in the step of Sz207 that the value of the test signal output timer referred to in the step of Sz206 is 0, the test signal output is set to the OFF state (Sz216) and the test signal output is sent to the output port 6. Set and output (Sz215). After setting the output of the test signal in the step of Sz215, the test signal output process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's time monitoring update process.

With such control, the main control unit 41 starts when the one-game time management timer is set to the initial value, that is, when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started as a game. The test signal is output from the output port 6 for a predetermined period (89.6 milliseconds (22.4 milliseconds × 4) in this embodiment).

Further, as a test signal, the main control unit 41 sequentially outputs four output data capable of identifying the winning status of the general combination and the special combination in the internal lottery at predetermined time (22.4 milliseconds in this embodiment). It is switched so that it can be output from the output port 6.

[Timer update process]
The timer update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the timer update process performed by the main control unit 41. The main control unit 41 performs the timer update process after performing the test signal output process described above.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the timer update process, first, the medal passage time timer set in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to by the medal sensor process included in the non-game program, and the medal passes. It is determined whether or not the value of the time timer is 0 (Sz301).

When the value of the medal passing time timer is 0, that is, when the time for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not timed by the medal sensor processing, the timer update processing is terminated and the caller is called. Return to the time monitoring update process of.

On the other hand, when the value of the medal passing time timer is not 0, that is, when the time for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is measured by the medal sensor processing, a predetermined value is added to the medal passing time timer. After updating (Sz302), the timer update process is terminated, and the process returns to the caller's time monitoring update process.

[Display monitor output data selection process]
The display monitor output data selection process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. 35 and 36 are flow charts showing the control contents of the display monitor output data selection process performed by the main control unit 41. The main control unit 41 performs the display monitor output data selection process after performing the timer update process described above.

The display monitor output data selection process is started after the port input process in the timer interrupt process (main) performed by the main control unit 41 every 0.56 milliseconds, and the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process (main). This is a process for setting the lighting data of the LED used in.

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, in the display monitor output data selection process, first, the address of the display monitor selection timer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set in the HL register (Sz401), and the address is displayed. It is updated by adding 1 to the monitor selection timer value (Sz402). After that, it is determined whether or not the display monitor selection timer value has reached the upper limit value (8928) (Sz403), and if it is determined that the display monitor selection timer value has reached the upper limit value (8928), The display monitor selection timer value is initialized and set to 0 (Sz403). Display monitor Adds 1 to the display content vector and updates (Sz405). The display monitor display content vector is updated within the range of 0 to 4 by correcting it to 0 when the value exceeds 4 by adding 1.

If the display monitor display content vector is updated in the step of Sz405, or if it is determined in the step of Sz403 that the timer value for selecting the display monitor has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to the step of Sz406 and the game state is referred to. Then (Sz406), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state is in progress (Sz407). When it is determined in the step of Sz407 that the setting is being confirmed, the process of the steps Sz447 to Sz463 described later is performed to display the display test pattern on the 7-segment display of the game machine information display 50.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sz407 that the setting confirmation state is not in progress, the address of the display monitor identifier output data table is set in the HL register (Sz408), and the value of the display monitor display content vector is set in the A register and the B register. Read (Sz409). Then, based on the A register value and the HL register value, the address in which the identifier output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display content vector is stored is calculated (Sz410), and the identifier output data stored in the address is calculated. Read into the DE register (Sz411).

After that, after updating by adding 1 to the value of the display monitor display content vector read into the B register in the step of Sz409 (Sz412), the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is set to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The digestion game number determination flag that can specify whether or not the specified number of games is exceeded is read into the A register (Sz413), and the relevant case is concerned. The determination value included in the digestion game number determination flag is extracted into the C register (Sz414).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the specified number of games based on the determination value extracted in the C register (Sz415).

If it is determined in the step of Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 does not exceed the specified number of games, the address of the display monitor selection timer is set in the HL register (Sz416), and a predetermined area of the ROM 41b is set. The arithmetic constant 1 registered in advance in is read into the BC register (Sz417). Then, the display monitor selection timer value of the HL register is divided by the arithmetic constant 1 of the BC register (Sz418), and it is determined whether or not the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is 0 (Sz419). If it is determined in the step of Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is not 0, the output data that clears the DE register and sets 0 to make the display of the 7-segment display blank (non-display) is displayed. Set to the DE register (Sz420) and proceed to the step of Sz421.

If it is determined that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the specified number of games in the step of Sz415, the process proceeds to the step of Sz421 without performing each process of the steps of Sz416 to Sz420. Further, when it is determined in the step of Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient obtained by dividing the timer value for display monitor selection by the constant for calculation 1 is 0, the process of the step of Sz420 is not performed. , Sz421 steps.

In the step of Sz421, the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the game machine information display 50 as the identifier display data (Sz421).

After that, the display data for displaying "−−" on the game machine information display 50 is set in the DE register (Sz422). Then, the start address of the display monitor threshold data table is set in the HL register (Sz423), the value of the display monitor display vector is read into the A register (Sz424), and the display monitor display vector is set based on the A register value and the HL register value. The address in which the threshold data corresponding to the value is stored is calculated (Sz425). Then, the role ratio display is valid by referring to the role ratio monitor display valid data that is stored in the predetermined area corresponding to the value of the display monitor display vector and can specify whether or not the role ratio display is valid. It is determined whether or not there is (Sz426).

If it is determined in the step of Sz426 that the combination ratio display is not valid, the process proceeds to Sz446 described later, and the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the game machine information display 50 as the combination display (Sz446) and then displayed. The monitor output data selection process is terminated and the process returns to the time monitor update process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sz426 that the combination ratio display is valid, the data stored in the address specified by the HL register value is read into the B register as a threshold (Sz427), and the display monitor combination ratio is displayed. The start address of the output data table is set in the HL register (Sz428), and the address in which the output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display vector is stored is calculated based on the A register value and the HL register value (Sz429). Then, the output data stored in the address is read into the A register (Sz430). After that, the output data of the A register and the threshold value of the B register are compared, and a value indicating the comparison result is set in the C register (Sz431).

After that, the data whose display mode is not blinking is temporarily set in the B register (Sz432), and it is determined whether or not the output data is less than the threshold value based on the C register value (Sz433). If it is determined in the step of Sz433 that the output data is not less than the threshold value, the data whose display mode is blinking is temporarily set in the B register (Sz434), and the process proceeds to the step of Sz435. On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sz433 that the output data is less than the threshold value, the process of the step of Sz434 is not performed and the process proceeds to the step of Sz435. In the step of Sz435, the quotient obtained by dividing the output data of the A register by 10 is set in the A register, and the remainder is set in the E register (Sz435).

After dividing the output data of the A register by 10 in the step of Sz435 and setting the quotient and the remainder in the predetermined registers, the start address of the display data table is set in the HL register (Sz436) and set to the HL register value. The display data stored in the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value is read into the D register, and the display of the tens digit of the combination ratio display is set (Sz437).

After that, the E register value is read into the A register (Sz438), the display data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is read into the E register, and the combination display 1 is used. The display of the register is set (Sz439).

After that, it is determined whether or not there is a blinking setting based on the value of the B register (Sz440), and if it is determined that there is a blinking setting, the display monitor selection timer value is read into the HL register (Sz441). Then, a predetermined timer reference value (value corresponding to 0.3 seconds in this embodiment) is read into the BC register (Sz442), and the quotient obtained by dividing the HL register value by the BC register value is set in the HL register. Then, the remainder is set in the DE register (Sz443). After that, it is determined whether or not the least significant bit of the quotient set in the HL register is 0 (Sz444), and if it is determined that the least significant bit of the quotient is not 0, the display data (value of the DE register). Is set to 0 (Sz445), and the process proceeds to the step of Sz446.

If it is determined in the step of Sz440 that there is no blinking setting based on the value of the B register, the process proceeds to the step of Sz446 without performing each process of the steps of Sz441 to Sz445. If it is determined that the least significant bit of the quotient is 0 in the step of Sz444, the process proceeds to the step of Sz446 without processing the step of Sz445.

In the step of Sz446, the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the game machine information display 50 as a role ratio display (Sz446). After that, the display monitor output data selection process is terminated and the process returns to the time monitor update process.

If it is determined in the step of Sz407 that the setting is being confirmed, the process proceeds to the step of Sz447, 0 is set as the display data (DE register value) (Sz447), and then the DE register value is displayed as an identifier. The combination display is set in the output buffer of the game machine information display 50 (Sz448, Sz449).

After that, after reading the display monitor selection timer value into the HL register (Sz450), the HL register value is corrected (Sz451), and the arithmetic constant 2 registered in advance in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b is read into the BC register (Sz452). ). Then, the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value of the HL register by the arithmetic constant 2 of the BC register is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz453). After that, the arithmetic constant 3 registered in advance in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b is read into the BC register (Sz454), and the HL register value (the quotient value set in the step of Sz453) is divided by the arithmetic constant 3 of the BC register. The quotient thus obtained is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz455).

Then, the value of the L register is read into the A register (Sz456), the address of the output buffer of the game machine information display 50 that displays the role ratio is read into the HL register (Sz457), and the A register value is added to the HL register. Correct (Sz458). After that, the C register value is read into the A register (Sz459), the address of the display test pattern data of the game machine information display 50 is read into the DE register (Sz460), and the A register value is added to the DE register for correction (Sz461). ).

After that, the output data of the display test pattern stored at the address specified by the DE register value is read into the A register (Sz462), and the output of the game machine information display 50 that displays the winning combination specified by the HL register value is output. The A register value is stored in the buffer (Sz463). After that, the display monitor output data selection process is terminated and the process returns to the time monitor update process.

[Counter update process]
The counter update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the counter update process performed by the main control unit 41. The counter update process is included in the game program and is a subroutine called in the timer interrupt process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the counter update process, first, in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the medal insertion signal ignore timer for timing the medal insertion signal ignore time that does not refer to the medal insertion signal by the above-mentioned medal insertion signal processing is set. The address is set in the HL register (Sv301). Then, with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, whether or not the medal insertion signal ignore timer value is 0, that is, whether or not the medal insertion signal ignore time is being clocked. (Sv302), and if it is determined that the medal insertion signal ignore timer value is not 0 and the medal insertion signal ignore time is being clocked, the medal insertion signal ignore timer value is decremented by 1 and updated ( Sv303).

After that, as described above, the address of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the one-game time management timer for timing the minimum time of one game is set is set in the HL register (Sv304). Then, with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, whether or not the timer value for one game time management is 0, that is, whether or not the minimum time of one game is being clocked. If it is determined (Sv305) and it is determined that the timer for one game time management is not 0 and the minimum time of one game is being clocked, the timer value for one game time management is subtracted by 1 and updated. (Sv306). After that, the counter update process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the counter update process, the medal insertion signal is ignored, which is a counter that counts the time managed by the game program (main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) (medal insertion signal ignore time, minimum time of one game, etc.). The timer and the timer for one game time management are updated. On the other hand, a medal passing time timer that measures the time (medal sensor monitoring time, test signal output time, medal passing time, etc.) managed by a non-game program (medal sensor check processing, sensor monitoring processing, test signal output processing, etc.), The sensor check timer 1, the sensor check timer 2, and the test signal output timer are not updated by the counter update process included in the game program, and various processes (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process) included in the above-mentioned non-game program are not updated. , Timer update process).

[Notification during section display LED lighting]
The section display LED lighting notification performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the notification while the section display LED is lit.

As described above, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 19 to the lit state when starting the control of the AT after controlling the advantageous section, and displays the section indicating that the section is controlled to the advantageous section. It is possible. Then, the main control unit 41 performs the section display when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power supply is restarted in the normal procedure while the section display is being performed. It is designed to return to the state of being.

Further, the main control unit 41 issues a command to the sub control unit 91 that can specify that the section display is to be performed when the section display is started in association with the start of the AT control after controlling the advantageous section. And send. Further, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the state before the power supply is stopped is restored, when the section display is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 issues a command capable of specifying that the section display is to be performed. Send to.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 detects that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the sub-control unit 91 sets the time specified based on the RTC (real-time clock) included in the sub-control unit 91. It is stored in the storage means provided in 91. Further, when it is specified that the section display is performed on the main control unit 41 side based on the command from the main control unit 41 when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, refer to the RTC. The current time is specified, the current time is compared with the time stored in the storage means when the power supply is stopped, and the slot machine 1 is connected across the specific time (4 am in this embodiment). Determine if power supply has been resumed. Then, when it is determined that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted over a specific time (4 am in this embodiment), the section is displayed on the main control unit 41 side. The section display LED is lit, and the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 57 are used to notify the driver.

In the section display LED lighting middle report, a notification image notifying that the section display LED 19 is controlled to the lighting state by the main control unit 41 (a character suggesting that the section display LED 19 is in the lighting state (“section display LED lighting”) The image of "middle"), the image suggesting the position of the section display LED 19 in the slot machine 1, the image of a predetermined character) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and are installed on the player side of the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. By controlling the effect LEDs 57L and 57R to be lit in a lighting mode different from that during the normal game, it is notified that the lighting state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 38A, the main control unit 41 controls the game section to an advantageous section, starts the section display when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and controls the section display LED 19 to be lit. Then, it is notified that the control is performed in the advantageous section. At this time, the sub control unit 91 does not notify while the section display LED is lit. In this state, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and then the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted in the normal procedure in which the section display LED is not turned off, which will be described later, the main control unit 41 Controls the section display LED 19 to be lit. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 controls so as to notify while the section display LED is lit. Then, after the section display LED lighting notification is started, a predetermined specific period elapses, or the game start operation is performed before the specific period elapses, so that the section display LED lighting notification is sent. Control to terminate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38B, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the main control unit 41 is displaying the section, and then the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. By performing the operation of turning off the section display LED, the main control unit 41 returns to a state in which the game can be played after initializing the information regarding the advantageous section. As a result, the section display LED 19 is restored without controlling the lighting state without displaying the section. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not display the section, the main control unit 41 does not send a command that can specify that the section display is to be performed to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub control unit 91 does not receive a command that can identify the section display from the main control unit 41, so that the section display LED lights up. Control is performed so that the control of the effect is resumed without performing the intermediate notification.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the main control unit 41 does not display the section even when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section if the predetermined start condition is not satisfied. In this state, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted, the section is not displayed until a predetermined start condition is satisfied. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not display the section, the main control unit 41 does not send a command that can specify that the section display is to be performed to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub control unit 91 does not receive a command that can identify the section display from the main control unit 41, so that the section display LED lights up. Control is performed so that the control of the effect is resumed without performing the intermediate notification.

The sub control unit 91 of this embodiment has an RTC (real-time clock) and can specify the time, but the sub control unit 91 may not have an RTC. In a configuration in which the sub control unit 91 does not have an RTC, when it is specified that the section display is performed on the main control unit 41 side when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the section display is always performed. It may be configured to notify while the LED is lit.

As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment notifies the slot machine 1 that the section display LED is lit for a certain period of time after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and the section display LED is lit after the certain time has elapsed. It is designed to end the medium notification. As a result, when the section display returns to the state when the power supply starts, the section display LED is lit to notify the clerk at the time of opening the amusement store. It is possible to recognize that the section display is being performed. On the other hand, since the section display LED lighting notification is terminated after a certain period of time, the section display LED lighting notification is continued after the game store is opened, which may give a sense of discomfort to the player or the like. Can be prevented.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is set to a specific time outside the business hours of the amusement shop after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section is displayed on the main control unit 41 side (this implementation). In the example, when the power supply starts across 4 am) and returns to the state where the section display is performed, the section display LED indicating that the section display has returned to the state is lit. While the notification is performed using the liquid crystal display 51, when the power supply is started and the section display is returned to the state where the section display is performed without straddling the specific time, the section display LED is not notified while the section display LED is lit. It has become. As a result, even if a power failure occurs temporarily during business hours, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

When the game is started while the section display LED is lit, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment ends the section display LED lit notification without waiting for a certain period of time to elapse. There is. As a result, it is possible to end the section display LED lighting notification by starting the game even when a certain period of time has not elapsed after starting the section display LED lighting notification.

In the sub control unit 91 of this embodiment, the power supply is started and the section is not displayed after the power supply is stopped in the section before the start of AT in which the section is not displayed on the main control unit 41 side. When the state is restored, the section display LED is not notified while it is lit. As a result, only when the section is controlled to the advantageous section and the section is returned to the state where the section is displayed, the clerk of the game store can be made to recognize that the store is opened with the section displayed. it can.

[Timer interrupt processing (sub)]
Next, a timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the sub control unit 91 at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count value of the internal clock will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process (sub) performed by the sub control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub control unit 91 first saves the register in use to the stack area (Sp101). Next, the sub control unit 91 performs a power failure determination process (Sp102). In the power failure determination process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit, and if the voltage drop signal is input, the voltage drop signal is also output in the previous power failure determination process. It is determined whether or not the signal has been input, and if a voltage drop signal has been input even in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that there is a power failure, and a power failure flag indicating that is set.

After the power failure determination process in the step of Sp102, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set (Sp103), and if the power failure flag is set, the power failure process (sub). Move to. In the power interruption processing (sub), the sub control unit 91 sets the backup flag used in the startup processing (sub) after creating the backup data, and calculates the checksum by calculating the exclusive OR of the backup data. And so on.

The sub-control unit 91 executes the command analysis process when the power failure flag is not set (Sp104). In the command analysis process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the command is stored in the command buffer, and if the command is stored in the command buffer, acquires the command from the command buffer. Then, the sub-control unit 91 executes the process according to the acquired command.

The sub-control unit 91 executes the payout number counter set process (Sp105). In the payout number counter set process, the sub-control unit 91 executes a process of setting the payout number at that time in the payout number counter when a medal is paid out during the bonus. The sub-control unit 91 updates the acquired number display and the total acquired number display of the liquid crystal display 51 based on the number of medals set in the payout number counter.

The sub control unit 91 executes the number display control process (Sp106). In the number display control process, the sub control unit 91 controls various displays on the liquid crystal display 51 during the bonus. Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 displays the number of medals that can be obtained in the bonus under control (that is, the number of medals that can be obtained by the end of the bonus), and the bonus under control. The number of medals acquired by the player in the control is displayed, and the number of medals acquired by the player in a predetermined period before the control of the bonus under control is started. The total number of medals won is displayed by adding the number of medals.

In addition, in the total number of acquired cards display, when the bonus is newly controlled within 100 games from the end of the bonus (so-called continuous chan), the number of medals acquired by the player in the previous bonus is newly controlled. The number of medals won by the player in the given bonus is added and displayed. Further, in the total number of acquired medals, the number of medals acquired by the bonus is cumulatively added and displayed as long as the bonus is controlled within 100 games. Therefore, the predetermined period before the control of the bonus under control is started is the control period of the previous bonus that was controlled within 100 games retroactively from the start of the bonus under control.

In the present embodiment, two types of bonuses such as CB and BB are provided as bonuses. The total number of medals won is displayed for the medals won by the player in the previous BB when the BB is newly controlled within a predetermined period (100 games) after the end of the previous BB (so-called continuous chan). The number of medals acquired by the player in the newly controlled BB may be added to the number of medals and displayed, or the CB is newly controlled within a predetermined period (100 games) after the end of the previous CB. In this case (so-called continuous chan), the number of medals won by the player in the previous CB may be added to the number of medals won by the player in the newly controlled CB. .. Further, in the case of so-called continuous chanting between CB and BB, the total number of medals acquired in these bonuses may be displayed as the total number of acquired medals.

Also, for example, BB ends when 345 or more medals are paid out. Therefore, when BB is started, the number of sheets that can be acquired is set to 345. Then, the BB ends in the game in which the number of sheets that can be acquired becomes 0. When the BB is started, the number of medals that can be obtained is displayed from 345, but the BB may end with 345 or more medals being paid out. Therefore, the addition of the acquired number display and the total acquired number display may end after the subtraction of the acquired number display is completed.

The sub control unit 91 executes the turn-off control process (Sp107). In the extinguishing control process, the sub-control unit 91 executes control for extinguishing the advantageous middle lamp 60 that was lit during the bonus and the reel backlight 28 that illuminates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back surface. The reel backlight 28 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 executes the result notification with the end of the bonus, the lighting mode of the advantageous middle lamp 60 is changed from the lighting mode of the bonus middle mode to the result notification mode. Then, after turning off the reel backlight 28, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is turned off. The advantageous middle lamp 60 is controlled so as to be turned off before the next game of the final bonus game can be started. The game can be started in a state in which the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled by setting the number of bets.

The sub control unit 91 executes the winning effect execution process (Sp108). In the winning effect execution process, the sub-control unit 91 executes a winning effect according to the type of winning generated during the bonus. The winning effect is executed by turning on or blinking the reel backlight 28. The winning production includes a first winning production and a second winning production. The blinking mode of the reel backlight 28 is different between the first winning effect and the second winning effect. Specifically, the second prize-winning effect blinks violently (flashes) at a faster blinking speed than the first prize-winning effect. The mode of the second winning effect is not limited to this, and other modes such as changing the brightness when the reel backlight 28 is blinked may be used.

[Payout number counter set processing]
Next, the payout number counter set process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the payout number counter set process performed by the sub control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the payout number counter set process, the sub control unit 91 first determines whether or not the bonus is in progress based on the command from the main control unit 41 (Sa101). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the bonus is not in progress.

When the bonus is in progress, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not a medal has been paid out based on a command from the main control unit 41 (Sa102). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the medal has not been paid out.

When a medal is paid out, the sub-control unit 91 sets the number of medals to be paid out in the payout number counter (Sa103), sets a payout flag capable of identifying that the medal has been paid out in the RAM 91c, and performs processing. Finish (Sa104).

[Number display control process]
Next, the number display control process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the number display control process performed by the sub control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the number display control process, the sub control unit 91 first determines whether or not the bonus is in progress based on the command from the main control unit 41 (Sb101). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the bonus is not in progress.

The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the payout flag is set in Sa104 of FIG. 40 during the bonus (Sb102). When the payout flag is set, the sub-control unit 91 performs a number display update control process (see FIG. 42) for updating various displays (display of the number of possible acquisitions, display of the total number of acquisitions, display of the number of acquisitions) in the bonus. Execute (Sb103).

On the other hand, when it is determined in Sb102 that the payout flag is not set, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the bet number has been set (Sb104). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the bet number is not set. When the number of bets is set, the sub-control unit 91 subtracts two bets corresponding to the number of bets in the bonus from the display of the number of winnings and the display of the total number of winnings (Sb105). At this time, two sheets are subtracted at a time. For example, it is subtracted from 345 sheets to 343 sheets without passing through 344 sheets.

[Number display update control process]
Next, the number display update control process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the number display control process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the number display update control process performed by the sub control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the number display update control process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the display update time has elapsed (Sc101). The display update time is the time for updating the available number of sheets display, the acquired number of sheets display, and the total acquired number of sheets display. The display update time is measured by subtracting the time set in the timer. The display update time is the timing to subtract the available number display in the available number display, the timing to add the acquired number display in the acquired number display, and the total acquired number display in the total acquired number display when the subtraction of the value is completed. The timing of adding is specified by measuring the display update time. In this way, by continuously displaying the display for a certain period of time while measuring the display update time and updating the display when the display update time elapses, it is possible to secure the time for displaying the number of sheets indicated by each display. The display can be easily recognized. For example, when the number of sheets that can be acquired becomes 0, it is possible to easily recognize that fact.

When the display update time has elapsed, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the payout number counter has reached 0 (Sc102). When the payout number counter is not 0, the sub control unit 91 subtracts 1 from the payout counter (Sc103).

Then, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the number of sheets that can be acquired has become 0 (Sc104). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the number of sheets that can be acquired is not 0. When the number of acquired sheets is displayed as 0, the sub-control unit 91 adds one displayed number of acquired sheets and adds one display of the total number of acquired sheets at the same timing (Sc105). At the same timing as the addition of the acquired number display, the main control unit 41 adds the payout number display (that is, the acquired number display) on the game auxiliary display 12.

Further, when the number of acquired sheets display is not 0, the sub control unit 91 adds one image of the acquired number of sheets, adds one sheet of the total acquired number display at the same timing, and further, at the same timing. The number of sheets that can be obtained is subtracted by 1 (Sc106). That is, the sub-control unit 91 synchronizes the addition and subtraction of various displays. At the same timing as the addition of the acquired number display, the main control unit 41 adds the payout number display (that is, the acquired number display) on the game auxiliary display 12.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 clears the payout flag when it is determined by Sc102 that the payout number counter is not 0 (Sc107). Then, the sub-control unit 91 executes a result notification that finally displays a result image in which the result of the game can be specified (Sc108).

[Off control process]
Next, the extinguishing control process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the extinguishing control process performed by the sub control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the extinguishing control process, the sub control unit 91 first determines whether or not the bonus is in progress based on the command from the main control unit 41 (Sd101). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the bonus is not in progress. When the bonus is in progress, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the execution of the result notification is started by Sc104 in FIG. 42 (Sd102). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the result notification has not started to be executed. When the result notification is started, the sub control unit 91 executes the extinguishing control of the advantageous middle lamp 60 (Sd103). When the extinguishing control is already being executed, the processing of Sd102 and Sd103 is omitted.

The sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the reel backlight 28 is turned off (Sd104). The sub control unit 91 proceeds to Sd106 when the reel backlight 28 is not turned off. The sub control unit 91 turns off the reel backlight 28 when the reel backlight 28 is turned off (Sd105).

The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the timing of turning off the advantageous middle lamp 60 is set (Sd106). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when it is not the timing to turn off the advantageous middle lamp 60. When the timing for turning off the advantageous middle lamp 60 is reached, the sub control unit 91 turns off the advantageous middle lamp 60 and ends the process (Sd107).

[Prize production execution process]
Next, the winning effect execution process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the winning effect execution process performed by the sub control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 44, in the winning effect execution process, the sub control unit 91 first determines whether or not the bonus is in progress based on the command from the main control unit 41 (Se101). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when the bonus is not in progress. When the bonus is in progress, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not a winning combination of 15 cards is paid out based on a command from the main control unit 41 (Se102). That is, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not 15 payouts have occurred. When the payout of 15 sheets occurs, the sub control unit 91 executes the first winning effect and ends the process (Se103).

When 15 cards have not been paid out, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not a winning combination of 14 cards has been won based on a command from the main control unit 41 (Se104). That is, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not 14 payouts have occurred. The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when 14 sheets have not been paid out. When 14 cards are paid out, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the bonus is being controlled for the first time (Se105). The sub-control unit 91 executes the second winning effect when it is the first winning (Se106). The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not it is the final game of the bonus when it is not the first prize (Se107). The final game of the bonus here is a game in which the bonus ends when 14 cards are paid out. The sub-control unit 91 executes the first winning effect when it is the final game of the bonus (Se108). The sub-control unit 91 ends the process when it is not the final game of the bonus.

In the present embodiment, the second prize-winning effect is executed when the first 14 cards are paid out (Se106), and when 14 cards are paid out in a game that can be the final game of the bonus, the first prize-winning effect is performed. It is executed (Se108), and if it is not a game that can be the final game of the bonus, and the first 14 payouts are not generated, the winning effect is not executed even if 14 payouts occur, but the first time. The first winning effect may be executed when 14 cards are paid out even when the game is not a game that can be the final game of the bonus.

In addition, the number of bonuses won is maximized when 14 cards are paid out once, and the second prize-winning effect is executed when the first 14 cards are paid out. Not limited to one time, when 14 pieces are paid out at a specific time, the number of bonuses won is maximized, and when 14 pieces are paid out at the specific time, the second prize production is executed. It may be configured to do so.

[Example of operation timing]
Before explaining an example of reel control in CB and in BB, "first timing" and "second timing" in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining an example of the operation timing in the left reel 2L.

The "first timing" is the timing at which the cherry symbol is pulled into the winning line LN within the pullable range. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 45, as the first timing, the timing of operating the left stop switch 8L when the 1st orange or the 2nd cherry is located in the middle stage, and the 8th bell or the 9th cherry are A timing for operating the left stop switch 8L when it is located in the middle stage and a timing for operating the left stop switch 8L when the 13th bell or the 14th cherry is located in the middle stage are provided. By operating the left stop switch 8L at such a first timing, even if the maximum stop delay time is 75 ms as in CB, the symbol displayed when the left stop switch 8L is operated is displayed. , The symbols up to one frame ahead, for a total of two frames, can be stopped on the middle line LN, so the cherry symbol will stop on the winning line LN.

The "second timing" is the timing at which the watermelon symbol can be pulled into the winning line LN within the pullable range. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 45, as the second timing, a timing for operating the left stop switch 8L when the bar No. 18 or the watermelon No. 19 is located in the middle stage is provided. By operating the left stop switch 8L at such a second timing, even if the maximum stop delay time is 75 ms as in CB, the symbol displayed when the left stop switch 8L is operated is displayed. , The symbols up to one frame ahead, for a total of two frames, can be stopped on the middle line LN, so the watermelon symbol will stop on the winning line LN.

[Example of reel control when pushed forward during CB]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of reel control when the reel is pushed forward during CB. As shown in FIG. 46 (A), when the start operation is performed during the CB, the reels rotate and the game is started with all the small winning combinations won.

After FIG. 46 (A), as shown in FIG. 46 (B1), when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing (see FIG. 45) as the first stop operation, the middle stage on the winning line LN. The cherry pattern stops at. As described above, since the left reel 2L is set to the CT reel during CB, the player can cherry on the winning line LN only when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing. The symbol can be stopped.

After FIG. 46 (B1), as shown in FIG. 46 (C1), when the middle stop switch 8C is operated as the second stop operation, the bell symbol stops on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. To do.

After FIG. 46 (C1), as shown in FIG. 46 (D1), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the third stop operation, the bell symbol stops on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. To do. In this case, a symbol combination corresponding to the cherry winning is derived on the winning line LN, and 15 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, after FIG. 46 (A), as shown in FIG. 46 (B2), when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing (see FIG. 45) as the first stop operation, it is on the winning line LN. The watermelon pattern stops.

When the middle stop switch 8C is operated as the second stop operation after FIG. 46 (B2), as shown in FIG. 46 (C2), if the operation timing is within the retractable range of the watermelon symbol, the winning line The watermelon symbol stops on the LN. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46 (C3), if the operation timing is outside the drawable range of the watermelon symbol, the replay symbol stops on the winning line LN.

When the right stop switch 8R is operated as the third stop operation after FIG. 46 (C2), as shown in FIG. 46 (D2-1), if the operation timing is within the retractable range of the watermelon symbol, The watermelon symbol stops on the winning line LN. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon winning is derived on the winning line LN, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46 (D2-2), if the operation timing is outside the drawable range of the watermelon symbol, the replay symbol stops on the winning line LN. In this case, no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is derived on the winning line LN, and the medal is not paid out.

After FIG. 46 (C3), as shown in FIG. 46 (D3), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the third stop operation, the replay symbol stops on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. To do. In this case, no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is derived on the winning line LN, and the medal is not paid out.

In this way, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by pressing forward during CB, if the left stop switch 8L can be operated at the first timing as the first stop operation, then the stop is stopped. Regardless of the operation timing of the switches 8C and 8R, the cherry prize can always be generated and 15 medals can be obtained.

On the other hand, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by pressing forward during CB, the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing as the first stop operation, and then the stop switches 8C, 8R are operated. Depending on the operation timing, the watermelon can be won, but depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 8C and 8R, no prize can be generated.

[Example of reel control when pushed back during CB]
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of reel control when the reel is pushed back during CB. As shown in FIG. 47 (A), when the start operation is performed during the CB, the reels rotate and the game is started with all the small winning combinations won.

After FIG. 47 (A), as shown in FIG. 47 (B), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the first stop operation, the replay symbol stops on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. To do.

After FIG. 47 (B), as shown in FIG. 47 (C), when the middle stop switch 8C is operated as the second stop operation, the replay symbol stops on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. To do.

After FIG. 47 (C), as shown in FIG. 47 (D1), as the third stop operation, the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the bell symbol is not pulled onto the middle line LN in the first timing. Then, the cherry symbol stops on the winning line LN. Specifically, when any of the 1st orange, the 2nd cherry, the 9th cherry, and the 14th cherry of the 1st timing is located in the middle stage, the left stop switch 8L is operated. , The cherry pattern stops on the winning line LN. In this case, a symbol combination corresponding to the technical intervention role winning is derived on the winning line LN, and 14 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, after FIG. 47 (C), as shown in FIG. 47 (D2), when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing as the third stop operation, the replay symbol stops on the winning line LN. .. In this case, no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is derived on the winning line LN, and the medal is not paid out.

Further, after FIG. 47 (C), as shown in FIG. 47 (D3), when the left stop switch 8L is operated at a timing within the retractable range of the bell symbol as the third stop operation, it is on the winning line LN. The bell design stops at. Specifically, any of the 4th replay, the 5th bell, the 7th blank, the 8th bell, the 12th replay, the 13th bell, the 16th replay, and the 17th bell is in the middle row. If the left stop switch 8L is operated when it is located at, the bell symbol stops on the winning line LN. In this case, a symbol combination corresponding to the Bell 2 winning is derived on the winning line LN, and 15 medals are paid out.

In this way, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by reverse pressing during CB, if the left stop switch 8L can be operated at the first timing as the third stop operation, the technical intervention role You can generate prizes and win 14 medals.

On the other hand, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by reverse pressing during CB, if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing as the third stop operation, any prize may be generated. Can not.

Further, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by reverse pressing during CB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing within the retractable range of the bell symbol as the third stop operation, the bell 2 You can generate prizes and win 15 medals.

As described above, during the CB, the player wins 14 medals by winning a technical intervention role according to the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, or cherry, watermelon. Alternatively, 15 medals can be obtained by winning a 15-card role such as Bell 2, and the number of medals to be obtained can be adjusted. Moreover, in CB, unlike in BB, the technical intervening player wins each game, so that the player can play each game to adjust the number of medals acquired.

[Example of reel control when pushed forward during BB]
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of reel control when the reel is pushed forward during BB. As shown in FIG. 48 (A), when the start operation is performed during the BB, an internal lottery is performed and the reels are rotated to start the game. In this example, a case where Bell 1 and the technical intervening officer are simultaneously won by an internal lottery is shown.

After FIG. 48 (A), as shown in FIG. 48 (B), when the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing or the second timing as the first stop operation, the bell symbol stops on the winning line LN. To do. As described above, in BB, unlike in CB, a maximum of 4 frames of symbols can be drawn in the left reel 2L.

After FIG. 48 (B), as shown in FIG. 48 (C), when the middle stop switch 8C is operated as the second stop operation, the bell symbol stops on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. To do.

After FIG. 48 (C), as shown in FIG. 48 (D), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the third stop operation, the bell symbol stops on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. To do. In this case, a symbol combination corresponding to the Bell 1 winning is derived on the winning line LN, and 15 medals are paid out.

In this way, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by pressing forward during the BB, as the first stop operation, whether the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing or the second timing. Regardless, you can always generate a Bell 1 prize and win 15 medals.

[Example of reel control when pushed back during BB]
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of reel control when the reel is pushed back during BB. As shown in FIG. 49 (A), when the start operation is performed during the BB, an internal lottery is performed and the reels are rotated to start the game. In this example, a case where Bell 1 and the technical intervening officer are simultaneously won by an internal lottery is shown.

After FIG. 49 (A), as shown in FIG. 49 (B), when the right stop switch 8R is operated as the first stop operation, the replay symbol stops on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. To do.

After FIG. 49 (B), as shown in FIG. 49 (C), when the middle stop switch 8C is operated as the second stop operation, the replay symbol stops on the winning line LN regardless of the operation timing. To do.

After FIG. 49 (C), when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing as the third stop operation, the cherry symbol stops on the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 49 (D1). In this case, a symbol combination corresponding to the technical intervention role winning is derived on the winning line LN, and 14 medals are paid out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49 (D2), when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the watermelon symbol stops on the winning line LN. In this case, no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is derived on the winning line LN, and the medal is not paid out.

In this way, when the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by reverse pressing during BB, if the left stop switch 8L can be operated at the first timing as the first stop operation, the player always wins the technical intervention role prize. It can be generated and you can get 15 medals. On the other hand, when the player operates the left stop switch 8L at the second timing, no prize can be generated.

As described above, during the BB, the player wins 14 medals or wins a bell 1 by winning a technical intervention role according to the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to win a prize and obtain 15 medals, and the number of medals to be obtained can be adjusted during BB. In BB, unlike in CB, the player can play a game for adjusting the number of medals obtained only in the game in which the technical intervention role is won in the internal lottery. The control period of BB is longer than the control period of CB.

[Setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect (first aspect) in CB. In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 executes the setting suggestion effect by using the liquid crystal display 51 during the CB. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the operation is performed at the first timing, which is more likely to generate a prize than the second timing, while the setting suggestion effect is not executed when the operation is performed at the second timing. ..

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 stops left at the timing when the 8th or 9th symbol provided at a position away from the 19th symbol of the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage in the first timing. When the switch 8L is operated and the 9th cherry on the left reel 2L is led out to the middle stage, the setting suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, in the sub-control unit 91, the left stop switch 8L is set at the timing when the 1st and 2nd symbols close to the 19th symbol of the left reel 2L, or the 13th and 14th symbols pass through the middle stage in the 1st timing. When it is operated, the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 50 (A), an image showing outer space is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the CB. After FIG. 50 (A), as the first stop operation, when the left reel 2L is operated at the first timing that is within the pullable range of the 9th cherry symbol, as shown in FIG. 50 (B1), the winning line The 9th cherry symbol stops on the LN.

After FIG. 50 (B1), as shown in FIG. 50 (C1), a whiteout effect is once performed in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 becomes pure white, and no image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (D1), the setting suggestion effect is executed, and an image of a shooting star flowing is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The image as shown in FIG. 50 (D1) corresponds to the image of the first aspect in the setting suggestion effect.

On the other hand, after FIG. 50 (A), when the left reel 2L is operated as the first stop operation at the first timing within the pullable range of the No. 2 or No. 14 cherry symbol, FIG. 50 (B2) shows. As such, the 2nd or 14th cherry symbol stops on the winning line LN.

If the No. 2 or No. 14 cherry symbol stops on the winning line LN, then, as shown in FIGS. 50 (C2) and 50 (D2), the setting suggestion effect is not executed and the space is still displayed. The image shown is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

Further, after FIG. 50 (A), when the left reel 2L is operated as the first stop operation at the second timing within the pullable range of the No. 19 watermelon symbol, as shown in FIG. 50 (B3), The 19th watermelon symbol stops on the winning line LN.

When the watermelon symbol No. 19 stops on the winning line LN, after that, as shown in FIGS. 50 (C3) and 50 (D3), the setting suggestion effect is not executed and the image showing the outer space is still displayed. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

As described above, during the CB, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, while the setting suggestion effect is not executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. Further, in the first timing, the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 8th or 9th symbol provided at a position away from the 19th symbol of the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage, and the left reel 2L When the 9th cherry is derived to the middle stage, the setting suggestion effect is executed, while the 1st and 2nd, or the 13th and 14th, which are close to the 19th symbol of the left reel 2L, are executed in the 1st timing. If the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the numbered symbol passes through the middle stage, the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect mode determination table. A process for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-control unit 91 can execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different modes. Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 executes any one of the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect, and the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect. The sub-control unit 91 determines the mode of the setting suggestion effect to be executed based on the timing at which the left stop switch 8L is operated and the set set value. As for the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect, if each aspect is different, for example, the number of shooting stars and their speeds are different, any aspect is applied. May be good.

FIG. 51 (A) is a first setting suggestion effect mode determination table showing the probability of the mode of the setting suggestion effect executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 9th symbol passes through the middle stage. is there. When the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 9th symbol passes through the middle stage, the number of sliding frames is 0.

As shown in FIG. 51 (A), when the set value is 1 or 2, the sub-control unit 91 has a 60% probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, and a 30% probability of executing the second aspect. The execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect is determined with a probability of 10%. That is, when the set value is 1 or 2, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed is the highest, then the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed is the highest, and the setting of the third aspect is set. The probability that the suggestion effect will be executed is the lowest.

When the set value is 3, 4 or 5, the sub-control unit 91 has a 20% probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, and a 60% probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect. The execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect is decided with a probability of 20%. That is, when the set value is 3, 4 or 5, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed is the highest, and the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed and the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect are executed. Are equal in probability of being executed.

When the set value is 6, the sub-control unit 91 has a 10% probability of executing the first mode setting suggestion effect, a 30% probability of executing the second mode setting suggestion effect, and a 60% probability of executing the second mode setting suggestion effect. Determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect. That is, when the setting value is 6, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect is executed is the highest, then the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed is high, and the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed. Is the least likely to be executed.

FIG. 51 (B) is a second setting suggestion effect mode determination table showing the probability of the mode of the setting suggestion effect executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbol No. 8 passes through the middle stage. is there. When the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 8th symbol passes through the middle stage, the number of sliding frames is 1.

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), when the set value is 1 or 2, the sub-control unit 91 has a 40% probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, and a 30% probability of executing the second aspect. The execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect is determined with a probability of 30%. That is, when the set value is 1 or 2, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed is the highest, and the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed and the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect are executed. The probabilities of being done are equal.

When the set value is 3, 4 or 5, the sub-control unit 91 has a 30% probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, and a 40% probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect. The execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect is decided with a probability of 30%. That is, when the set value is 3, 4 or 5, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed is the highest, and the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed and the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect are executed. Are equal in probability of being executed.

When the set value is 6, the sub-control unit 91 has a 30% probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, a 30% probability of executing the second aspect of the setting suggestion effect, and a 40% probability of executing the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect. Determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect. That is, when the setting value is 6, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect is executed is the highest, and the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed and the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect are executed. The probabilities are equal.

That is, among the first to third aspects, when the set value is 1 or 2, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed is the highest, and when the set value is 3 to 5, the second aspect The mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined so that the probability that the setting suggestion effect is executed is the highest, and when the setting value is 6, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect is executed is the highest. Therefore, the player can predict the set value set based on the mode of the setting suggestion effect. That is, the setting suggestion effect can be said to be an effect that suggests which of the plurality of set values the set setting value is.

Further, as can be seen by comparing FIG. 51 (A) and FIG. 51 (B), the bias of the execution probability is larger when the number of sliding frames is 0 than when the number of sliding frames is 1. Therefore, when the number of sliding frames is 0, the accuracy of suggesting the set value is higher than when the number of sliding frames is 1. For example, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, the possibility that the set value is 1 or 2 is that the number of sliding frames is higher when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the number of sliding frames becomes 0. It is higher than when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when becomes 1.

An example of executing the setting suggestion effect when the left stop switch 8L is first operated has been shown, but in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is irrespective of the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 47, even when the right stop switch 8R, the middle stop switch 8C, and the left stop switch 8L are operated in this order, the left stop switch 8L is displayed at the timing when the 8th or 9th symbol passes through the middle stage. When is operated, the setting suggestion effect may be executed.

Further, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the time of the second stop or the third stop, and the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 8th or 9th symbol passes through the middle stage, the left stop switch 8L is operated. When the same reel control as when the 8L is operated at the first stop is performed, the mode of the setting suggestion effect may be determined according to the table shown in FIG. Specifically, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the time of the second stop or the third stop, the number of sliding frames when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 9th symbol passes through the middle stage is 0. When the number of sliding frames when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 8th symbol passes through the middle stage is 1, the mode of the setting suggestion effect may be determined according to the table shown in FIG.

[Game quality in CB]
When controlled by the CB, the player first plays a game aiming at winning a technical intervention role with 14 medals paid out, and once the technical intervention role wins, the number of medals paid out is 15 medals. There is a tendency to aim for a prize in the role. When the left reel 2L is first stopped, as described with reference to FIG. 46, the symbol combination of the technical intervention combination in which 14 payouts occur is not derived. On the other hand, when the right reel 2R is first stopped, the technical intervention combination can be derived. Therefore, the player tends to perform the first stop operation of the right reel 2R. Even when the middle stop switch 8C, the left stop switch 8L, and the right stop switch 8R are operated in this order during CB, the technical intervention role can be derived when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability that a display result in which no winning is generated is derived (probability of omission) is when the right reel 2R is first stopped than when the left reel 2L is first stopped. Is lower. Here, among the timings for operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the susceptibility to winning is determined by whether the timing (missing spot) from which the display result that does not cause winning is derived is small or large.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the control to the CB is started, the player first stops the right reel 2R first, and after the payout of 14 medals occurs, the left reel 2L is the first. There is a tendency to stop one.

[Example of production]
Next, an example of the effect executed by the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 66.

(Direction at the time of CB rush)
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the effect at the time of entering the CB. As described above, in the present embodiment, the 7 sets are derived to win the CB, and the state is controlled by the CB based on the occurrence of the CB winning. As shown in FIG. 52 (A), in a game in which a CB is elected and a symbol combination (“black 7-black 7-black 7”) corresponding to the CB can be derived, when the start operation is performed, An effect that encourages the derivation of all seven blacks is performed. For example, the image of "Aim at 777!" Is displayed in black characters on the liquid crystal display 51, and the sound of "Aim at 7" is output from the speaker 53.

Although not shown, if the player performs the first stop operation and the second stop operation at a timing when the black 7 symbol can be stopped, the black 7 symbol is stopped on each of the reels 2L and 2C.

As shown in FIG. 52 (B), when the third stop operation is performed at the timing when the player can stop the black 7 symbol, the reel 2R is stopped and the black 7 symbol is derived. At this time, the player's hand keeps pressing the stop switch 8R. That is, after the stop switch is manually pressed, even if the pressing is maintained without being released, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the symbol is led out to the perspective window 3. Further, the speaker 53 outputs a “don” sound that effectively suggests that the reel has stopped. However, while the reels are stopped, the winning determination is not executed unless the third stop release is performed and the pressing of the stop switch 8R is released.

As shown in FIG. 52 (C), when the third stop release is performed and the press on the stop switch 8R is released, the winning determination process is executed by the main control unit 41 to generate a CB winning. Further, the main control unit 41 starts the freeze. The freeze control at this time invalidates the bet number setting by the MAXBET switch 6 for starting the next game over a predetermined delay period.

When a CB prize is generated, the sub control unit 91 performs a CB prize effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 52 (C) and 52 (D), the liquid crystal display 51 displays the image of "BONUS" so as to stop at the center position of the screen while changing from the enlarged state to the reduced state. At the same time, a "papper" sound is output from the speaker 53 to congratulate the CB prize. Further, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned on or blinked, which effectively suggests the CB winning. The winning effect is not limited to the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28, and the lower panel located below the reel may be turned on or blinked. Further, when the lower panel is lit in the normal state, the winning effect may be performed by turning it off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (E), the character and the image of "CHALLENGE BONUS!" Are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a "bonus" sound suggesting that the speaker 53 rushes into the CB. Is output.

In this way, the reel is stopped by performing the third stop operation, the winning judgment process is executed by performing the third stop release, and the CB is won based on the fact that the symbol combination of 7 blacks is derived. At the same time, the state shifts to CB. Further, when a combination of 7 black symbols is derived, freeze control is performed and freeze is started, and a CB winning effect is performed during the freeze.

(Production when CB production is selected)
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the effect when the CB effect is selected. After it is suggested that the CB is rushed in the effect shown in FIG. 52 (E), as shown in FIG. 53 (F), the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 51 gradually or at once becomes white out. Is done. In addition, the speaker 53 outputs a “seen” sound that seems to match the whiteout.

With the whiteout as described above as a boundary, the screen for the CB winning effect as shown in FIG. 53 (E) is greatly changed to the selection screen for the CB effect as shown in FIG. 53 (G). The screen state changes. In addition, the freeze ends after the whiteout. That is, after the whiteout, the bet number setting by operating the MAXBET switch 6 becomes effective.

As shown in FIG. 53 (G), on the CB effect selection screen, an image for allowing the player to select the effect in the CB is displayed. Specifically, an image for allowing the player to select one of the music A, music B, and music C as BGM corresponding to each of the three characters is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The player can change the character image displayed in the front row by operating the effect switch 56, and each time the change is made, the music corresponding to the character displayed in the front row is output from the speaker 53. To. As a result, the player can select his / her favorite music while listening to the sound output from the speaker 53.

In the selection of the CB effect, it may be possible to select a stage in which the items related to the effect in the CB, such as the characters appearing, the background image, the music and the sound effect, and the lighting mode, are different from each other. In addition, in the selection of the CB production, it is possible to select a stage in which the matters related to the notification production in the CB, such as the mode of the winning notification at the time of winning the rare role such as cherry and watermelon and the probability that the winning notification is executed, are different. You may.

As shown in FIG. 53 (H), when the player operates the MAXBET switch 6, the music corresponding to the character displayed in the front row at that time is determined as the music in the CB, and the music is determined from the speaker 53. A "picone" sound is output that suggests that. Here, the speaker 53 and the speaker 54 are each divided into channels for sound output, and in the example shown in FIG. 53 (H), the determined music is output from the speaker 53, while the speaker A sound effect of "picone" is output from 54. Since the freeze has already ended at this time, the number of bets is also set at the same time by operating the MAXBET switch 6 at the time of determining the music. The music is not limited to the operation of the MAXBET switch 6, and the music may be determined by other operations such as the start switch 7 and the effect switch 56.

After the music in the CB is determined in the effect shown in FIG. 53 (H), as shown in FIG. 53 (I), the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 51 gradually or at once becomes completely white to produce a whiteout effect. Is done. In addition, the speaker 53 outputs a “seen” sound that seems to match the whiteout.

With the whiteout as described above as a boundary, the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is greatly expanded from the CB effect selection screen as shown in FIG. 53 (H) to the effect screen in CB as shown in FIG. 53 (J). The state changes. During CB, the screen in CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the music selected by the player is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 53 (K), when the start operation is performed, the game in the CB starts and the reels start rotating.

In this way, if the freeze starts at the time of CB winning and the CB winning effect is performed during the freeze, the freeze ends with the whiteout as the boundary, and then the effect of letting the player select the effect state in the CB is performed. Will be executed. Control to the CB is suggested to the player by the effect of letting the player select the effect state in the CB. Then, when the CB effect is determined, the game in the CB is executed based on the determined effect state.

(Specific examples of various displays in CB)
Next, specific examples of various displays in the CB will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60. 54 to 60 are explanatory views of the effect in the CB and the flow of various displays.

As shown in FIG. 54 (L), when the CB wins a prize, the screen in the CB is displayed from the liquid crystal display 51. The display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is divided into a first area 51c and a second area 51d. The brightness of the first region 51c is darker than that of the second region 51d. The effect image is displayed over the first region 51c and the second region 51d. Then, the number of medals that can be acquired is displayed 61 (display of "LAST ○○○" in the figure, ○○○ is the number of medals that can be acquired), and the total number of medals that can be acquired 62 (display of "TOTAL ○○○" in the figure, ○○ ◯ is the total number of medals acquired) and the number of medals displayed 63 (“GET XX” in the figure, XX is the number of medals acquired) is displayed in the dark first area 51c. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the acquired number display 61, the total acquired number display 62, and the acquired number display 63. Further, the total acquired number display 62 has a larger character size than the acquired number display 61 and the acquired number display 63, and is displayed in an area larger than the acquired number display 61 and the acquired number display 63. .. The total number of acquired sheets display 62 may not be displayed at the same time as the available number of sheets display 61 and the acquired number of sheets display 63, but may be displayed at different timings. Even in this case, the total acquired number display 62 may be displayed in a larger area than the acquired number display 61 and the acquired number display 63.

An effect image is displayed on the screen during CB. In the present embodiment, a moving image background is displayed as an effect image. For example, during CB, a moving image showing how the character operates together with the background image at night is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. A part of the operation background (in this example, the moon image and the star image) is displayed in the first area 51c, and the remaining part is displayed in the second area 52d. A part of the operating character may be displayed in the first area 51c, and the remaining part may be displayed in the second area 52d. As described above, the brightness of the first region 51c is darker than that of the second region 51d. Then, the acquired number display 61, the total acquired number display 62, and the acquired number display 63 are displayed in the first area 51c. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the acquired number display 61, the total acquired number display 62, and the acquired number display 63. Further, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by not limiting the display of the moving image background to the second area 51d.

In this example, a CB or BB wins a prize within 100 games after the CB ends, and a BB wins a prize within 100 games after the CB or BB ends. That is, an example is shown in the case where the bonus is three consecutive chans. Therefore, the total number of acquired medals display 62 is 624, which is the number of medals acquired by the past two bonuses. Further, the number of acquired sheets display 61 is 150, and the number of acquired sheets 63 is 0. Further, by being controlled by the CB, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is turned on in the CB middle mode.

As shown in FIG. 54 (L), it is assumed that the bell 1 wins a prize and 15 medals are paid out by performing the third stop operation in the game. At this time, since a prize has been generated, the prize production is executed. The winning effect is executed by turning on or blinking the reel backlight 28.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 54 (M), the number of available sheets display 61 is subtracted by one to obtain 149 sheets. Further, at the same timing, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is added by one to reach 625 sheets. Further, at the same timing, one acquired number display 63 is added to become one. Further, the number of medals to be paid out displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to become one.

In this way, the timing at which the number of medals that can be acquired 61 is subtracted for each medal is the same as the timing at which the total number of medals displayed 62 and the number of acquired medals 63 are added for each medal. It is possible to make it easy to understand that one medal has been subtracted by acquiring.

Further, since the timing at which the game auxiliary display 12 is added for each sheet and the timing at which the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display 63 are added for each sheet are the same, the game auxiliary display 12 has the same timing. Since the display and the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display 63 do not contradict each other, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Further, since the timing at which the total acquired number display 62 is added for each sheet and the timing at which the acquired number display 63 is added for each sheet are the same, both the acquired number and the total acquired number increase. It is possible to make it easy to understand.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (N), the number of available sheets display 61 is subtracted by one to obtain 148 sheets. Further, at the same timing, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is added by one to 626 sheets. Further, at the same timing, one acquired number display 63 is added to obtain two. In addition, the number of medals to be paid out displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to two.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (O), the number of available sheets display 61 is subtracted by one to obtain 147 sheets. Further, at the same timing, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is added by one to 627 sheets. Further, at the same timing, one acquired number display 63 is added to obtain three. In addition, the number of medals to be paid out displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to three.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 56 (P), the number of available sheets display 61 is subtracted by one to obtain 146 sheets. Further, at the same timing, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is added by one to 628 sheets. Further, at the same timing, one acquired number display 63 is added to obtain four. In addition, the number of medals to be paid out displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to four.

As shown in FIG. 56 (Q), when the same processing is performed and the subtraction and addition of 15 sheets in each display is completed, the number of available sheets display 61 becomes 135 sheets. In addition, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 becomes 637 sheets. In addition, the number of acquired sheets display 63 becomes 13. In addition, the number of medals to be paid out displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 is 15.

As shown in FIG. 57 (R), when the start switch 7 is operated after the bet number is set and the game is started, the two medals used for setting the bet number are collectively subtracted from the total number of winnings display 62. It becomes 635 sheets. In addition, two bets are collectively subtracted from the acquired number display 63 to obtain 11 bets. Further, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R start to rotate. Further, the number of medals to be paid out displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to 0.

In this way, when the number of bets is set and the game is started, the number of medals required for setting the number of bets is collectively subtracted from the total number of medals displayed 62 and the number of medals displayed 63. It is possible for the player to easily understand that the required number of medals have been subtracted.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), it is assumed that the bell 1 wins and 15 medals are paid out by performing the third stop operation in the game in which the number of medals that can be obtained is displayed as one. At this time, the player's hand keeps pressing the stop switch 8R. That is, after the stop switch is manually pressed, even if the pressing is maintained without being released, the rotation of the reel is stopped and the symbol is led out to the perspective window 3. However, although the reels stop, the winning determination is not executed unless the third stop release is performed and the pressing of the stop switch 8R is released.

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the third stop release is performed and the press on the stop switch 8R is released, the winning determination process is executed by the main control unit 41, so that a bell winning is generated. When a bell prize is generated, the sub control unit 91 performs a bell prize production. For example, the image of "15 GET !!" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, the speaker 54 outputs a winning sound of "pyrrolilorin" that suggests a bell winning. Further, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned on or blinked, which effectively suggests a bell winning. The winning effect is continuously executed until the reel backlight 28 is turned off. The winning effect is not limited to the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28, and the lower panel located below the reel may be turned on or blinked. Further, when the lower panel is lit in the normal state, the winning effect may be performed by turning it off.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), the number of obtainable number display 61 is subtracted by 1 to become 0. At this point, the subtraction of the number of available sheets display 61 is completed. Further, at the same timing, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is added by one to 765 sheets. Further, at the same timing, one acquired number display 63 is added to obtain 130 sheets. Further, the number of medals to be paid out displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to become one.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is added by one to 766 sheets. Further, at the same timing, one acquired number display 63 is added to obtain 131 sheets. In addition, the number of medals to be paid out displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 at the same timing is added by one to two.

As shown in FIG. 60 (e), when the same processing is performed and the addition of 15 sheets in the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display 63 is completed, the total acquired number display 62 becomes 779. In addition, the acquired number display 63 becomes 144 sheets. In addition, the number of medals to be paid out displayed by the game auxiliary display 12 is 15.

As shown in FIG. 60 (f), when the addition of 15 sheets in the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display 63 is completed, the winning effect and the number notification are completed. After the winning effect is performed, the image of "15 GET !!" on the liquid crystal display 51 disappears, no sound is output from the speaker 53, and the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned off. Then, the execution of the result notification is started.

In this way, in the final game of the bonus, the reel is stopped by performing the third stop operation, the winning judgment process is executed by performing the third stop release, and the symbol combination of the bells is derived. Based on this, Bell 1 is won and the winning production is performed. In addition, the winning effect is performed by displaying an image of "15 GET !!" by the liquid crystal display 51, sound output by the speaker 53, and lighting or blinking by the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28, while the winning effect is performed. After that, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the image of "15 GET !!", the speaker 53 outputs the sound, and the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 do not turn on or blink. Even if the winning effect is performed by the lower panel, the lower panel does not light or blink. In addition, when the lower panel is lit at the normal time, the lower panel may be lit and returned to the normal state after the winning effect is performed by turning off the light.

Although details will be described later, the door image 51b in the door closing effect (FIGS. 61 (i) to 61 (k)) is a related image different from the result images 51j and 51k in the result notification that are finally displayed as an image showing the result of the game. ) Is displayed. Then, once the door image 51b is displayed as a still image after the door closing effect is completed (see FIG. 61 (k)), the spark image 51a in the spark display is displayed as a special image so as to overlap the door image 51b (see FIG. 61 (k)). (See FIG. 62 (l)) is displayed. After the spark image 51a is displayed, the result notification is performed, and the result images 51j and 51k are displayed. When the result notification is started, the extinguishing control of the advantageous middle lamp 60 is started, and the lighting mode of the advantageous middle lamp 60 changes from the bonus medium mode (see FIG. 60 (f)) to the result notification mode (see FIG. 61 (g)). Change. In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 outputs the stop operation SE, which is a sound related to the display of the related image, before the result notification is performed. Therefore, since the sound related to the display of the related image is output before the result notification is performed, it is possible to prevent the result notification from being hindered by the output of this sound.

(Direction when the result is notified during freezing)
61 and 62 are diagrams for explaining the effect at the time of notification of the result during freezing. Bell 1 winning is suggested in the productions shown in FIGS. 58 (b) to 60 (e), and after the suggestion of bell 1 winning is completed as shown in FIG. 60 (f), as shown in FIG. 61 (g). , The freeze is started by the main control unit 41. The freeze control at this time invalidates the bet number setting by the MAXBET switch 6 for starting the next game over a predetermined delay period. It should be noted that the freeze may start when the third stop release is performed.

During the freeze, a result notification is performed to notify the result of the game during the CB. When the result notification is started, the result start notification suggesting the start of the result notification is performed. In the result start notification, the speaker 53 outputs a "pilone" sound suggesting the start of the result notification, and the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned on or blinked to start the result notification. It is suggested. Further, when the result notification is started, the extinguishing control of the advantageous middle lamp 60 is started, and the lighting mode of the advantageous middle lamp 60 is switched to the lighting mode for the result notification.

As shown in FIG. 61 (h), no sound is output from the speaker 53 and the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned off after the result start notification is performed.

After the result start notification is completed as shown in FIG. 61 (h), the door closing effect of displaying the door image 51b as a related image performed before the result notification is executed as shown in FIG. 61 (i). .. In the door closing effect, an animation movie is displayed in which a pair of door images 51b moves toward the center of the screen from both ends (left end and right end) of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 to close the door. At this time, the effect image during the bonus is displayed on the back side of the door image 51b, but when the door is closed, the effect image during the bonus disappears from the player's field of view. Further, the brightness and the like (brightness or brightness) of the door image 51b is lower than the brightness and the like of other images different from the door image 51b. For example, the brightness of the door image 51b is lower than the brightness of the result images 51j and 51k described later. By making the brightness of the door image 51b lower than the brightness of the result images 51j and 51k, the result images 51j and 51k displayed on the front surface of the door image 51b can be made conspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 61 (i), when the door closing effect is started, an animation movie in which the door image 51b starts to move from both ends on the front side of the effect image during the bonus is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the speaker 53 displays the animation movie. A "go ..." sound is output as if the door were closing.

As shown in FIG. 61 (j), in the middle of the door closing effect, an animation movie in which the door image 51b approaches the center of the screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the door is closed from the speaker 53. A "gogogo" sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 61 (k), at the end of the door closing effect, the door image 51b is completely closed at the center of the screen, and the effect image in the bonus displayed on the back side completely disappears from the field of view. An animation such as this is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the speaker 53 outputs a “gashan” sound as if the door was closed. As a result, a still image with the door closed is displayed for a predetermined period.

After the door closing effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 62 (l), the spark image 51a in the spark display is displayed as a special image. Specifically, after the door is completely closed by the movement of the door image 51b, a spark image 51a showing sparks is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 on the front side of the door image 51b in the central portion of the screen. The brightness and the like (brightness or brightness) of the spark image 51a is higher than the brightness and the like of other images different from the spark image 51a. For example, the brightness of the spark image 51a and the like are higher than the brightness of the effect image and the brightness of the door image 51b during the bonus. By making the brightness of the spark image 51a higher than the brightness of the door image 51b, the spark image 51a displayed on the front side of the door image 51b can be made conspicuous. Further, when the spark image 51a is displayed, a "bonk" sound like a spark is output from the speaker 53. Further, the side lamp 27 lights or blinks in a result notification mode (for example, a color or a lighting interval). The special image is not limited to the spark image 51a, and may be in other forms such as a flash or a character.

After the spark display is completed, the result notification is started as shown in FIG. 62 (m). In the result notification, the area where the spark image 51a is displayed is used, and the result images 51j and 51k showing the result of the game during the bonus are displayed in the area. In the present embodiment, the number of acquired medals (total number of medals paid out) during the bonus is displayed in the result image 51j. Further, in the result image 51k, the total number of acquired sheets during the bonus is displayed. Further, when the result images 51j and 51k are displayed, a “pyeong” sound is output from the speaker 53 so that the result images 51j and 51k appear. The side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a result notification mode (for example, color or lighting interval). The spark image 51a, which is a special image, has a higher brightness than the result images 51j and 51k (that is, the spark image 51a is brighter than the result images 51j and 51k).

In this way, after the spark image 51a, which is a special image different from the result images 51j and 51k, is displayed in the predetermined area, the result images 51j and 51k are displayed in the predetermined area. Therefore, the result images 51j and 51k showing the result of the game are displayed. Since the display of the image can be made conspicuous, the result images 51j and 51k can be attracted attention. Therefore, the result images 51j and 51k can be effectively displayed. In this example, the spark image 51a has a higher brightness than the result images 51j and 51k. Therefore, attention can be focused on the spark image 51a, and the result images 51j and 51k are also displayed in the area where the spark image 51a is displayed. As a result, attention is focused on the result images 51j and 51k. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 62 (n), first, the first digit (in this example, the number "4" in the result image 51j and the number "9" in the result image 51k) is displayed in the result images 51j and 51k. To. A "pin" sound is output from the speaker 53 along with the display of the first digit. The side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a result notification mode (for example, color or lighting interval).

As shown in FIG. 62 (o), the second digit (in this example, the number “4” in the result image 51j and the number “7” in the result image 51k) is displayed in the result images 51j and 51k. Will be done. A "pin" sound is output from the speaker 53 along with the display of the second digit. The side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a result notification mode (for example, color or lighting interval).

As shown in FIG. 62 (p), the third digit (in this example, the number "1" in the result image 51j and the number "7" in the result image 51k) is displayed in the result images 51j and 51k. Will be done. A "pin" sound is output from the speaker 53 along with the display of the third digit. The side lamp 27 keeps lighting or blinking in a result notification mode (for example, color or lighting interval).

By displaying the third digit in the result images 51j and 51k, the player is notified that the final result is that the number of acquired images is 144 and that the total number of acquired images is 799.

After the final result is displayed in the result images 51j and 51k, as shown in FIG. 62 (q), a caution display for alerting the player regarding the game is performed. When the alert image is displayed, the alert image 51e is displayed above the result images 51j and 51k. On the alert image 51e, the characters "Be careful not to get stuck" and "Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately" are displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). By performing such a warning display, it is possible to suppress excessive games for the player. Further, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is turned off while the result images 51j and 51k are displayed. The advantageous middle lamp 60 is turned off before the operation of the start switch 7 of the next game is activated.

In this way, the freeze starts after the notification of the bell winning is performed in the final game of the bonus, and the result notification is performed during the freeze. Further, after the result notification is performed, a warning display is performed.

As described above, when the CB ends when 150 or more medals are paid out, the addition of the total number of acquired number display 62 and the number of acquired number display 63 is completed after the subtraction of the available number display 61 is completed. Since the result notification is executed after that, it becomes possible to add the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display 63 after the subtraction of the acquired number display 61 is completed, and the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display are displayed. Since the addition of 63 can be made easy to understand, and the total number of acquired sheets display 62 and the number of acquired sheets display 63 can be focused on, it is possible to pay attention to the mode of display until the result notification is executed. ..

Further, when the result notification is being executed, the control to turn off the advantageous middle lamp 60 is started, and the advantageous middle lamp 60 is turned off by the time the start operation of the next game of the final game of the CB is activated. The ramp 60 can indicate the end of the CB.

Further, the door image 51b is displayed as a related image different from the result images 51j and 51k, and the result images 51j and 51k are displayed when a predetermined period has passed since the door image 51b was displayed. Therefore, the result image showing the result of the game is displayed. Since the display of 51j and 51k can be made conspicuous, the resulting images 51j and 51k can be attracted attention. Therefore, the result images 51j and 51k can be effectively displayed.

Further, since the effect of turning on the advantageous middle lamp 60 in the result display mode is executed as the effect related to the display of the door image 51b by the time when the predetermined period elapses after the door image 51b is displayed, the result images 51j and 51k are executed. Since the effect related to the display of the door image 51b is executed before the display of the door image 51b is performed, it is possible to prevent the display of the result images 51j and 51k from being hindered by the execution of this effect.

Further, since the door closing effect of displaying the door image 51b as a related image as a moving image is executed and then the door image 51b is displayed as a still background image as a related image, the door image 51b is displayed as a still background image as a related image. Since the result images 51j and 51k are displayed while the result images are displayed, the result images 51j and 51k can be attracted attention.

In the present embodiment, the mode of displaying the screen in the CB is changed after the subtraction of the acquireable number display 61 is completed, but the result images 51j and 51k are displayed after the subtraction of the acquireable number display 61 is completed. It is also possible to configure the display of the number of available sheets display 61 to be maintained without changing the display until it is displayed. In this case, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the number of medals acquired by the player during the CB has reached the number that can be acquired.

Further, as the result images 51j and 51k, it is possible to display a plurality of result images step by step. For example, it is possible to display a result image 51k showing the total number of acquired images and a result image 51j indicating the total number of acquired images. In this case, the attention of the player can be attracted to each of the plurality of result images.

In addition, it is possible to display the related image at a brightness lower than the brightness of the image different from the related image. For example, it is possible to display a still background image with a lower brightness than a moving image in a door closing effect. In this case, since the brightness of the related image becomes low, the result images 51j and 51k can be made conspicuous. Therefore, attention can be focused on the result images 51j and 51k.

Further, in the above-described example, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), the winning effect was completed and the reel backlight 28 was turned off when the number notification was completed, but the reel was turned off even during the result notification. The backlight 28 may be lit. Further, when the result notification is executed, the mode of the winning effect may be changed. At this time, the winning effect is executed so that the blinking of the reel backlight 28 becomes brighter. The winning effect is continuously executed until the reel backlight 28 is turned off.

Further, the reel backlight 28 is turned off after the result notification is executed (for example, the reel backlight 28 is turned off while the result images 51j and 51k are displayed), and the advantageous middle lamp 60 is turned off after the reel backlight 28 is turned off. In this case, it can be gradually suggested that the BB ends by turning off the reel backlight 28 and the advantageous middle lamp 60 in this order.

Further, the extinguishing control of the advantageous middle lamp 60 is a control for turning on the advantageous middle lamp 60 in a result notification mode different from the lighting mode in the BB and then turning off the advantageous middle lamp 60, so that the lighting mode is different. It can be suggested that the lamp 60 is turned off during the advantage. That is, it can be gradually suggested that BB ends.

(Production when RT production is selected)
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining an effect when the RT effect is selected. Here, RT (replay time) is a state in which the winning probability of the replaying combination in the internal lottery is higher than in the non-RT (for example, normal state), and in the RT state, the replay is performed more frequently than in the non-RT state. Since the game is executed, the player can easily proceed with the game without consuming the medals he owns. In the present embodiment, after the bonus ends, the state is controlled to the RT state for a predetermined period (for example, 30 games), and the player can select the effect in the RT state. it can.

After the warning display is performed in the effect shown in FIG. 62 (q), as shown in FIG. 63 (r), the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 51 gradually or at once becomes pure white to produce a whiteout effect. Will be done. In addition, the speaker 53 outputs a “seen” sound that seems to match the whiteout.

With the whiteout as described above as a boundary, the screen for result notification and alert display as shown in FIG. 62 (q) is greatly changed to the selection screen for RT effect as shown in FIG. 63 (s). The screen state of the display 51 changes. In addition, the freeze ends after the whiteout. That is, after the whiteout, the bet number setting by operating the MAXBET switch 6 becomes effective. Further, the display of the number "15" on the game auxiliary display 12 indicating that 15 medals have been paid out in the final game of the bonus disappears.

As shown in FIG. 63 (s), on the RT effect selection screen, an image for allowing the player to select the effect during RT is displayed. Specifically, an image for allowing the player to select one stage from the stages A, B, and C as the stage corresponding to each of the three characters is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The player can change the character image displayed in the front row by operating the effect switch 56, and each time the change is made, the music on the stage corresponding to the character displayed in the front row is played from the speaker 53. It is output. As a result, the player can select his / her favorite stage while listening to the sound output from the speaker 53.

The plurality of stages provided during RT differ in matters related to RT. For example, a plurality of stages differ in matters related to production during RT, such as characters appearing, background images, music and sound effects, and lighting modes. In addition, for example, in multiple stages, the mode of winning notification and the probability that the winning notification will be executed when a rare role such as cherry or watermelon is won, and the mode of winning notification and the probability that the winning notification will be executed when the bonus is won, etc. , Matters related to notification production during RT are different. For example, in a plurality of stages, when an advantageous section is added by an internal lottery, the medal during RT, such as an up-down mode in which the addition probability is likely to change and a stable mode in which the addition probability is hard to change, is used. Matters concerning payout may be different.

As shown in FIG. 63 (t), when the player operates the MAXBET switch 6, the stage corresponding to the character displayed in the front row at that time is determined as the stage during RT, and the stage is determined from the speaker 53. A "picone" sound is output that suggests that. Here, the speaker 53 and the speaker 54 have separate channels for sound output, and in the example shown in FIG. 63 (t), the speaker 53 outputs music corresponding to the determined stage. On the other hand, the speaker 54 outputs a sound effect of "picone". Since the freeze has already ended at this time, the number of bets is also set at the same time by operating the MAXBET switch 6 at the time of stage determination. The stage is not limited to the operation of the MAXBET switch 6, and the stage may be determined by other operations such as the start switch 7 and the effect switch 56.

After the stage during RT is determined in the effect shown in FIG. 63 (t), as shown in FIG. 63 (u), the entire screen of the liquid crystal display 51 gradually or at once becomes pure white to produce a whiteout effect. Is done. In addition, the speaker 53 outputs a “seen” sound that seems to match the whiteout.

With the whiteout as described above as a boundary, the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is greatly expanded from the RT effect selection screen as shown in FIG. 63 (t) to the effect screen during RT as shown in FIG. 63 (v). The state changes. During RT, the screen during RT corresponding to the stage selected by the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed, and the music corresponding to the stage selected by the player is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 63 (w), when the start operation is performed, the game during RT starts and the reels start rotating.

In this way, if the freeze starts after the bell winning notification is given in the final game of CB and the result notification is made during the freeze, the freeze ends at the whiteout, and then in the RT. An effect that allows the player to select the effect state is executed. It is suggested that the state is controlled by RT after the end of CB by the effect of letting the player select such an RT effect. Then, when the RT effect is determined, the game during RT is executed based on the determined effect state.

(Prize production)
The winning effect executed during the bonus (CB, BB) will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. 64 to 66 are views showing an example of a winning effect. The winning effect is executed by blinking the reel backlight 28. The winning production includes a first winning production and a second winning production. The blinking mode of the reel backlight 28 is different between the first winning effect and the second winning effect. Specifically, the second prize-winning effect blinks violently (flashes) at a faster blinking speed than the first prize-winning effect.

As shown in FIG. 64 (a), when Bell 1 wins a prize (payout of 15 cards) during the bonus (CB, BB), the first prize-winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), when the technical intervening combination wins (pays out 14 sheets) during the bonus, the second winning effect is executed when the technical intervening combination wins the first time in the controlled bonus. To do. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of winnings is obtained when the number of winnings of the technical intervention role is one, and the second winning effect is executed when the first winning of the technical intervention role is performed. If the maximum number of winnings is reached when the number of winnings of the technical intervention role is multiple times, the second winning effect is executed each time until the number of winnings of the technical intervention role reaches the multiple times. It is possible to do.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the technical intervening player has won a prize (payout of 14 cards) once in the past game during the bonus, and the game can be the final game of the bonus due to the occurrence of the prize. When the technical intervening player wins a prize (14 cards are paid out), the first prize-winning effect is executed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65B, the result notification is executed after the first winning effect is executed, and the result images 51j and 51k are displayed. Although not shown, the same processing as in FIGS. 60 (f) to 62 (p) is performed between the time when the technical intervention player wins the prize and the time when the result images 51j and 51k are displayed. Further, also in this example, the subtraction of the acquired number display 61 is completed first, and the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display 63 are added while the acquired number display 61 is maintained at 0, and the addition is completed. After that, the result notification is executed.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a), when only Bell 1 wins (pays out 15 cards) during the bonus and the number of cards that can be obtained reaches 15, Bell 1 wins (pays out 15 cards). 1 Perform a winning effect. At this time, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the result notification is executed after the first winning effect is executed, and the result images 51j and 51k are displayed. Although not shown, the same processing as in FIGS. 60 (f) to 62 (p) is performed between the time when the bell 1 is won and the time when the result images 51j and 51k are displayed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, for example, the CB ends with the payout of 150 or more sheets. Since a maximum of 15 cards can be paid out in one game, multiple games are played in CB. Since the bell 1 pays out 15 sheets, if only the bell 1 wins in the CB, the number of payouts becomes 150 when the bell 1 wins 10 times, and the CB ends. In this case, the number of medals won in the CB is the minimum. On the other hand, since the technical intervening role pays out 14 medals, the number of medals to be paid out is 163 by winning the bell 1 with the bell 1 winning 9 times and the technical intervening role winning once (149 payouts at this point). The number of medals (149 + 15) becomes the maximum number of medals won in CB. In addition, if the technical intervention role is won twice or more, the number of payouts exceeds 150, but the maximum number of 163 is not reached.

After setting the number of sheets that can be acquired and the number of sheets to be paid out in this way, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), when a prize of Bell 1 occurs during CB, the first prize production is executed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), when the first winning of the technical intervention role occurs during the CB, the second winning effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 65, a game in which the technical intervening player has won a prize (payout of 14 cards) once in the past game in the CB, and can be the final game of the CB due to the occurrence of the prize (the present embodiment). Then, when the technical intervening player wins a prize in (a game in which the number of payouts is 149 and the number of cards that can be obtained is one), the first prize production is executed. That is, when the technical intervening player wins a prize and the CB ends with 162 cards without reaching the maximum number of 163 cards, the first prize-winning effect is executed. By executing the winning effect in this way, it is possible to prevent the mistake of the player who could not intervene in the technique to obtain the maximum number of medals in the final game of the CB to be conspicuous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 66, when Bell 1 wins a prize in a game in which the technical intervening role has never won in a game that can be the final game of CB (that is, it ends with the minimum number of 150 cards obtained). When), the first prize-winning effect is executed, and then the result notification is executed. Therefore, a player's mistake that could not intervene in the final game of CB by executing the common first prize production in the final game of CB even when the technical intervention to obtain the maximum number of medals was not performed. Can be prevented from being noticeable.

[Processing timing chart]
A timing chart of the processing of the main control unit 41 and the processing of the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a timing chart of processing by the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91.

At the timing t1, when the third stop operation is performed in the final game during the bonus (for example, CB) and the stop switch is pressed, the main control unit 41 stops the reel based on the detected third stop operation. ..

At the timing t2, when the third stop release is performed and the press on the stop switch is released, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a prize has been generated by performing a prize determination process. When a prize is generated, the main control unit 41 pays out the number of medals corresponding to the prize and transmits a prize determination command capable of specifying the type of the generated prize to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning determination command at the timing t3, the sub-control unit 91 performs a winning effect.

Further, the sub control unit 91 has a timer for measuring the time. At the timing t3, the sub-control unit 91 starts the measurement of the predetermined period T. Here, the predetermined period T means a period from the start timing (timing t3) of the predetermined period T until the result images 51j and 51k are displayed by the result notification. In the present embodiment, the predetermined period T is also a period during which a related image (moving image and still image of the door image 51b in the door closing effect) and a special image (spark image 51a in the spark display) are displayed (FIG. 61 (i). )-See FIGS. 61 (k) and 62 (l)). At the timing t3, the sub control unit 91 outputs a stop operation SE, which is a sound related to the display of the related image. Therefore, since the sound related to the display of the related image is output before the result images 51j and 51k are displayed, it is possible to prevent the display of the result images 51j and 51k from being hindered by the output of this sound. ..

In this way, the sub-control unit 91 measures the passage of the predetermined period T by the timer after receiving the winning determination command, and displays the result images 51j and 51k when the passage of the predetermined period T is measured by the timer. Therefore, since the sub-control unit 91 measures the passage of a predetermined period, it is possible to easily manage the display timing of the result images 51j and 51k.

Further, the main control unit 41 performs freeze control by executing the game end processing after the winning determination processing, and also transmits a freeze command to the effect of performing freeze control to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker 53, and the like according to the execution time of the freeze control executed on the main control unit 41 side based on the freeze command, and executes the effect for freeze.

For example, the sub-control unit 91 executes the door closing effect shown in FIGS. 61 (i) to 61 (k) from the timing t4 to the timing t5. Next, the sub-control unit 91 performs the spark display shown in FIG. 62 (l) from the timing t5 to the timing t6. Next, the sub-control unit 91 performs the result notification shown in FIGS. 62 (m) to 62 (p) from the timing t6 to the timing t7. Then, the sub-control unit 91 performs the caution display shown in FIG. 62 (q) from the timing t7 to the timing t8 after the result notification is performed. After that, the sub-control unit 91 displays the RT effect selection screen shown in FIGS. 63 (s) and 63 (t) on the liquid crystal display 51 from the timing t8 to the timing t9. The door closing effect, the spark display effect, and the result notification are executed by the sub control unit 91 over a predetermined time.

[Various patterns related to production and processing depending on the presence or absence of power failure]
With reference to FIGS. 68 to 94, various patterns related to the effect and processing depending on the presence or absence of power interruption will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining various patterns related to the effect and processing depending on the presence or absence of power interruption. As shown in FIG. 68, patterns 1 to 12 are illustrated in this embodiment. In the examples described below, power failure 1 and power failure 2 having different generation timings will be illustrated. In the power failure 1, after the third stop operation is performed, the symbol in which the third stop operation is maintained and is still scheduled by the reel stop control based on the third stop operation is the winning line LN. It means a power interruption such that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped before it is stopped upward. In the power failure 2, after the third stop operation is performed, the symbol in which the third stop operation is maintained and has already been scheduled by the reel stop control based on the third stop operation is the winning line LN. It means a power interruption such that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped after stopping upward.

(Pattern 1)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 69, in pattern 1, it is assumed that the AT is won in the game in which the special replay is won in the advantageous section normal, and the state shifts from the next game to the AT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 69, in the game in which the special replay is won in the advantageous section normal, when the power failure does not occur, the derived result, the presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), and the presence or absence of the winning effect , And the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

As shown in FIG. 69 (a1), in the advantageous section normal, the normal BGM corresponding to the advantageous section normal is output from the speaker 53. Advantageous section When a special replay is normally won, an AT winning suggestion effect suggesting that the AT has been won is executed. Specifically, on the liquid crystal display 51, an arrow image is displayed together with the character image from right to left so as to encourage the reverse pressing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and further, the white 7 symbol is aimed at. The text image of "Aim for 7!" Is displayed. In this example, the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C are operated at the timing when the player pushes the white 7 symbol back on the winning line LN, respectively, so that the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C are operated. White 7 symbols are stopped in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 69 (b1), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the 11th blank symbol is located on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (c1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, it is determined in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. For example, if the ON state of the third stop operation is detected by the timer interrupt processing for four times (equivalent to about 2.24 ms), the stop control of the left reel 2L is performed after at least 0.56 ms. Will be. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the 15th white 7 symbol 4 frames ahead of the 11th blank symbol on the left reel 2L is stopped on the winning line LN. ..

As shown in FIG. 69 (d1), when the left reel 2L slides by 4 frames from the 11th blank symbol located on the winning line LN when the third stop operation is performed by the reel stop control, the left reel 2L is left. The 15th white 7 symbol stops on the winning line LN of the reel 2L. As a result, on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three white 7 symbols are derived as a symbol combination corresponding to the 7-aligned replay.

As shown in FIG. 69 (e1), when the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop (YES in Sc9), and all stop switches 8L, 8C, Since it is determined that the pressing on 8R has been released (NO in Sc12), the reel stop control process ends, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (7 sets) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. , 7 sets of replays will be won. Then, by performing the setting process (Sb69) at the end of the game in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the number of bets for performing the regame in the next game is set as the payout of the regame based on the winning of the 7-match replay. The process of setting is performed.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned on in a manner corresponding to the winning effect by executing the winning effect based on the winning of the 7-match replay, and the speaker. The winning sound is output from 53. Further, a character image of "AT acquisition" for notifying that the AT has been won is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the character image.

As shown in FIG. 69 (f1), the LED dynamic display process (Sv21) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 is performed, so that the section display LED 19 that has been turned off is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 69 (g1), when the start switch 7 is operated to start the next game, AT is started, and the character image of "Ikkuyo!" For notifying the start of AT is a character. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the image, and the advantageous BGM corresponding to AT is output from the speaker 53.

(Pattern 2)
70 to 72 are diagrams for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 2. As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, in pattern 2, it is assumed that the AT is won in the game in which the special replay is won in the advantageous section normal, and the state shifts from the next game to the AT. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, in the game in which the special replay is won in the advantageous section normal, when a power failure occurs, the derived result, the presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), and the winning effect The presence / absence of, and the extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

First, an example in the case where the power failure 1 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 72. As shown in FIG. 70 (a2-1), in the advantageous section normal, the BGM is usually output from the speaker 53. Advantageous section When a special replay is normally won, an AT winning suggestion effect suggesting that the AT has been won is executed. In this example, the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C are operated at the timing when the player pushes the white 7 symbol back on the winning line LN, respectively, so that the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C are operated. White 7 symbols are stopped in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b2-1), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the 11th blank symbol is located on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (c2-1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the 15th white 7 symbol 4 frames ahead of the 11th blank symbol on the left reel 2L is stopped on the winning line LN. ..

As shown in FIG. 70 (d2-1), it is assumed that a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and before the symbol is stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. For example, it can be assumed that a power failure occurs between the operation of the left stop switch 8L and the stop control of the left reel 2L at least 0.56 milliseconds later. Alternatively, even after the stop control of the left reel 2L started after 0.56 milliseconds, the power failure occurred while the control for stopping the 15th white 7 symbol 4 frames ahead was not sufficient. A case can be assumed. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 70 (e2-1), when the above-mentioned electric power failure occurs, the left reel 2L is not excited, so that the left reel 2L rotates only by its own weight and then stops naturally. As mentioned above, if the power failure does not occur, in the left reel 2L, the 15th white 7 symbol, which is 4 frames ahead of the 11th blank symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN. Since the reel stop control is not performed, the 13th bell symbol, which is two frames ahead of the 11th blank symbol, stops on the winning line LN. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss in which no winning is generated is derived.

As shown in FIG. 70 (f2-1), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (g2-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 70 (h2-1), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main process performed before the power failure is restored and the reel stop control process is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (YES in Sc9) and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R have been released (NO in Sc12). , The reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 72 (i2-1), when the loading after the power failure is restored, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (7 sets) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. , 7 sets of replays will be won. Here, as described above, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is derived on the winning line LN, but in the winning determination process, the finally derived symbol combination is referred to. Rather than doing so, the presence or absence of winning is determined based on the symbol combination (7 sets) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Therefore, as in this example, even if a lost symbol combination is derived due to an electric power failure, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at the operation timing for deriving the 7 sets, the 7 sets are replayed. Will be awarded. Then, by performing the setting process (Sb69) at the end of the game in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the number of bets for performing the regame in the next game is set as the payout of the regame based on the winning of the 7-match replay. The process of setting is performed.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect as shown in FIG. 71 (e1) is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is also emitted from the speaker 53. Is not output. Further, the character image and the character image of "AT acquisition" as shown in FIG. 71 (e1) are not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. For this reason, as in this example, even though the lost symbol combination is apparently derived due to the power failure, the winning effect is executed, and the lost symbol combination is a symbol combination that generates a prize. Do not mislead people. In addition, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect.

As shown in FIG. 72 (j2-1), the LED dynamic display process (Sv21) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 is performed, so that the section display LED 19 that has been turned off is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 72 (k2-1), when the start switch 7 is operated to start the next game, AT is started, and a character image of "Ikkuyo!" For notifying the start of AT. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the character image, and the advantageous BGM corresponding to AT is output from the speaker 53.

Next, an example in the case where the power failure 2 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. As shown in FIG. 71 (a2-2), in the advantageous section normal, the BGM is usually output from the speaker 53. Advantageous section When a special replay is normally won, an AT winning suggestion effect suggesting that the AT has been won is executed. In this example, the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C are operated at the timing when the player pushes the white 7 symbol back on the winning line LN, respectively, so that the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C are operated. White 7 symbols are stopped in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b2-2), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the 11th blank symbol is located on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (c2-2), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the 15th white 7 symbol 4 frames ahead of the 11th blank symbol on the left reel 2L is stopped on the winning line LN. ..

As shown in FIG. 71 (d2-2), when the third stop operation is performed by the reel stop control, the left reel 2L slides by 4 frames from the 11th blank symbol located on the winning line LN. , The 15th white 7 symbol stops on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L. As a result, on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three white 7 symbols are derived as a symbol combination corresponding to the 7-aligned replay.

As shown in FIG. 71 (e2-2), it is assumed that the power failure occurs after the symbol is stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control while the third stop operation is maintained. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 71 (f2-2), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (g2-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 71 (h2-2), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main process performed before the power failure is restored and the reel stop control process is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (YES in Sc9) and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R have been released (NO in Sc12). , The reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 72 (i2-2), when the loading after the power failure is restored, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (7 sets) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. , 7 sets of replays will be won. Then, by performing the setting process (Sb69) at the end of the game in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the number of bets for performing the regame in the next game is set as the payout of the regame based on the winning of the 7-match replay. The process of setting is performed.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect as shown in FIG. 71 (e1) is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is also emitted from the speaker 53. Is not output. Further, the character image and the character image of "AT acquisition" as shown in FIG. 71 (e1) are not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Therefore, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect.

As shown in FIG. 72 (j2-2), the LED dynamic display process (Sv21) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 is performed, so that the section display LED 19 that has been turned off is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 72 (k2-2), when the start switch 7 is operated to start the next game, AT is started, and a character image of "Ikkuyo!" For notifying the start of AT. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the character image, and the advantageous BGM corresponding to AT is output from the speaker 53.

(Pattern 3)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 3. As shown in FIG. 73, in pattern 3, it is assumed that a game is won in a normal advantageous section. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 73, in the game in which the player wins the loss in the advantageous section normally, the derived result, the presence / absence of payout (medal, replay), the presence / absence of the winning effect, and the presence / absence of the winning effect, when the power failure does not occur. And the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

As shown in FIG. 73 (a3), in the advantageous section normal, the background image corresponding to the advantageous section normal is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the normal BGM corresponding to the advantageous section normal is output from the speaker 53. .. In this example, the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C are operated at the timing when the player pushes the white 7 symbol back on the winning line LN, respectively, so that the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C are operated. White 7 symbols are stopped in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 73 (b3), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the first orange symbol on the left reel 2L is located on the winning line LN. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (c3), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, it is determined in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. For example, if the ON state of the third stop operation is detected by the timer interrupt processing for four times (equivalent to about 2.24 ms), the stop control of the left reel 2L is performed after at least 0.56 ms. Will be. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the fifth bell symbol, which is four frames ahead of the first orange symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L.

As shown in FIG. 73 (d3), when the left reel 2L slides by 4 frames from the 1st orange symbol located on the winning line LN when the 3rd stop operation is performed by the reel stop control, the left reel 2L is left. The 5th bell symbol stops on the winning line LN on the 2L reel. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss is derived.

As shown in FIG. 73 (e3), when the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop (YES in Sc9), and all stop switches 8L, 8C, Since it is determined that the pressing on 8R has been released (NO in Sc12), the reel stop control process ends, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (loss) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. However, in this case, no prize is awarded, so no payout is made.

On the other hand, even if the sub-control unit 91 controls the effect, no prize is generated, so that no prize effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 73 (f3), since the loss is won, the section display LED 19 also keeps off.

As shown in FIG. 73 (g3), the BET operation is enabled to start the next game, and the BET operation is performed to set the bet number.

(Pattern 4)
74 to 76 are diagrams for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 4. As shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the pattern 4, it is assumed that the game is lost in the advantageous section normal. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the game in which the player wins the loss in the advantageous section normally, when a power failure occurs, the derived result, the presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), and the winning effect are displayed. The presence / absence and the extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

First, an example in the case where the power failure 1 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 76. As shown in FIG. 74 (a4-1), in the advantageous section normal, the background image corresponding to the advantageous section normal is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the normal BGM is usually output from the speaker 53. In this example, the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C are operated at the timing when the player pushes the white 7 symbol back on the winning line LN, respectively, so that the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C are operated. White 7 symbols are stopped in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 74 (b4-1), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the first orange symbol is located on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (c4-1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the fifth bell symbol, which is four frames ahead of the first orange symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L.

As shown in FIG. 74 (d4-1), it is assumed that a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and before the symbol is stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. For example, it can be assumed that a power failure occurs between the operation of the left stop switch 8L and the stop control of the left reel 2L at least 0.56 milliseconds later. Alternatively, even after the stop control of the left reel 2L is started after 0.56 milliseconds, if the power failure occurs while the control for stopping the 5th bell symbol 4 frames ahead is not sufficient. Can be assumed. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 74 (e4-1), when the above-mentioned electric power failure occurs, the left reel 2L is not excited, so that the left reel 2L rotates only by its own weight and then stops naturally. As mentioned above, if the power failure does not occur, in the left reel 2L, the 5th bell symbol, which is 4 frames ahead of the 1st orange symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN. Since the stop control is not performed, the white 7 symbol 2 frames ahead of the 1st orange symbol stops on the winning line LN. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a set of 7 symbol combinations corresponding to the special replay is accidentally derived.

As shown in FIG. 74 (f4-1), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (g4-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 74 (h4-1), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main process performed before the power failure is restored and the reel stop control process is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (YES in Sc9) and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R have been released (NO in Sc12). , The reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 76 (i4-1), when the loading after the power failure is restored, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (loss) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. .. Here, as described above, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, 7 sets are derived on the winning line LN, but in the winning determination process, the finally derived symbol combination is not referred to. , The presence or absence of winning is determined based on the symbol combination (loss) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. For this reason, as in this example, even if 7 sets are apparently derived by power failure, the winning result is judged to be a loss, and 7 sets replays will not be won and will be paid out. Absent.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is not output from the speaker 53 either. Therefore, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect.

As shown in FIG. 76 (j4-1), since the loss is won, the section display LED 19 also keeps off.

As shown in FIG. 76 (k4-1), the BET operation is enabled to start the next game, and the BET operation is performed to set the bet number.

Next, an example in the case where the power failure 2 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. As shown in FIG. 75 (a4-2), in the advantageous section normal, the background image corresponding to the advantageous section normal is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the normal BGM is usually output from the speaker 53. In this example, the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C are operated at the timing when the player pushes the white 7 symbol back on the winning line LN, respectively, so that the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C are operated. White 7 symbols are stopped in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 75 (b4-2), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the first orange symbol on the left reel 2L is located on the winning line LN. After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (c4-2), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the fifth bell symbol, which is four frames ahead of the first orange symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L.

As shown in FIG. 75 (d4-2), when the third stop operation is performed by the reel stop control, the left reel 2L slides by 4 frames from the first orange symbol located on the winning line LN. , The 5th bell symbol stops on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss is derived.

As shown in FIG. 75 (e4-2), it is assumed that the power failure occurs after the symbol is stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control while the third stop operation is maintained. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 75 (f4-2), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (g4-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed with the player's hand separated from the left stop switch 8L and the power supply is restored from the power interruption, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 75 (h4-2), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main process that was performed before the power failure is restored and the reel stop control process is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (YES in Sc9) and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R have been released (NO in Sc12). , The reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 76 (i4-2), when the loading after the power failure is restored, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (loss) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. However, in this case, no prize is awarded, so no payout is made.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is not output from the speaker 53 either. Therefore, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect.

As shown in FIG. 76 (j4-2), since the loser has been won, the section display LED 19 also keeps off.

As shown in FIG. 76 (k4-2), the BET operation is enabled to start the next game, and the BET operation is performed to set the bet number.

(Pattern 5)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 5. As shown in FIG. 77, in pattern 5, in the game in which the push order bell is won during AT, the total number of net increases in the advantageous section by winning the leading bell 1 is the upper limit (for example, 2400). Is assumed to reach. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 77, in the game in which the push order bell is won during AT, the derived outcome, the presence / absence of payout (medal, replay), and the presence / absence of winning effect when the power failure does not occur. , And the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

As shown in FIG. 77 (a5), during AT, the background image corresponding to AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the advantageous BGM corresponding to AT is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is lit. When the push order bell is won during AT, the navigation is executed, and a numerical image showing the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51. To. Specifically, when the 321 selection bell of the push order bells is won, a numerical image is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51 to prompt the reverse push of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. .. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C by reverse pressing, whereby the bell symbol is stopped at the middle stage of each of the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 77 (b5), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the first orange symbol on the left reel 2L is located on the winning line LN. At this time, the navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (c5), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, it is determined in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. For example, if the ON state of the third stop operation is detected by the timer interrupt processing for four times (equivalent to about 2.24 ms), the stop control of the left reel 2L is performed after at least 0.56 ms. Will be. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the fifth bell symbol, which is four frames ahead of the first orange symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L.

As shown in FIG. 77 (d5), when the left reel 2L slides by 4 frames from the 1st orange symbol located on the winning line LN when the 3rd stop operation is performed by the reel stop control, the left reel 2L is left. The 5th bell symbol stops on the winning line LN on the 2L reel. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three bell symbols are derived as a symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1.

As shown in FIG. 77 (e5), when the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9), and all stop switches 8L, 8C, Since it is determined that the pressing on 8R has been released (NO in Sc12), the reel stop control process ends, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (bell alignment) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. , Bell 1 wins. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, a process of paying out eight medals is performed as a payout based on the winning of the bell 1. Further, on the game auxiliary display 12, a numerical image of "8" notifying the number of medals paid out is displayed.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect is executed based on the winning effect of the bell 1, so that the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned on in a manner corresponding to the winning effect, and the speaker 53 The winning sound is output from. In addition, a character image of "GET" for notifying that the medal has been won by winning the bell 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the bell image and the character image. Further, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 2392 sheets" to "TOTAL 2400 sheets", and the acquired number display 63 is changed from "GET 1012 sheets". Eight sheets are added and updated to "GET 1020 sheets".

As shown in FIG. 77 (f5), since the limiter condition is satisfied when the total number of net increases in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number (for example, 2400 sheets), the section display LED 19 that has been lit is turned off.

As shown in Fig. 77 (g5), the result notification is performed, and along with the result images of "TOTAL 2400 sheets" and "GET 1020 sheets", the words "Be careful of immersiveness. Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately." The alert image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). At this time, the side lamp 27, the reel backlight 28, and the advantageous middle lamp 60 are turned off.

Here, with reference to FIG. 78, the start timing of the winning determination process by the main control unit 41 will be described for the game in which the power failure does not occur. FIG. 78 is a timing chart for explaining the start timing of the winning notification effect in the game in which the power failure does not occur.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control unit 41 sets a predetermined number of bets while performing the game start waiting process, and the start switch 7 performs the game start operation to control the reel stop. The processing is started, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, and the corresponding reel is stopped each time the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed. Then, after the stop switch related to the third stop operation is pressed to start the stop operation, the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released to end the stop operation, so that the reel stop control process is performed. Is terminated, and the winning judgment process is performed.

Hereinafter, in a game in which a power failure has not occurred, the period from the start of the third stop operation to the end of the third stop operation may be referred to as a first specific period. Further, in a game in which the power is not cut off, the period from the end of the third stop operation to the execution of the winning determination process may be referred to as the second specific period.

Further, the main control unit 41 controls the AT in the game, and when the push order bell is won in the internal lottery, the third control unit 41 starts from the time when the start operation of the game is performed by the start switch 7. It is controlled to perform navigation notification for a period until the stop operation is performed.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 displays the effect image to be displayed in the AT state on the liquid crystal display 51 during the game in which the reel stop control process is performed on the main control unit 41 side, and displays the advantageous BGM as a speaker. It is controlled to output from 53.

Further, when the navigation notification is performed by the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 performs the navigation notification for a period from the time when the game start operation is performed by the start switch 7 to the time when the third stop operation is performed. It is controlled to perform a navigation effect for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by.

Then, the main control unit 41 determines in the winning determination process whether or not a winning of any of the winning combinations has occurred, and issues a command capable of identifying the presence or absence of winning and the symbol combination derived on the winning line LN. It is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. After that, if it is determined by the winning determination process that any of the small winning combinations has been won, the medals are paid out and a predetermined number of medals according to the winning small winning combination (in this embodiment). , 8) are paid out from the hopper unit 35, and the number of medals to be paid out is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. After the payout process is completed, the game start waiting process is started and waits until the operation related to the start of the next game (the operation of the start switch 7 with the specified number of bets set) is performed.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 determines that a prize for any of the winning combinations has occurred based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker 53, and the reel backlight. The winning effect is performed using the 28 and the side lamp 27.

Further, the sub control unit 91 stops supplying power to the slot machine 1 and powers the slot machine 1 before it is specified that a winning combination of any of the winning combinations has occurred based on the command received from the main control unit 41. When the supply is started, after that, when it is specified that the winning of any of the winning combinations has occurred based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the power interruption does not occur as described above. Similarly, in the first aspect, the winning notification effect is controlled to notify that a winning has occurred.

(Pattern 6)
79 to 81 are diagrams for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 6. As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in the pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell is won during AT, the total number of net increases in the advantageous section by winning the leading bell 1 is the upper limit number (for example,). 2400 sheets) is assumed. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in the game in which the push order bell is won during AT, when a power failure occurs, the derived result, the presence or absence of payout (medal, replay), and the winning effect The presence / absence of, and the extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

First, an example in the case where the power failure 1 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 81. As shown in FIG. 79 (a6-1), during AT, the background image corresponding to AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the advantageous BGM corresponding to AT is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is lit. When the push order bell is won during AT, the navigation is executed, and a numerical image showing the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51. To. Specifically, when the 321 selection bell of the push order bells is won, a numerical image is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51 to prompt the reverse push of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. .. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C by reverse pressing, whereby the bell symbol is stopped at the middle stage of each of the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b6-1), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the first orange symbol on the left reel 2L is located on the winning line LN. At this time, the navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (c6-1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the fifth bell symbol, which is four frames ahead of the first orange symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L.

As shown in FIG. 79 (d6-1), it is assumed that a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and before the symbol is stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. For example, it can be assumed that a power failure occurs between the operation of the left stop switch 8L and the stop control of the left reel 2L at least 0.56 milliseconds later. Alternatively, even after the stop control of the left reel 2L is started after 0.56 milliseconds, if the power failure occurs while the control for stopping the 5th bell symbol 4 frames ahead is not sufficient. Can be assumed. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 79 (e6-1), when the above-mentioned electric power failure occurs, the left reel 2L is not excited, so that the left reel 2L rotates only by its own weight and then stops naturally. As mentioned above, if the power failure does not occur, in the left reel 2L, the 5th bell symbol, which is 4 frames ahead of the 1st orange symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN. Since the stop control is not performed, the 3rd white 7 symbol, which is 2 frames ahead of the 1st orange symbol, stops on the winning line LN. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss in which no winning is generated is derived.

As shown in FIG. 79 (f6-1), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (g6-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 79 (h6-1), when returning from the power failure, the process returns to the main process performed before the power failure occurs, and the reel stop control process is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (YES in Sc9) and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R have been released (NO in Sc12). , The reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 81 (i6-1), when the loading after the power failure recovery is completed, the section display LED 19 is restored by the LED dynamic display process in the timer interrupt process and controlled to the lighting state. Further, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (bell alignment) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. , Bell 1 wins. Here, as described above, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is derived on the winning line LN, but in the winning determination process, the finally derived symbol combination is referred to. Rather than doing so, the presence or absence of winning is determined based on the symbol combination (bell alignment) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Therefore, as in this example, even if the lost symbol combination is derived due to the power failure, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the pressing order to derive the bell alignment, the bell 1 A prize will be awarded. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, a process of paying out eight medals is performed as a payout based on the winning of the bell 1. Further, on the game auxiliary display 12, a numerical image of "8" notifying the number of medals paid out is displayed.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect as shown in FIG. 77 (e5) is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is also emitted from the speaker 53. Is not output. Further, the character image, the bell image, and the character image of "GET" as shown in FIG. 77 (e5) are not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. For this reason, as in this example, even though the lost symbol combination is apparently derived due to the power failure, the winning effect is executed, and the lost symbol combination is a symbol combination that generates a prize. Do not mislead people. In addition, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 2392 sheets" to "TOTAL 2400 sheets", and the acquired number display 63 is changed from "GET 1012 sheets". Eight sheets are added and updated to "GET 1020 sheets". The advantageous middle lamp 60 is restored and lighting control is performed.

As shown in FIG. 81 (j6-1), since the limiter condition is satisfied when the total number of net increases in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit (for example, 2400), the section display LED 19 that has been lit turns off. ..

As shown in Fig. 81 (k6-1), the result notification is performed, and along with the result images of "TOTAL 2400 sheets" and "GET 1020 sheets", the words "Be careful of getting stuck. Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately." The alert image indicated by is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). At this time, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is also turned off.

Next, an example in the case where the power failure 2 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. As shown in FIG. 80 (a6-2), during AT, the background image corresponding to AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the advantageous BGM corresponding to AT is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is lit. When the push order bell is won during AT, the navigation is executed, and a numerical image showing the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51. To. Specifically, when the 321 selection bell of the push order bells is won, a numerical image is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51 to prompt the reverse push of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. .. In this example, the player operates the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C by reverse pressing, whereby the bell symbol is stopped at the middle stage of each of the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b6-2), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the first orange symbol on the left reel 2L is located on the winning line LN. At this time, the navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (c6-2), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the fifth bell symbol, which is four frames ahead of the first orange symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L.

As shown in FIG. 80 (d6-2), when the reel stop control causes the reel 2L to slide by four frames from the first orange symbol located on the winning line LN when the third stop operation is performed, The 5th bell symbol stops on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three bell symbols are derived as a symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1.

As shown in FIG. 80 (e6-2), it is assumed that the power failure occurs after the symbol is stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control while the third stop operation is maintained. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 80 (f6-2), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (g6-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 80 (h6-2), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main process performed before the power failure is restored and the reel stop control process is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (YES in Sc9) and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R have been released (NO in Sc12). , The reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 81 (i6-2), when the loading after the power failure recovery is completed, the section display LED 19 is restored by the LED dynamic display process in the timer interrupt process and controlled to the lighting state. Further, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (bell alignment) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. , Bell 1 wins. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, a process of paying out eight medals is performed as a payout based on the winning of the bell 1. Further, on the game auxiliary display 12, a numerical image of "8" notifying the number of medals paid out is displayed.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect as shown in FIG. 77 (e5) is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is also emitted from the speaker 53. Is not output. Further, the character image, the bell image, and the character image of "GET" as shown in FIG. 77 (e5) are not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Therefore, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 2392 sheets" to "TOTAL 2400 sheets", and the acquired number display 63 is changed from "GET 1012 sheets". Eight sheets are added and updated to "GET 1020 sheets". The advantageous middle lamp 60 is restored and lighting control is performed.

As shown in FIG. 81 (j6-2), since the limiter condition is satisfied when the total number of net increases in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number (for example, 2400 sheets), the section display LED 19 that has been lit turns off. ..

As shown in Fig. 81 (k6-2), the result notification is performed, and along with the result images of "TOTAL 2400 sheets" and "GET 1020 sheets", the words "Be careful of getting stuck. Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately." The alert image indicated by is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). At this time, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is also turned off.

Here, with reference to FIG. 82, the start timing of the winning determination process by the main control unit 41 will be described for the game in which the power failure occurs. FIG. 82 is a timing chart for explaining the start timing of the winning notification effect after the power failure is restored in the game in which the power failure occurs.

As shown in FIG. 82, the main control unit 41 transfers to the slot machine 1 in a state in which the operation is completed after a power interruption occurs in a state in which the third stop operation is being performed during the game. By restarting the power supply and recovering from the power interruption, the initial setting process is first performed, then the reel stop control process is restored, and in the reel stop control process, the timer interrupt wait process is performed a predetermined number of times to perform a predetermined number of times. After waiting until the period elapses, the reel stop control process is terminated and the winning determination process is performed. Hereinafter, the period from the time when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted to the time when the winning determination process is performed may be referred to as a third specific period.

In the third specific period from the time when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the power supply is restored from the power failure to the time when the main control unit 41 performs the winning determination process, the initial setting process is performed in accordance with the recovery from the power failure. After that, when the timer interrupt predetermined number of times waiting process (Sc14) is performed in the reel stop control process in accordance with the recovery from the power failure, and the winning determination process is performed from the time when the third stop operation shown in FIG. 78 is completed. It is longer than the second specific period up to. As a result, sufficient time is required for the control required to return to the state before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, so that the symbol combination in which the winning is generated is stopped at the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. After that, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped before the winning determination process is performed, appropriate control can be performed.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 first controls the start-up notification effect, displays the loading image on the liquid crystal display 51, and outputs the start-up sound from the speaker 53 for a predetermined period. Although not shown, the side lamp 27 may be controlled to be turned on in the start-up mode for a predetermined period.

In this state, the sub control unit 91 controls the winning effect when it is specified that a winning has occurred based on the command received from the main control unit 41. At this time, the liquid crystal display 51 continues to display the loading image until the liquid crystal display 51 finishes reading the data such as an image into the RAM, and the output of the start-up sound from the speaker 53 is a start-up notification. It is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined period elapses after the control of the effect is started.

Then, in the control of the winning effect, the speaker 53 is controlled so as not to output the winning sound due to the Bell 1 winning from the speaker 53 by giving priority to the control of the activation notification effect that has been performed earlier. Further, the liquid crystal display 51 does not display the winning image due to the bell 1 winning, and the reel backlight 28 does not execute the winning effect.

After that, when the liquid crystal display 51 finishes reading the data such as an image into the RAM, the display of the loading image on the liquid crystal display 51 is finished, and the effect image according to the control state before the power failure occurs. Is controlled to be displayed. At this time, the output mode of the speaker 53 is to continue the output of the start-up sound when a predetermined period has not elapsed since the control of the start-up notification effect was started. After that, when the predetermined time elapses, the advantageous BGM is output from the speaker 53.

(Pattern 7)
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 7. As shown in FIG. 83, in pattern 7, it is assumed that a game is lost during AT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 83, in the game in which the loss is won during AT, the derived outcome, the presence / absence of payout (medal, replay), the presence / absence of winning effect, and the presence / absence of winning effect when the power failure does not occur. Examples include turning off or turning on the section display LED 19.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a7), during AT, the background image corresponding to AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the advantageous BGM corresponding to AT is output from the speaker 53. In this example, the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C are operated at the timing when the player pushes the white 7 symbol on the winning line LN, respectively, so that the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C are operated. The bell symbol is stopped in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b7), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the third white 7 symbol is located on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (c7), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, it is determined in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. For example, if the ON state of the third stop operation is detected by the timer interrupt processing for four times (equivalent to about 2.24 ms), the stop control of the left reel 2L is performed after at least 0.56 ms. Will be. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the 7th blank symbol 4 frames ahead of the 3rd white 7 symbol on the left reel 2L is stopped on the winning line LN. ..

As shown in FIG. 83 (d7), when the 3rd stop operation is performed by the reel stop control, the left reel 2L slides by 4 frames from the 3rd white 7 symbol located on the winning line LN. The 7th blank symbol stops on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss is derived.

As shown in FIG. 83 (e7), when the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R stop (YES in Sc9), and all stop switches 8L, 8C, Since it is determined that the pressing on 8R has been released (NO in Sc12), the reel stop control process ends, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (loss) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. However, in this case, no prize is awarded, so no payout is made.

On the other hand, even if the sub-control unit 91 controls the effect, no prize is generated, so that no prize effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 83 (f7), since the loss is won, the section display LED 19 also keeps lighting.

As shown in FIG. 83 (g7), the BET operation is enabled to start the next game, and the BET operation is performed to set the bet number.

(Pattern 8)
84 to 86 are diagrams for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 8. As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, in the pattern 8, it is assumed that the game is lost in AT. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, in the game in which a loss is won during AT, when a power failure occurs, a derived result, whether or not a payout (medal, replay), and whether or not a winning effect is produced. , And the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

First, an example in the case where the power failure 1 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 86. As shown in FIG. 84 (a8-1), during AT, the background image corresponding to AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the advantageous BGM is output from the speaker 53. In this example, the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C are operated at the timing when the player pushes the bell symbol back onto the winning line LN, respectively, and thereby the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C, respectively. The bell design is stopped in the middle.

As shown in FIG. 84 (b8-1), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the third white 7 symbol is located on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (c8-1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the 7th blank symbol 4 frames ahead of the 3rd white 7 symbol on the left reel 2L is stopped on the winning line LN. ..

As shown in FIG. 84 (d8-1), it is assumed that a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and before the symbol is stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. For example, it can be assumed that a power failure occurs between the operation of the left stop switch 8L and the stop control of the left reel 2L at least 0.56 milliseconds later. Alternatively, even after the stop control of the left reel 2L is started after 0.56 milliseconds, if the power failure occurs while the control for stopping the 7th blank symbol 4 frames ahead is not sufficient. Can be assumed. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 84 (e8-1), when the above-mentioned electric power failure occurs, the left reel 2L is not excited, so that the left reel 2L rotates only by its own weight and then stops naturally. As mentioned above, if the power failure does not occur, in the left reel 2L, the 7th blank symbol 4 frames ahead of the 3rd white 7 symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. Since the reel stop control is not performed, the bell symbol two frames ahead of the third white 7 symbol stops on the winning line LN. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a bell-aligned symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1 is accidentally derived.

As shown in FIG. 84 (f8-1), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (g8-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 84 (h8-1), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main process performed before the power failure is restored and the reel stop control process is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (YES in Sc9) and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R have been released (NO in Sc12). , The reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 86 (i8-1), when the loading after the power failure recovery is completed, the section display LED 19 is restored by the LED dynamic display process in the timer interrupt process and is controlled to the lighting state. Further, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (loss) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. .. Here, as described above, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the bell alignment is derived on the winning line LN, but in the winning determination process, the finally derived symbol combination is not referred to. , The presence or absence of winning is determined based on the symbol combination (loss) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Therefore, as in this example, even if the bell alignment is derived by the electric power failure, the winning result is judged to be a loss, the winning of the bell 1 does not occur, and the payment is not made. ..

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is not output from the speaker 53 either. Therefore, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect. The advantageous middle lamp 60 is restored and lighting control is performed.

As shown in FIG. 86 (j8-1), since the loss is won, the section display LED 19 keeps lighting.

As shown in FIG. 86 (k8-1), the BET operation is enabled to start the next game, and the BET operation is performed to set the bet number.

Next, an example in the case where the power failure 2 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIG. 85 (a8-2), during AT, the background image corresponding to AT is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the advantageous BGM is output from the speaker 53. In this example, the right stop switch 8R and the middle stop switch 8C are operated at the timing when the player pushes the bell symbol back onto the winning line LN, respectively, and thereby the right reel 2R and the middle reel 2C, respectively. The bell design is stopped in the middle.

As shown in FIG. 85 (b8-2), the player operates the left stop switch 8L for the third stop at the timing when the third white 7 symbol is located on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (c8-2), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the 7th blank symbol 4 frames ahead of the 3rd white 7 symbol on the left reel 2L is stopped on the winning line LN. ..

As shown in FIG. 85 (d8-2), the left reel 2L slides by 4 frames from the 3rd white 7 symbol located on the winning line LN when the 3rd stop operation is performed by the reel stop control. Then, the 7th blank symbol stops on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss is derived.

As shown in FIG. 85 (e8-2), it is assumed that the power failure occurs after the symbol is stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control while the third stop operation is maintained. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 85 (f8-2), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (g8-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 85 (h8-2), when returning from the power failure, the process returns to the main process performed before the power failure occurs, and the reel stop control process is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (YES in Sc9) and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R have been released (NO in Sc12). , The reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 86 (i8-2), when the loading after the power failure recovery is completed, the section display LED 19 is restored by the LED dynamic display process in the timer interrupt process and controlled to the lighting state. Further, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (loss) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. However, in this case, no prize is awarded, so no payout is made.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is not output from the speaker 53 either. Therefore, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect. The advantageous middle lamp 60 is restored and lighting control is performed.

As shown in FIG. 86 (j8-2), since the loss is won, the section display LED 19 keeps lighting.

As shown in FIG. 86 (k8-2), the BET operation is enabled to start the next game, and the BET operation is performed to set the bet number.

(Pattern 9)
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 9. As shown in FIG. 87, in the pattern 9, in the game in which all the small wins are won during the CB, the total number of payouts in the CB reaches the upper limit (for example, 150) by winning the bell 1. Suppose. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 87, in the game in which all the small wins are won during the CB, when the power failure does not occur, the derived outcome, the presence / absence of payout (medals, replay), and the presence / absence of winning effect , And the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a9), during CB, the background image corresponding to CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is lit. In this example, the player operates the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C by pressing forward, whereby the bell symbol is stopped at the middle stage of each of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b9), the player operates the right stop switch 8R for the third stop at the timing when the 17th white 7 symbol is located on the winning line LN on the right reel 2R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (c9), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, it is determined in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the right reel 2R is performed so that the symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. For example, if the ON state of the third stop operation is detected by the timer interrupt process for four times (equivalent to about 2.24 milliseconds), the stop control of the right reel 2R is performed after at least 0.56 milliseconds. Will be. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the right reel 2R is performed so that the 0th bell symbol 4 frames ahead of the 17th white 7 symbol on the right reel 2R is stopped on the winning line LN. ..

As shown in FIG. 87 (d9), when the third stop operation is performed by the reel stop control, the right reel 2R slides by 4 frames from the 17th white 7 symbol located on the winning line LN. The 0th bell symbol stops on the winning line LN on the right reel 2R. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three bell symbols are derived as a symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1.

As shown in FIG. 87 (e9), when the player's hand is released from the right stop switch 8R, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9), and all stop switches 8L, 8C, Since it is determined that the pressing on 8R has been released (NO in Sc12), the reel stop control process ends, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (bell alignment) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. , Bell 1 wins. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, 15 medals are paid out as a payout based on the winning of the bell 1. In addition, the game auxiliary display 12 displays a numerical image of "15" that informs the number of medals paid out.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect is executed based on the winning effect of the bell 1, so that the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned on in a manner corresponding to the winning effect, and the speaker 53 The winning sound is output from. In addition, a character image of "15 GETs" for notifying that the medal has been won by winning the bell 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the character image. Further, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 764 sheets" to "TOTAL 779 sheets", and the acquired number display 63 is changed from "GET 129 sheets". 15 sheets are added and updated to "GET 144 sheets".

As shown in FIG. 87 (f9), after a predetermined period of time, the effect of the result notification during the freeze shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is executed, and then the result notification is performed as shown in FIG. 87 (g9). , "TOTAL 779 sheets" and "GET 1020 sheets" result images, along with a warning image showing the words "Be careful of immersiveness. Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately." For a specified period (for example, 3 seconds) It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. At this time, the side lamp 27, the reel backlight 28, and the advantageous middle lamp 60 are turned off.

(Pattern 10)
88 to 90 are diagrams for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 10. As shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, in the pattern 10, in the game in which all the small wins are won during the CB, the total number of payouts in the CB becomes the upper limit (for example, 150) by winning the bell 1. Imagine a case where it reaches. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, in the game in which all the small wins are won during the CB, when a power failure occurs, the derived outcome, the presence or absence of payout (medals, replay), and the winning effect The presence / absence of, and the extinguishing or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

First, an example in the case where the power failure 1 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 90. As shown in FIG. 88 (a10-1), in the CB, the background image corresponding to the CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to the CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is lit. In this example, the player operates the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C by pressing forward, whereby the bell symbol is stopped at the middle stage of each of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b10-1), the player operates the right stop switch 8R for the third stop at the timing when the 17th white 7 symbol is located on the winning line LN on the right reel 2R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (c10-1), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the right reel 2R is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the right reel 2R is performed so that the 0th bell symbol 4 frames ahead of the 17th white 7 symbol on the right reel 2R is stopped on the winning line LN. ..

As shown in FIG. 88 (d10-1), it is assumed that a power failure occurs while the third stop operation is maintained and before the symbol is stopped on the right reel 2R by the reel stop control. For example, it can be assumed that a power failure occurs between the operation of the right stop switch 8R and the stop control of the right reel 2R at least 0.56 milliseconds later. Alternatively, even after the stop control of the right reel 2R starts after 0.56 milliseconds, if the power failure occurs while the control for stopping the 0th bell symbol at the frame destination is not sufficient. I can imagine. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 88 (e10-1), the right reel 2R is not excited due to the occurrence of the above-mentioned power failure, so that the right reel 2R rotates only by its own weight and then stops naturally. As mentioned above, if the power failure does not occur, in the right reel 2R, the 0th bell symbol, which is 4 frames ahead of the 17th white 7 symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN. Since the reel stop control is not performed, the 19th replay a symbol, which is two frames ahead of the 17th white 7 symbol, stops on the winning line LN. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss in which no winning is generated is derived.

As shown in FIG. 88 (f10-1), the player's hand is released from the right stop switch 8R. After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (g10-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the right stop switch 8R, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 88 (h10-1), when returning from the power failure, the process returns to the main process performed before the power failure occurs, and the reel stop control process is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (YES in Sc9) and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R have been released (NO in Sc12). , The reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 90 (i10-1), when the loading after the power failure is restored, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (bell alignment) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. , Bell 1 wins. Here, as described above, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is derived on the winning line LN, but in the winning determination process, the finally derived symbol combination is referred to. Rather than doing so, the presence or absence of winning is determined based on the symbol combination (bell alignment) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Therefore, as in this example, even if the lost symbol combination is derived due to the power failure, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at the timing of deriving the bell alignment, the bell 1 will win the prize. Occurs. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, 15 medals are paid out as a payout based on the winning of the bell 1. In addition, the game auxiliary display 12 displays a numerical image of "15" that informs the number of medals paid out.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect as shown in FIG. 87 (e9) is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is also emitted from the speaker 53. Is not output. Further, the character image and the character image of "15 sheets GET" as shown in FIG. 87 (e9) are not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. For this reason, as in this example, even though the lost symbol combination is apparently derived due to the power failure, the winning effect is executed, and the lost symbol combination is a symbol combination that generates a prize. Do not mislead people. In addition, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 764 sheets" to "TOTAL 779 sheets", and the acquired number display 63 is changed from "GET 129 sheets". 15 sheets are added and updated to "GET 144 sheets". The advantageous middle lamp 60 is restored and lighting control is performed.

As shown in FIG. 90 (j10-1), since the arbitrary end condition was satisfied when the total number of payouts in the CB reached the upper limit (for example, 150), the result notification was performed and "TOTAL 779" was issued. Along with the result images of "GET 144 sheets", a warning image with the words "Be careful of immersiveness. Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately." Is displayed on the liquid crystal display for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is displayed on the vessel 51. At this time, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is also turned off.

Next, an example in the case where the power failure 2 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. As shown in FIG. 89 (a10-2), during CB, the background image corresponding to CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is lit. In this example, the player operates the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C by pressing forward, whereby the bell symbol is stopped at the middle stage of each of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C.

As shown in FIG. 89 (b10-2), the player operates the right stop switch 8R for the third stop at the timing when the 17th white 7 symbol is located on the winning line LN on the right reel 2R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (c10-2), when the ON state of the third stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the third stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the right reel 2R is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the right reel 2R is performed so that the 0th bell symbol 4 frames ahead of the 17th white 7 symbol on the right reel 2R is stopped on the winning line LN. ..

As shown in FIG. 88 (d10-2), the right reel 2R slides by 4 frames from the 17th white 7 symbol located on the winning line LN when the third stop operation is performed by the reel stop control. Then, the 0th bell symbol stops on the winning line LN on the right reel 2R. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three bell symbols are derived as a symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1.

As shown in FIG. 89 (e10-2), it is assumed that the power failure occurs after the symbol is stopped on the right reel 2R by the reel stop control while the third stop operation is maintained. In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 89 (f10-2), the player's hand is released from the right stop switch 8R. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (g10-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the right stop switch 8R, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 89 (h10-2), when returning from the power failure, the process returns to the main process performed before the power failure occurs, and the reel stop control process is executed again. In this reel stop control process, it is determined that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped (YES in Sc9) and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R have been released (NO in Sc12). , The reel stop control process ends.

As shown in FIG. 90 (i10-2), when the loading after the power failure is restored, the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (bell alignment) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. , Bell 1 wins. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, 15 medals are paid out as a payout based on the winning of the bell 1. In addition, the game auxiliary display 12 displays a numerical image of "15" that informs the number of medals paid out.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect as shown in FIG. 87 (e9) is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is also emitted from the speaker 53. Is not output. Further, the character image and the character image of "15 sheets GET" as shown in FIG. 87 (e9) are not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Therefore, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 764 sheets" to "TOTAL 779 sheets", and the acquired number display 63 is changed from "GET 129 sheets". 15 sheets are added and updated to "GET 144 sheets". The advantageous middle lamp 60 is restored and lighting control is performed.

As shown in FIG. 90 (j10-2), since an arbitrary end condition was satisfied when the total number of payouts in the CB reached the upper limit (for example, 150), a result notification was performed and "TOTAL 779" was issued. Along with the result images of "GET 144 sheets", a warning image with the words "Be careful of immersiveness. Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately." Is displayed on the liquid crystal display for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is displayed on the vessel 51. At this time, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is also turned off.

(Pattern 11)
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 11. As shown in FIG. 91, in the pattern 11, it is assumed that in the game in which all the small wins are won during the CB, a stop operation for stopping the left reel 2L is performed at the first timing shown in FIG. 45. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 91, in the game in which all the small wins are won during the CB, when the power failure does not occur, the derived outcome, the presence / absence of payout (medals, replay), and the presence / absence of winning effect , And the section display LED 19 is turned off or turned on.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a11), during CB, the background image corresponding to CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is lit. When the player operates the start switch 7, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating.

As shown in FIG. 91 (b11), it is assumed that the left reel 2L is first stopped. At this time, as shown in FIG. 45, the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing in which the No. 8 bell symbol is located on the winning line LN.

As shown in FIG. 91 (c11), when the ON state of the first stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, a predetermined symbol is displayed based on the operation timing of the first stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so as to stop on the winning line LN. For example, if the ON state of the first stop operation is detected by the timer interrupt processing for four times (equivalent to about 2.24 milliseconds), the stop control of the left reel 2L is performed after at least 0.56 milliseconds. Will be. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the 9th cherry symbol, which is one frame ahead of the 8th bell symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. Since the left reel 2L is set to the CT reel during CB, the symbol one frame ahead at the maximum is stopped.

Further, when the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect starts. Specifically, a whiteout effect is once performed in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 becomes pure white, and no image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 91 (d11), when the left reel 2L slides by one frame from the 8th bell symbol located on the winning line LN when the first stop operation is performed by the reel stop control, the left reel 2L is left. The 9th cherry symbol stops on the winning line LN on the 2L reel. In the liquid crystal display 51, the whiteout effect continues.

As shown in FIG. 91 (e11), when the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L, the setting suggestion effect is executed, and an image of a shooting star flowing is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

As shown in FIG. 91 (f11), after that, when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (NO in Sc12). ), The reel stop control process is completed, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination (cherry-bell-bell) that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Is judged, and a cherry prize is generated. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, 15 medals are paid out as a payout based on the winning of the cherry. In addition, the game auxiliary display 12 displays a numerical image of "15" that informs the number of medals paid out.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect is executed based on the winning of the cherry, so that the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are turned on in a manner corresponding to the winning effect, and the speaker 53 The winning sound is output. Further, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 156 sheets" to "TOTAL 171 sheets", and the acquired number display 63 is changed from "GET 26 sheets". 15 sheets are added and updated to "GET 41 sheets".

(Pattern 12)
92 to 94 are diagrams for explaining the effect and processing in the pattern 12. As shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the pattern 12, in the game in which all the small winning combinations are won during the CB, a stop operation for stopping the left reel 2L at the first timing shown in FIG. 45 is performed. Suppose. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the game in which all the small wins are won during the CB, when the power failure does not occur, the derived outcome, the presence or absence of payout (medals, replay), and the winning prize The presence / absence of the effect and the turning off or lighting of the section display LED 19 are exemplified.

First, an example in the case where the power failure 1 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 94. As shown in FIG. 92 (a12-1), in the CB, the background image corresponding to the CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to the CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is lit. When the player operates the start switch 7, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating.

As shown in FIG. 92 (b12-1), it is assumed that the left reel 2L is first stopped. At this time, as shown in FIG. 45, the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing in which the No. 8 bell symbol is located on the winning line LN.

As shown in FIG. 92 (c12-1), when the ON state of the first stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, it is determined in advance based on the operation timing of the first stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the 9th cherry symbol, which is one frame ahead of the 8th bell symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. Since the left reel 2L is set to the CT reel during CB, the symbol one frame ahead at the maximum is stopped.

Further, when the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect starts. Specifically, a whiteout effect is once performed in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 becomes pure white, and no image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 92 (d12-1), it is assumed that the power failure occurs while the first stop operation is maintained and before the symbol is stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. For example, after the left stop switch 8L is operated, the ON state of the first stop operation is detected by the timer interrupt process four times (equivalent to about 2.24 ms) for at least 0.56 ms. It can be assumed that a power failure occurs before the stop control of the left reel 2L is performed later. Alternatively, even after the stop control of the left reel 2L starts after 0.56 ms, the control for stopping the 9th cherry symbol one frame ahead is not sufficient (for example, 0.56 mm). It can be assumed that a power failure occurs (immediately after the stop control of the left reel 2L starts after a second). In this case, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 92 (e12-1), when the above-mentioned electric power failure occurs, the left reel 2L is not excited, so that the left reel 2L rotates only by its own weight and then stops naturally. As mentioned above, if the power failure does not occur, in the left reel 2L, the 9th cherry symbol, which is one frame ahead of the 8th bell symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN, but the reel Since the stop control is not performed, the 10th watermelon symbol, which is two frames ahead of the 8th bell symbol, stops on the winning line LN. Further, since excitation is not applied to the other middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R rotate only by their own weight, and eventually stop naturally. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss in which no winning is generated is derived.

As shown in FIG. 92 (f12-1), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (g12-1), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the left stop switch 8L, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 92 (h12-1), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main process performed before the power failure is restored and the reel stop control process is executed again.

As shown in FIG. 94 (i12-1), when the loading after the power failure is restored, the background image in the CB in the game in which all the small wins are won is displayed again on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, by performing the reel stop control process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R that have not yet been stopped are rotated again.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 91 (e11) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 94 (j12-1), after that, when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (Sc12). NO), the reel stop control process is completed, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Here, as described above, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is derived on the winning line LN, but in the winning determination process, the finally derived symbol combination is referred to. Rather than doing so, the presence or absence of winning is determined based on the symbol combination that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. That is, in the case of this example, for the left reel 2L, the winning determination is performed assuming that the cherry symbol is derived. As a result, even if the lost symbol combination is derived by the electric power failure, it is considered that the "cherry-bell-bell" is derived, and the cherry prize is generated. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, 15 medals are paid out as a payout based on the winning of the cherry. In addition, the game auxiliary display 12 displays a numerical image of "15" that informs the number of medals paid out.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect as shown in FIG. 91 (f11) is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is also emitted from the speaker 53. Is not output. For this reason, as in this example, even though the lost symbol combination is apparently derived due to the power failure, the winning effect is executed, and the lost symbol combination is a symbol combination that generates a prize. Do not mislead people. In addition, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 156 sheets" to "TOTAL 171 sheets", and the acquired number display 63 is changed from "GET 26 sheets". 15 sheets are added and updated to "GET 41 sheets".

Next, an example in the case where the power failure 2 occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. As shown in FIG. 93 (a12-2), during CB, the background image corresponding to CB is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the bonus BGM corresponding to CB is output from the speaker 53. In addition, the advantageous middle lamp 60 is lit. When the player operates the start switch 7, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating.

As shown in FIG. 93 (b12-2), it is assumed that the left reel 2L is first stopped. At this time, as shown in FIG. 45, the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing in which the No. 8 bell symbol is located on the winning line LN.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (c12-2), when the ON state of the first stop operation by the player is effectively detected by the timer interrupt process, in advance based on the operation timing of the first stop operation. Reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the determined symbol is stopped on the winning line LN. In this example, reel stop control for stopping the left reel 2L is performed so that the 9th cherry symbol, which is one frame ahead of the 8th bell symbol, is stopped on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L. Since the left reel 2L is set to the CT reel during CB, the symbol one frame ahead at the maximum is stopped.

Further, when the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect starts. Specifically, a whiteout effect is once performed in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 becomes pure white, and no image is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 93 (d12-2), when the first stop operation is performed by the reel stop control, the left reel 2L slides by one frame from the No. 8 bell symbol located on the winning line LN. , The 9th cherry symbol stops on the winning line LN on the left reel 2L.

As shown in FIG. 93 (e12-2), it is assumed that the power failure occurs after the first stop operation is maintained and the symbol is already stopped on the left reel 2L by the reel stop control. In this case, since excitation is not applied to the other middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R rotate only by their own weight, and eventually stop spontaneously. As a result, in the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss in which no winning is generated is derived. Further, no image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the illuminations for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are turned off.

As shown in FIG. 93 (f12-2), the player's hand is released from the left stop switch 8L. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (g12-2), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the power supply is restored from the power interruption with the player's hand separated from the right stop switch 8R, the loading image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 51, and the start-up sound is output from the speaker 53.

As shown in FIG. 93 (h12-2), when the power is restored from the power failure, the main process that was performed before the power failure is restored and the reel stop control process is executed again.

As shown in FIG. 94 (i12-2), when the loading after the power failure is restored, the background image in the CB in the game in which all the small wins are won is displayed again on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, by performing the reel stop control process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R that have not yet been stopped are rotated again.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 91 (e11) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 94 (j12-2), after that, when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped (YES in Sc9) and all the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are released from being pressed (Sc12). NO), the reel stop control process is completed, and the winning determination process (Sb48) in the main process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combination that stops on the winning line LN determined at the time of the stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Then, by performing the medal payout process (Sb63) in the main process shown in FIG. 14, 15 medals are paid out as a payout based on the winning of the cherry. In addition, the game auxiliary display 12 displays a numerical image of "15" that informs the number of medals paid out.

On the other hand, as the control of the effect by the sub control unit 91, the winning effect as shown in FIG. 91 (f11) is not performed, the side lamp 27 and the reel backlight 28 are kept off, and the winning sound is also emitted from the speaker 53. Is not output. Therefore, when the power is restored, the process after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the winning effect. However, in the first area 51c in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the total acquired number display 62 is updated from "TOTAL 156 sheets" to "TOTAL 171 sheets", and the acquired number display 63 is changed from "GET 26 sheets". 15 sheets are added and updated to "GET 41 sheets".

[Main effect]
Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.

(1-1) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be individually identified is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means for determining a display result that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13)) and
It is provided with a derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) that is operated to derive the display result.
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined determination result (for example, a special replay winning), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, a timing of reverse pushing and pulling 7 symbols onto the winning line LN). When a predetermined display result (for example, 7 sets) is derived by operating the derivation operation means in the above, a specific process (for example, lighting of the section display LED 19) is executed (for example, pattern 1 shown in FIG. 69). Example),
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the out-licensing operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. As a result, even when the predetermined display result is not derived, the specific process is executed (for example, the example of the pattern 2 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 70 and 72).
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (for example, a loss winning), when the predetermined display result is derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped. The specific process is not executed (for example, the example of pattern 4 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 74 and 76).
The specific process is a process of lighting an advantageous lighting unit (for example, section display LED 19) related to an advantageous state (for example, AT) controlled by a game control means (for example, main control unit 41) that controls the game.

Specifically, as illustrated in Pattern 1, in a game in which a special replay is won and an AT is won during a normal advantageous section, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed in the push order and operation timing corresponding to the 7-match replay. The section display LED 19 lights up when the 7 sets are derived by the operation. Further, as illustrated in Pattern 2, in the game in which the special replay was won and the AT was won during the normal advantageous section, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the push order and the operation timing corresponding to the 7-match replay. Despite this, the section display LED 19 is lit even when the 7 sets are not derived due to the power failure. As a result, in the game in which the special replay is won and the AT is won during the normal advantageous section, the section display LED 19 is uniformly lit regardless of whether or not there is a power failure, so that the player is informed that the AT is controlled. It can be notified. On the other hand, as illustrated in pattern 4, in a game in which a loss is won during the normal advantageous section, when 7 sets are derived due to a power failure, the section display LED 19 is not turned on and is kept off. As a result, in the game in which the loss is won during the normal advantageous section, the section display LED 19 does not light even if the 7 sets are derived, so that the section display LED 19 lights even though the loss is won. By doing so, the player will not be mistaken for being controlled by the AT. As described above, the game can proceed smoothly.

(1-2) Further provided with a winning determination means (for example, a winning determination process by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result.
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, special replay winning), the winning determination means operates the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. Nevertheless, when the predetermined display result (for example, 7 sets) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, an error related to the winning determination is not generated (for example, FIGS. 70 and 72 are shown). Example of pattern 2 (power interruption 1).

Specifically, as illustrated in Pattern 2, in a game in which a special replay is won and an AT is won during a normal advantageous section, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed in the push order and operation timing corresponding to the 7-match replay. Even if the 7-match is not derived due to the power failure despite the operation, the winning judgment process is performed without causing an error regarding the winning judgment after the power failure is restored, and the 7-match replay wins. To do. As a result, the winning of the 7-match replay is not canceled due to the power failure, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(1-3) After the power supply to the slot machine is restarted, before the operation related to the progress of the game becomes effective, the lighting mode of the advantageous lighting unit is visually recognized based on the operation before the power interruption supply is stopped. Processing for enabling is executed (for example, an example of pattern 2 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 70 and 72).

Specifically, as illustrated in Pattern 2, in a game in which a special replay is won and an AT is won during a normal advantageous section, even if a power failure occurs and the game recovers from the power failure, FIG. 72 As shown in (j-1), the section display LED 19 that had been turned off lights up based on the AT winning by winning the special replay at the time of the start operation, and then the start operation for starting the next game is effective. Be transformed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the AT is controlled by the lighting of the section display LED 19 before the next game starts after the power failure is restored, without canceling the AT winning due to the power failure. The game can be advanced.

(2-1) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be individually identified is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means for determining a display result that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13)) and
It is provided with a derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) that is operated to derive the display result.
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined determination result (for example, the push order bell is won), the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, the push order for winning the bell 1 shown in FIG. 11). When a predetermined display result (for example, bell alignment) is derived by operating the derivation operation means in (), a specific process (for example, turning off the section display LED 19) is executed (for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 77). Example of 5),
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the out-licensing operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. As a result, even when the predetermined display result is not derived, the specific process is executed (for example, the example of the pattern 6 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81).
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (for example, a loss winning), when the predetermined display result is derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped. The specific process is not executed (for example, the example of the pattern 8 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 84 and 86).
The specific process is a process of turning off the advantageous lighting unit (for example, the section display LED 19) related to the advantageous state (for example, AT) controlled by the game control means (for example, the main control unit 41) that controls the game.

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 5, in the game in which the push order bell is won during AT, the bells are operated by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell. When the alignment is derived, the AT end condition is satisfied and the section display LED 19 turns off. Further, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell was won during AT, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the electric power was generated. Even when the bell alignment is not derived due to the disconnection, the AT end condition is satisfied and the section display LED 19 is turned off. As a result, in the game in which the push order bell is won during AT, the section display LED 19 is uniformly turned off when the end condition of AT is satisfied regardless of whether or not there is a power failure, so that AT has ended. It is possible to notify the player. On the other hand, as illustrated in the pattern 8, in the game in which the loss is won during AT, when the bell alignment is derived due to the power failure, the section display LED 19 is not turned off and the lighting is maintained. As a result, in the game in which the loss is won during AT, the section display LED 19 is not turned off even if the bell alignment is derived, so that the section display LED 19 is turned off even though the loss is won. It does not mislead the player when the AT ends. As described above, the game can proceed smoothly.

(2-2) Further provided with a winning determination means (for example, a winning determination process by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result.
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, the push order bell is won), the winning determination means operates the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. Despite this, when the predetermined display result (for example, bell alignment) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, an error related to the winning determination is not generated (for example, FIGS. 79 and 81). Example of pattern 6 (power interruption 1) shown).

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell was won during AT, although the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the push order corresponding to the push order bell, Even when the bell alignment is not derived due to the power failure, the prize determination process is performed without causing an error regarding the prize determination after the power failure is restored, and the bell 1 is won. As a result, the winning of the bell 1 is not canceled due to the power failure, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(2-3) In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, the push order bell is won), a predetermined number of game values (for example, 8 cards) are derived based on the derivation of the predetermined display result. The medals) are given to satisfy the end condition of the advantageous state (for example, acquisition of 2400 medals) regarding the granting of the game value, the data initialization process related to the advantageous state is executed, and the data is initialized. The advantageous lighting unit is turned off.

Specifically, when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds the upper limit of 2400, the advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is terminated is set, and the section display LED 19 stored in the RAM 41c. The section display LED 19 is controlled to be turned off by initializing the output buffer of. As a result, when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds the upper limit, the section display LED 19 is turned off, so that the player can be notified that the AT has ended, and the game proceeds smoothly. Can be made to.

(2-4) When the end condition is satisfied, a result image showing the result of the game in the advantageous state (for example, the result image 51j, 51k in the result notification) is displayed, and during the display of the result image, A warning image (for example, a warning image 51e) that calls attention to the player is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

Specifically, when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds the upper limit of 2400, the result notification is sent to obtain the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous section and the advantageous section. A result image showing the number of medals won in a series of ATs is displayed, and a warning image showing the words "Be careful of immersiveness. Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately." Is displayed. As a result, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the result of the game can be notified to the player, and the player can be alerted to the devotion to the game, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

(3-1) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be individually identified is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means for determining a display result that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13)) and
It is provided with a derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) that is operated to derive the display result.
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined determination result (for example, a push order bell is won), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, a push order for winning the bell 1 shown in FIG. 11). When a predetermined display result (for example, bell alignment) is derived by operating the derivation operation means in (), a specific process (for example, payout of medals) is executed (for example, pattern 5 shown in FIG. 77). Example),
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the out-licensing operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. As a result, even when the predetermined display result is not derived, the specific process is executed (for example, the example of the pattern 6 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81).
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (for example, a loss winning), when the predetermined display result is derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped. The specific process is not executed (for example, the example of the pattern 8 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 84 and 86).
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the out-licensing operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. As a result, the predetermined display result is not derived, and then the power supply is restarted in a state where the operation of the derived operation means is canceled (for example, an example of pattern 6 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81). ), And in a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the predetermined display result is derived by operating the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. When the power supply to the slot machine is stopped while the operation of the derivation operation means is continued, and then the power supply is restarted while the operation of the derivation operation means is released (for example, FIG. 80 and FIG. 81). In any of the pattern 6 (example of power interruption 2)), the emphasis effect for emphasizing the derived display result (for example, the winning effect by the reel backlight 28 or the side lamp 27) is not executed.

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 5, in the game in which the push order bell is won, the bell alignment is derived by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell. When it is done, the medal will be paid out. Further, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the bell is turned off. Even if the match is not derived, the medal will be paid out. As a result, in the game in which the push order bell is won, the medals are paid out regardless of whether or not there is a power failure, which makes the player feel dissatisfied that the medals are not paid out due to the power failure. Absent. On the other hand, as illustrated in Pattern 8, in the game in which the loss is won, the medal is not paid out when the bell alignment is derived by the electric power failure. As a result, in the game in which the loser is won, the medal is not paid out even if the bell alignment is derived, so that the medal may be paid out even though the loser is won. Absent. Further, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the bell is turned off. When the alignment is not derived and then recovers from the power failure, and in the game where the push order bell is won, the bell is operated by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell. When the alignment is derived, the power is cut off while the stop switch is being pressed continuously, and then the power is cut off when the stop switch is released, the derived symbol combination is emphasized. The winning effect by the reel backlight 28 and the side lamp 27 is not executed. As a result, when the power is restored, the winning effect is not uniformly executed, so that the processing after the power is restored can be smoothly proceeded. As described above, the game can proceed smoothly.

(3-2) Further provided with a winning determination means (for example, a winning determination process by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result.
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, the push order bell is won), the winning determination means operates the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. Despite this, when the predetermined display result (for example, bell alignment) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, an error related to the winning determination is not generated (for example, FIGS. 79, 80, Example of pattern 6 (electric power cut 1, power cut 2) shown in FIG. 81).

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the electric power is displayed. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell when the bell alignment was not derived due to the disconnection and then recovered from the power failure, and in the game in which the push order bell was won. As a result, the bell alignment is derived, and when the power is cut off while the stop switch pressing operation is continued and then the power is restored with the stop switch pressed released, after the power failure is restored. The winning determination process is performed without causing an error regarding the winning determination, and the winning of Bell 1 is generated. As a result, the winning of the bell 1 is not canceled due to the power failure, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(3-3) A first emphasis effect means (for example, reel backlight 28) and a second emphasis effect means (for example, side lamp 27) for executing the enhancement effect for emphasizing the derived display result are further provided.
After the power supply to the slot machine is resumed, the emphasis effect is not executed by either the first emphasis effect means or the second emphasis effect means (for example, the pattern shown in FIGS. 79, 80, 81). 6 (Example of power failure 1 and power failure 2)).

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the electric power is displayed. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell when the bell alignment was not derived due to the disconnection and then recovered from the power failure, and in the game in which the push order bell was won. As a result, the bell alignment is derived, and when the power is cut off while the stop switch pressing operation is continued and then the power is restored with the stop switch being released, after the power failure is restored. Is not executed not only by the reel backlight 28 but also by the side lamp 27. As a result, when the power is restored, not only the reel backlight 28 but also the side lamp 27 does not uniformly execute the winning effect, so that the processing after the power failure can be smoothly proceeded.

(4-1) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be individually identified is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means for determining a display result that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13)) and
It is provided with a derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) that is operated to derive the display result.
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined determination result (for example, a push order bell is won), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, a push order for winning the bell 1 shown in FIG. 11). When a predetermined display result (for example, bell alignment) is derived by operating the derivation operation means in (), a specific process (for example, payout of medals) is executed (for example, pattern 5 shown in FIG. 77). Example),
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the out-licensing operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. As a result, even when the predetermined display result is not derived, the specific process is executed (for example, the example of the pattern 6 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81).
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (for example, a loss winning), when the predetermined display result is derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped. The specific process is not executed (for example, the example of the pattern 8 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 84 and 86).
Attention to call attention to the player when the predetermined display result is derived in the case where the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result satisfies the end condition of the advantageous state (for example, AT). A reminder image (for example, a reminder image of "Be careful of getting into it. Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately") is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).
When the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result satisfies the end condition of the advantageous state, the out-licensing operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. When the predetermined display result is not derived because the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted in a state where the operation of the derived operation means is canceled (for example, FIGS. 79 and 81 are shown. Pattern 6 (example of power failure 1)), and when the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result satisfies the end condition of the advantageous state, the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result is used. A state in which the predetermined display result is derived by operating the derivation operation means, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped while the operation of the derivation operation means is continued, and then the operation of the derivation operation means is released. When the power supply is restarted (for example, the example of the pattern 6 (power interruption 2) shown in FIGS. 80 and 81), the caution image is displayed over the predetermined period.

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 5, in the game in which the push order bell during AT is won, the bells are operated by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell. The medals will be paid out when the match is derived. Further, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell during AT is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the electric power is transmitted. The medal will be paid out even if the bell alignment is not derived due to the decision. As a result, in the game in which the push order bell is won, the medals are paid out regardless of whether or not there is a power failure, which makes the player feel dissatisfied that the medals are not paid out due to the power failure. Absent. On the other hand, as illustrated in pattern 8, in the game in which the loss during AT is won, the medal is not paid out when the bell alignment is derived by the electric power failure. As a result, in the game in which the loser is won, the medal is not paid out even if the bell alignment is derived, so that the medal may be paid out even though the loser is won. Absent. Further, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell during AT is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the electric power is displayed. When the bell alignment is not derived due to the disconnection and then recovers from the power interruption, and in the game in which the push order bell during AT is won, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are set in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell. In any case, when the bell alignment is derived by the operation, the power is cut off while the stop switch pressing operation is continued, and then the power is restored with the stop switch pressed released, " Be careful not to get stuck. Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately. ”A warning image with the words“ is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). As a result, when the player recovers from the power failure, the player can be alerted to the game by uniformly displaying the alert image, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

(4-2) Further provided with a winning determination means (for example, a winning determination process by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result.
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, the push order bell is won), the winning determination means operates the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. Despite this, when the predetermined display result (for example, bell alignment) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, an error related to the winning determination is not generated (for example, FIGS. 79, 80, Example of pattern 6 (electric power cut 1, power cut 2) shown in FIG. 81).

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the electric power is displayed. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell when the bell alignment was not derived due to the disconnection and then recovered from the power failure, and in the game in which the push order bell was won. As a result, the bell alignment is derived, and when the power is cut off while the stop switch pressing operation is continued and then the power is restored with the stop switch pressed released, after the power failure is restored. The winning determination process is performed without causing an error regarding the winning determination, and the winning of Bell 1 is generated. As a result, the winning of the bell 1 is not canceled due to the power failure, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(4-3) An advantageous lighting unit (for example, a section) relating to an advantageous state (for example, AT) controlled by a game control means (for example, main control unit 41) that restarts power supply to the slot machine and controls the game. After the lighting of the display LED 19) is resumed, the control for displaying the warning image is started (for example, the pattern 6 (electric power cut 1 and power cut 2) shown in FIGS. 79, 80, and 81).

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 6, when recovering from the power failure during AT, the section display LED 19 first lights up as before the power failure, and then it is determined that a prize has been generated by the prize determination. The section display LED 19 is turned off based on the condition that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and then a warning image is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). As a result, when returning from the power failure, the section display LED 19 is first returned to the state before the power failure, and then the winning determination is performed in the same manner as the original process in which the power failure does not occur, so that the game can be played smoothly. Can proceed.

(5-1) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be individually identified is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means for determining a display result that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13)) and
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive the display result, and
It is provided with a winning determination means (for example, a process of determining a winning by the main control unit 41 (Sb49 shown in FIG. 14)) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result.
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined determination result (for example, a push order bell is won), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, a push order for winning the bell 1 shown in FIG. 11). When a predetermined display result (for example, bell alignment) is derived by operating the derivation operation means in (), a specific process (for example, payout of medals) is executed (for example, pattern 5 shown in FIG. 77). Example),
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the out-licensing operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. As a result, even when the predetermined display result is not derived, the specific process is executed (for example, the example of the pattern 6 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81).
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (for example, a loss winning), when the predetermined display result is derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped. The specific process is not executed (for example, the example of the pattern 8 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 84 and 86).
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the predetermined display result is derived by operating the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result, and the derivation operation means is derived. The period from when the power supply to the slot machine is stopped while the operation of the above is continued and then when the power supply is restarted while the operation of the out-licensing operation means is released until the winning determination is made (for example,). The third specific period shown in FIG. 82) is the result of the derivation operation means being operated in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result in the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result. The period from when the predetermined display result is derived and the operation of the out-licensing operation means is released without stopping the power supply to the slot machine in a state where the operation of the out-licensing operation means is continued until the winning determination is performed ( For example, it is set to be longer than the second specific period shown in FIG. 78).

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 5, in the game in which the push order bell is won, the bell alignment is derived by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell. When it is done, the medal will be paid out. Further, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the bell is turned off. Even if the match is not derived, the medal will be paid out. As a result, in the game in which the push order bell is won, the medals are paid out regardless of whether or not there is a power failure, which makes the player feel dissatisfied that the medals are not paid out due to the power failure. Absent. On the other hand, as illustrated in Pattern 8, in the game in which the loss is won, the medal is not paid out when the bell alignment is derived by the electric power failure. As a result, in the game in which the loser is won, the medal is not paid out even if the bell alignment is derived, so that the medal may be paid out even though the loser is won. Absent. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 82, in the third specific period from the time when the power is restored to the time when the main control unit 41 performs the winning determination process, after the initial setting process is performed in accordance with the recovery from the power failure. Further, in the reel stop control process, the timer interrupt wait process is performed a predetermined number of times when the power is restored from the power failure, so that the third stop operation is completed when the power failure does not occur as in the example shown in FIG. 78. It is longer than the second specific period from the time when the winning judgment process is performed. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of time required for control to return to the state before the power failure. Therefore, after the symbol combination in which the prize is generated is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the prize determination process is performed. Appropriate control can be performed even if the power is cut off before the operation is performed. As described above, the game can proceed smoothly.

(5-2) Further provided with a winning determination means (for example, a winning determination process by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result.
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, the push order bell is won), the winning determination means operates the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. Despite this, when the predetermined display result (for example, bell alignment) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, an error related to the winning determination is not generated (for example, FIGS. 79, 80, Example of pattern 6 (electric power cut 1, power cut 2) shown in FIG. 81).

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the electric power is displayed. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell when the bell alignment was not derived due to the disconnection and then recovered from the power failure, and in the game in which the push order bell was won. As a result, the bell alignment is derived, and when the power is cut off while the stop switch pressing operation is continued and then the power is restored with the stop switch pressed released, after the power failure is restored. The winning determination process is performed without causing an error regarding the winning determination, and the winning of Bell 1 is generated. As a result, the winning of the bell 1 is not canceled due to the power failure, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(5-3) In the winning determination means, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped while the operation of the derivation operation means is continued, and then the power supply is restarted while the operation of the derivation operation means is continued. Occasionally, the winning determination is not performed (for example, in the reel stop control process, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are released from being pressed. Returning to the main process, the winning judgment process is performed).

Specifically, in the reel stop control process, on the condition that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are released from being pressed, the process returns to the main process and a prize is won. Since the determination process is performed, even if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is continuously pressed and the power is restored, the winning determination process is performed unless the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is released. Not done. As a result, regardless of whether or not there is a power failure, the winning judgment process is uniformly performed on the condition that all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and all stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are released. Because it is performed, the game can proceed smoothly.

(6-1) A plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) that can be identified by each are provided.
After the variable display unit is variablely displayed, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result combination which is a combination of the display results of a plurality of variable display units. In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1)
Predetermining means for determining a display result combination that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13)) and
A plurality of derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive a display result from each of the plurality of variable display units, and
A derivation control means (for example, a reel stop control process by the main control unit 41 (Sb48 shown in FIG. 14)) that controls to derive a display result combination, and
A grant display result combination (for example, a cherry symbol combination) in which the determination result of the prior determination means is accompanied by the grant of a game value (for example, a medal, a credit) than in the normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 7). The game state is controlled by the special state control means (for example, the CB by the main control unit 41) that controls the special state (for example, CB) having a high probability of becoming a grant determination result (for example, all small winning combinations) for which derivation is allowed. With processing (Sb59 shown in FIG. 14))
In the game in the special state in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the grant determination result, the plurality of derivation operations are performed in an operation mode corresponding to the grant determination result (for example, an operation timing for winning a cherry). When the grant display result combination is derived by manipulating the means, a specific process (for example, payout of medals) is executed (for example, the example of the pattern 11 shown in FIG. 91).
In the game in the special state in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the grant determination result, the slot is operated even though the plurality of derivation operation means are operated in the operation mode corresponding to the grant determination result. Even when the given display result combination is not derived due to the power supply to the machine being stopped, the specific process is executed (for example, the example of the pattern 12 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 92 and 94).
In the derivation control means, the specific variable display unit (for example, the left reel 2L) of the plurality of variable display units fluctuates in the game in the special state in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the grant determination result. When displaying, the specific derivation operation means (for example, the left stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific variable display unit among the plurality of derivation operation means is set to the first timing (for example, cherry as shown in FIG. 45). When the symbol is operated at the timing when the symbol can be drawn onto the winning line LN), the specific derivation operating means is operated at the second timing (for example, the timing when the watermelon symbol can be drawn onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45). The display results constituting the given display result combination (for example, the cherry symbol combination) are derived with a higher probability than when the operation is performed (for example, an example of the reel stop control shown in FIGS. 46 and 47).
In the game in the special state in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the grant determination result, when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the first timing, a specific effect (for example, FIG. 50 (B1), While the setting suggestion effect of the example shown in C1) and (D1) can be executed, the specific effect is not executed when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the second timing (for example, FIG. 50 (for example). Examples shown in B3), (C3), and (D3).

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 11, in a game in which all small wins are won during CB, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at the operation timing for winning the cherry, so that the cherry wins. The medal is paid out when the corresponding symbol combination is derived. Further, as illustrated in pattern 12, in the game in which all the small wins were won during the CB, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated at the operation timing for winning the cherry, the power was cut off. The medal will be paid out even if the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry prize is not derived. As a result, in the game in which all the small roles are won during CB, medals are paid out if the operation timing is correct regardless of whether or not there is a power failure, so that the medals are not paid out due to the power failure. It does not make the player feel dissatisfied. Further, when the left reel 2L is first stopped during CB, the player operates the left stop switch 8L at the first timing when a symbol other than No. 19 of the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage, and the left reel. Comparing with the case where the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing when the 19th "watermelon" of 2L passes through the middle stage, the cherry winning is more likely to occur when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing. .. Further, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect may be executed, while when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the setting suggestion effect is not executed. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game when the stop switch is operated at the first timing when the possibility of winning is high, and to promote the operation at the first timing where the display result combination in which the winning occurs is easily derived. Can be done. As described above, the game can proceed smoothly.

(6-2) Further provided with a winning determination means (for example, a winning determination process by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result.
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, all small winning combinations), the winning determination means operates the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. Despite this, when the predetermined display result (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry winning) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, an error related to the winning determination is not generated (for example, FIG. 92, an example of the pattern 12 (electric power cut 1 and power cut 2) shown in FIGS.

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 12, in the game in which all the small wins were won during the CB, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated at the operation timing for winning the cherry, When the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry prize is not derived due to the power failure, and then when the power is restored, and in the game in which all the small roles are won during the CB, the stop switch 8L, at the operation timing for winning the cherry. By operating 8C and 8R, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry prize is derived, the power is cut off while the stop switch pressing operation is continued, and then the power is restored when the stop switch is released. In any case, after the power failure is restored, the winning determination process is performed without causing an error regarding the winning determination, and the cherry winning is generated. As a result, the winning of the cherry is not canceled due to the electric power failure, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(6-3) After the power supply to the slot machine is resumed, the specific effect is not executed (for example, an example of pattern 12 (power interruption 1, power interruption 2) shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 94). ..

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 12, a power failure occurs after the stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing when the No. 8 bell symbol is located on the winning line LN in the CB, and then the power is transmitted. After returning from the disconnection, the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As a result, when a power failure occurs, the process after the power failure is restored can be smoothly proceeded by not uniformly executing the setting suggestion effect, and the game can be smoothly advanced.

(7-1) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be identified by each is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means for determining a display result that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41 (Sb15 shown in FIG. 13)) and
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive the display result, and
Basic processing means for executing basic processing (for example, main processing) (for example, main processing shown in FIG. 13 by the main control unit 41) and
An interrupt processing means (for example, a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 by the main control unit 41) that periodically interrupts the basic process and executes an interrupt process (for example, a timer interrupt process).
Specific processing means (for example, main control unit 41) that executes specific processing (for example, a game program) in the basic processing, and
A special processing means (for example, the main control unit 41) that executes a special processing (for example, a non-game program) different from the specific processing in the basic processing, and
A power failure recovery processing means (for example, the initial setting process shown in FIG. 12 by the main control unit 41) that executes a power failure recovery process (for example, initial setting process) when the power supply to the slot machine is resumed.
The minimum time timer value updating means (for example, the main control unit 41) capable of updating the minimum time timer value (for example, the timer value for one game time management) for timing the minimum time of the unit game in the interrupt process. (Counter update process shown in FIG. 29)
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined determination result (for example, a push order bell is won), an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result (for example, a push order for winning the bell 1 shown in FIG. 11). When a predetermined display result (for example, bell alignment) is derived by operating the derivation operation means in (), a specific process (for example, payout of medals) is executed (for example, pattern 5 shown in FIG. 77). Example),
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the out-licensing operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. As a result, even when the predetermined display result is not derived, the specific process is executed (for example, the example of the pattern 6 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 79 and 81).
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is a determination result different from the predetermined determination result (for example, a loss winning), when the predetermined display result is derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped. The specific process is not executed (for example, the example of the pattern 8 (power interruption 1) shown in FIGS. 84 and 86).
The minimum time timer value updating means is
While the specific process is being executed, the minimum time timer value is updated, whereas during the execution of the special process, the minimum time timer value is not updated.
During the execution of the power failure recovery process, the minimum time timer value is not updated, and the minimum time timer value is updated again after the power failure recovery process is completed (for example, the initial setting process as shown in FIG. 12). In, the timer interrupt is prohibited in Sa01, so that the timer value for one game time management is not updated by the counter update process, and then the timer interrupt is permitted in Sa27, so that the counter update process causes one game time. The management timer value is updated).

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 5, in the game in which the push order bell is won, the bell alignment is derived by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell. When it is done, the medal will be paid out. Further, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the bell is turned off. Even if the match is not derived, the medal will be paid out. As a result, in the game in which the push order bell is won, the medals are paid out regardless of whether or not there is a power failure, which makes the player feel dissatisfied that the medals are not paid out due to the power failure. Absent. On the other hand, as illustrated in Pattern 8, in the game in which the loss is won, the medal is not paid out when the bell alignment is derived by the electric power failure. As a result, in the game in which the loser is won, the medal is not paid out even if the bell alignment is derived, so that the medal may be paid out even though the loser is won. Absent. Further, during the execution of the game program, the timer interrupt process is executed to update the timer value for one game time management, so that the game can proceed smoothly, but the non-fraud detection is not related. Since the timer value for one game time management is not updated during the execution of the game program, the process of updating the timer value for one game time management and the process in the non-game program do not coexist. As described above, the game can proceed smoothly.

(7-2) Further provided with a winning determination means (for example, a winning determination process by the main control unit 41) for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the derived display result.
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result (for example, the push order bell is won), the winning determination means operates the derivation operation means in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. Despite this, when the predetermined display result (for example, bell alignment) is not derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, an error related to the winning determination is not generated (for example, FIGS. 79, 80, Example of pattern 6 (electric power cut 1, power cut 2) shown in FIG. 81).

Specifically, as illustrated in pattern 6, in the game in which the push order bell is won, even though the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell, the electric power is displayed. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell when the bell alignment was not derived due to the disconnection and then recovered from the power failure, and in the game in which the push order bell was won. As a result, the bell alignment is derived, and when the power is cut off while the stop switch pressing operation is continued and then the power is restored with the stop switch pressed released, after the power failure is restored. The winning determination process is performed without causing an error regarding the winning determination, and the winning of Bell 1 is generated. As a result, the winning of the bell 1 is not canceled due to the power failure, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(7-3) In the basic process, it is determined whether or not the minimum time timer value is a specific value, and when the minimum time timer value is not a specific value, the minimum time timer value is a specific value (for example, 0). ), The game does not proceed (for example, the process of Sb40 in FIG. 13), and when the minimum time timer value reaches a specific value, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited and the initial value is set to the minimum time timer value. Is set, and then the game proceeds (for example, the process of Sb41 in FIG. 13).

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) before the start of reel rotation in one game (Sb40), and the timer value for one game time management is a specific value. If it is determined that it is not (0), the game is waited without progressing until it is determined that the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0), and the timer value for one game time management is a specific value. When it is determined that it is (0), the game is advanced. As a result, the game is not advanced until it is specified that the minimum time has elapsed based on the timer value for one game time management, and the game is advanced when the minimum time has elapsed, so that the minimum time per game is achieved. Can be secured, and the game can proceed smoothly.

(8-1) A plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) that can be identified by each are provided.
After the variable display unit is variablely displayed, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result combination which is a combination of the display results of a plurality of variable display units. In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1)
Predetermining means for determining the display result that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41),
A plurality of derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive a display result from each of the plurality of variable display units, and
A derivation control means that controls the derivation of the display result (for example, a process of performing reel control by the main control unit 41) and
A state control means for controlling any of a plurality of types of states (for example, a process for controlling a game state by the main control unit 41) and
It is provided with an effect means for executing the effect (for example, a process for executing the effect by the sub control unit 91).
Of the display result combinations, the granting with the addition of the game value (for example, a medal) The display result combination (for example, the symbol combination of the small winning combination) is accompanied by the addition of the first amount (for example, 14 sheets) of the game value. The first grant display result combination (for example, the symbol combination of the technical intervention role) and the second grant display result combination (for example, cherry, watermelon, bell 1) accompanied by the addition of the second amount (for example, 15 sheets) of game value. , Bell 2 design combination) and
The plurality of types of states include a normal state, and a first special state (for example, CB) and a second special state (for example, BB) in which the probability of deriving the given display result combination is higher than that of the normal state. And included,
The derivation control means is among the plurality of derivation operation means when the specific variable display unit (for example, the left reel 2L) of the plurality of variable display units is variably displaying in the first special state. The specific derivation operation means (for example, the left stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific variable display unit was operated at the first timing (for example, the timing at which the cherry symbol can be pulled onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45). Occasionally, there is a higher probability that the specific derivation operation means is operated at the second timing (for example, the timing at which the watermelon symbol can be drawn onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45). For example, the display results constituting the cherry or the symbol combination of the technical intervention role are derived (for example, an example of the reel control shown in FIGS. 46 and 47).
In the first special state, the effect means a timing at which the specific derivation operation means can draw the 8th or 9th of the 1st timings (for example, the 1st timing shown in FIG. 45) onto the winning line LN. ), While the specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting a set value as shown in FIG. 50 (D1)) can be executed, the specific derivation operation means has the second timing (for example, for example). When the watermelon symbol is operated at the timing when the watermelon symbol can be drawn onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45), the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, an example of the setting suggestion effect in the CB shown in FIG. 50).
The derivation control means is the first grant display result combination (for example, when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the first timing when the specific variable display unit is variablely displaying in the second special state. , The display result constituting the technical intervention combination) is derived, and when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the second timing, the second grant display result combination (for example, the symbol combination of bell 1) is configured. Derivation of the display result to be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, in the CB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing at which the cherry symbol can be pulled onto the winning line LN, the watermelon symbol is selected as the winning line. It is easier to generate a prize than when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing when it can be pulled into the LN. Further, while the setting suggestion effect can be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. .. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the left stop switch 8L at the first timing. Furthermore, during BB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, 14 medals can be paid out by winning the technical intervention role, whereas the left stop switch 8L is at the second timing. When operated, Bell 1 can be won and 15 medals can be paid out. As described above, since the operation of the left stop switch 8L by the first timing that facilitates the generation of winning in the CB can be used as the operation for adjusting the number of sheets in the BB, the left stop switch 8L by the first timing can be used. It is possible to make the player aware of the operation of the above with multiple types of bonuses. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by concentrating the players on the game. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly.

(8-2) A plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) that can be identified by each are provided.
After the variable display unit is variablely displayed, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result combination which is a combination of the display results of a plurality of variable display units. In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1)
Predetermining means for determining the display result that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41),
A plurality of derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated to derive a display result from each of the plurality of variable display units, and
A derivation control means that controls the derivation of the display result (for example, a process of performing reel control by the main control unit 41) and
A state control means for controlling any of a plurality of types of states (for example, a process for controlling a game state by the main control unit 41) and
An effect means for executing an effect (for example, a process for executing an effect by the sub control unit 91) and
It is provided with an information display means for displaying information (for example, a process of controlling the display on the liquid crystal display 51 by the sub control unit 91).
The plurality of types of states include a normal state and a first special state (for example, a bonus) in which there is a higher probability that the derivation of an added display result combination accompanied by the addition of game value is permitted than in the normal state. (For example, CB) and a second special state (for example, BB) are included.
The derivation control means is among the plurality of derivation operation means when the specific variable display unit (for example, the left reel 2L) of the plurality of variable display units is variably displaying in the first special state. The specific derivation operation means (for example, the left stop switch 8L) corresponding to the specific variable display unit was operated at the first timing (for example, the timing at which the cherry symbol can be pulled onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45). Occasionally, there is a higher probability that the specific derivation operation means is operated at the second timing (for example, the timing at which the watermelon symbol can be drawn onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45). For example, the display results constituting the cherry or the symbol combination of the technical intervention role are derived (for example, an example of the reel control shown in FIGS. 46 and 47).
In the first special state, the effect means a timing at which the specific derivation operation means can draw the 8th or 9th of the 1st timings (for example, the 1st timing shown in FIG. 45) onto the winning line LN. ), While the specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting a set value as shown in FIG. 50 (D1)) can be executed, the specific derivation operation means has the second timing (for example, for example). When the watermelon symbol is operated at the timing when the watermelon symbol can be drawn onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45), the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, an example of the setting suggestion effect in the CB shown in FIG. 50).
The termination condition of the special state includes that a specific amount of gaming value is given in the special state (for example, CB ends with a payout of 150 or more, BB ends with a payout of 345 or more). ,
The information display means
The amount of game value that can be obtained in the special state (for example, the number of pieces that can be obtained display 61) and
The amount of game value acquired in the special state (for example, the number of acquired number display 63) and
A result image (for example, result images 51j, 51k) capable of specifying the result of the game in the special state can be displayed in an information display area (for example, a display area of the liquid crystal display 51) (for example, FIG. 61 (for example, FIG. 61). Display example shown in q),
When a predetermined amount of gaming value is given in the special state, the display of the amount that can be acquired is subtracted for each unit, and the display of the amount of acquisition is added for each unit (for example, FIGS. 54 to 57). Example of updating the number of sheets shown in),
When the special state ends when a predetermined amount of game value is given, the addition of the display of the acquired amount is finished after the subtraction of the display of the available amount is completed, and the addition of the display of the acquired amount is added. The result image is displayed after the end (for example, an example in which a bell is won in the final game in CB shown in FIGS. 58 to 60, and the result notification during the freeze shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is performed thereafter. One case).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, in the CB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing at which the cherry symbol can be pulled onto the winning line LN, the watermelon symbol is selected as the winning line. It is easier to generate a prize than when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing when it can be pulled into the LN. Further, while the setting suggestion effect can be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. .. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the left stop switch 8L at the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by concentrating the players on the game. Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 to 62, when the CB ends when 150 or more medals are paid out, the addition of the acquired number display 63 ends after the subtraction of the acquired number display 61 ends. After that, since the result notification is executed, it is possible to add the acquired number display 63 after the subtraction of the acquired number display 61 is completed, and the addition of the acquired number display 63 can be easily understood. .. Further, since it is possible to pay attention to the acquired number display 63, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode until the result notification is executed. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly.

In (1-2) described above, the "directing means" includes a display means for displaying an image (for example, a liquid crystal display 51), a sound output means for outputting sound (for example, a speaker 53), and lighting or lighting of light. It may be any of blinking light output means (for example, side lamp 27, reel backlight 28). Here, when the "effect means" is a display means for displaying an image (for example, a liquid crystal display 51), the "effect means" may be the same display means as the "information display means". That is, the "directing means" may be replaced with the "information display means". The "directing means" may be a display means different from the "information display means".

(8-3) The derivation control means is
In the case where the plurality of derivation operation means are operated in the first order (for example, forward push) in the first special state (for example, CB), when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the first timing, It is more advantageous for the player than when the specific derivation operating means is operated at the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 46, when the specific derivation operating means is pushed forward during the CB, the left stop switch at the first timing. When the 8L is operated, the cherry is always won, but when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the winning may be missed).
When the plurality of derivation operation means are operated in the second order (for example, reverse push) in the second special state (for example, BB) and the specific derivation operation means is operated at the first timing. A display result (for example, a cherry symbol) constituting the first grant display result combination (for example, a symbol combination of a technical intervention combination) is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the cherry is always won when the left stop switch is pushed forward during the CB, whereas the left stop switch at the second timing. When the 8L is operated, the prize may be missed. Further, when the button is pushed backward during the BB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the cherry symbol constituting the symbol combination of the technical intervention role is derived. In this way, the operation timing (first timing) of the left stop switch 8L, which is not disadvantageous during CB, is the same as the operation timing (first timing) of the left stop switch 8L for winning the technical intervention role during BB. There is, but the push order can be different between the two bonuses. As a result, the game is not monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(8-4) The derivation control means is the specific derivation operation when the plurality of derivation operation means are operated in the second order (for example, reverse push) in the first special state (for example, CB). When the means is operated at the first timing, the display result (for example, cherry symbol) constituting the first grant display result combination (for example, the symbol combination of the technical intervention combination) is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing when the button is pushed back during the CB, the cherry symbol constituting the symbol combination of the technical intervention role is derived. .. In this way, during CB, when the player is pushed forward, the cherry is always won when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, so that the player is not disadvantaged, and when the player is pushed backward, the first When the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing, the technical intervention combination can be won for adjusting the number of sheets, so it is possible to separate the operation order that does not disadvantage the player from the operation order for winning the technical intervention combination. it can. As a result, the game is not monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(8-5) The control period of the first special state is shorter than the control period of the second special state (for example, CB ends with a payout of 150 or more, while BB has 345 or more. Ends with payout),
In the first special state, the derivation of the first grant display result combination is permitted for each game by the predetermining means (for example, during CB, a small winning combination including a technical intervention combination wins each game).
In the second special state, the derivation of the first grant display result combination is not permitted for each game by the prior determination means, and only when the lottery is won, the first grant display result combination is derived by the prior determination means. Derivation is permitted (for example, during BB, the symbol combination of the technical intervention role can be derived only when the technical intervention role is won in the internal lottery).

Specifically, while the control period of CB is shorter than the control period of BB, a small role including a technical intervention role is won every game during CB, so that each game and technical intervention role can be won. On the other hand, during BB, the technical intervention role can be won only when the technical intervention role is won, so in the sense that each game can be challenged against the winning of the technical intervention role, the game during CB is more than during BB. It is advantageous for the person. In this way, during the CB, the player can be challenged every game for the winning of the technical intervention role, so that the CB that finishes earlier than the BB does not become as disadvantageous as possible than the BB.

(8-6) The production means
By displaying a specific image (for example, an image of a shooting star shown in FIG. 50 (D1) flowing) in the display area, the specific effect is executed.
When the specific effect is executed, a background image (for example, an image showing outer space shown in FIG. 50 (B1)) displayed in the display area is displayed as a white image (for example, a whiteout image shown in FIG. 50 (C1)). After switching to (image), the white image is switched to the specific image.

Specifically, in the CB, as shown in FIG. 50 (B1), an image showing outer space is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and then, as shown in FIG. 50 (C1), the liquid crystal display is once displayed. A whiteout effect is performed in which the display screen of 51 becomes pure white, no image is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 50 (D1), a setting suggestion effect is executed and a shooting star is flowing. The image of is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In this way, when the image of the setting suggestion effect is displayed, the whiteout image is displayed once, so that the player can pay attention to the image of the setting suggestion effect.

(8-7) The production means
Result images suggesting the result of the game in the first special state or the second special state when the first special state or the second special state ends (for example, result images 51j, 51k shown in FIG. 62). Is displayed in the display area,
When a prize is generated in the first special state or the game in which the second special state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the prize notification (for example, FIGS. 58 to 60) for notifying the occurrence of the prize is shown. The winning effect) is executed, and the result image is displayed in the display area after the winning notification is completed (for example, after the winning effect is completed as shown in FIG. 60, the result notification is performed as shown in FIG. 62. Will be).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 58 to 62, when a winning effect is performed due to a bell winning in the final game of the bonus, a result notification is performed after the winning effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning effect and the result notification from being mixed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to each of the winning effect and the result notification.

(9-1) A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be identified by each is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning effect means for notifying the occurrence of a winning (for example, a winning effect shown in FIGS. 58 to 60) (for example, a process for performing a winning effect by the sub control unit 91).
With a result display means (for example, a process of performing result notification by the sub control unit 91) for displaying a result image (for example, result images 51j, 51k shown in FIG. 62) showing the result of the game in a specific state (for example, a big bonus). ,
A state transition means (for example, a process of controlling the state by the main control unit 41) that shifts the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT state) after the end of the specific state.
It is provided with a delay control means (for example, a process of performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) that delays the progress of the game.
When the winning effect is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning effect ends (for example, the winning effect shown in FIGS. 58 to 60). (Freeze starts as shown in FIG. 61 (g)), and the result image is displayed during the execution of the delay control (for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (m) to 62 (q)). The result notification is performed during the freeze), suggesting the transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, as shown in FIGS. 63 (s) and 63 (t), the selection of the RT effect is selected after the end of the freeze. It is done. See FIG. 67).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 58 to 29, when a winning effect is performed due to a bell winning in the final game of the bonus, a freeze is executed after the winning effect, and a result is obtained during the freeze. Notification is performed. Then, after the freeze ends, the player selects the effect in the RT state that is controlled after the end of the bonus. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning effect and the result notification from being mixed, and it is possible to show the player a smooth effect to the RT controlled after the bonus ends. Therefore, it is possible to effectively display the result images 51j and 51k showing the result of the game. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly.

(9-2) The slot machine 1 displays a warning display means (for example, a main) for displaying a warning image (for example, the warning image 51e shown in FIG. 62 (q)) for calling the player about the game. (Processing to display a warning by the control unit 41)
When the winning effect is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning effect ends (for example, the winning effect shown in FIGS. 58 to 60). (Freeze starts as shown in FIG. 61 (g)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 62 (m) to 62 (q). ), A result notification is performed during the freeze, and a warning display is performed), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 63 (s), (t). ), The RT effect is selected after the freeze is completed. See FIG. 67).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (q), a result notification is performed during the freeze and a warning display is also performed. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress excessive games for the player by displaying a warning at a suitable timing such as during a freeze.

(9-3) The result image is a predetermined period (for example, FIGS. 61, 62, 67) after a related image different from the result image (for example, the door image 51b shown in FIGS. 61 and 62) is displayed. As shown in the above, it is displayed when the timing t4 to t5) when the door closing effect is executed has elapsed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, after the result start notification, the door image 51b is first displayed, and the door closing effect is executed so that the door image 51b is closed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67, after the door closing effect is executed for a predetermined period (the period of timings t4 to t5 shown in FIG. 67), the result images 51j and 51k are displayed via the spark display. In this way, even if the bonus ends, the result images 51j and 51k are displayed when the predetermined period elapses, so that the display of the result images 51j and 51k can be made conspicuous. Therefore, attention can be focused on the result images 51j and 51k. In the example of FIG. 61, the predetermined period is the period during which the door closing effect is executed, but as a modified example, the predetermined period is, for example, the period during which the door closing effect is executed and the spark image 51a. It may be the total period with the displayed period.

(9-4) The slot machine 1 is provided with a notification means (for example, a game auxiliary display 12) capable of notifying information (for example, the number of payouts).
The notification of information about the game performed by the notification means based on the winning prize generated in the game at which the specific state ends ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the display of the result image (for example, FIG. 62 (m). As shown in FIG. 63 (r), the display of the result images 51j and 51k starts, and after the display of the result images 51j and 51k ends by whiteout, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 ends. To do).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), when 15 medals are paid out in the final game during the bonus, a number indicating that 15 medals have been paid out on the game auxiliary display 12. "15" is displayed on the 7-segment display. After that, the number "15" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 while the winning effect, the result notification, and the alert display are performed, but the freeze ends at the whiteout shown in FIG. 63 (r). When shifting to the selection of the RT effect, the display of the number “15” on the game auxiliary display 12 disappears as shown in FIG. 63 (s). As a result, it is possible to effectively suggest to the player that the bonus state is switched to the RT state by changing the payout display on the game auxiliary display 12.

(9-5) The suggestion that the state shifts to the special state is a selection effect that allows the player to select the effect state in the special state (for example, an effect that causes the player to select the RT effect shown in FIG. 63 (s)). Is included,
By the selection effect, the effect state in the special state is determined before the state shifts to the special state (for example, before the RT screen shown in FIG. 63 (v) is displayed, FIG. 63 (t) shows. RT production is confirmed as shown).

Specifically, the RT screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (v), and then, as shown in FIG. 63 (w), before the game in RT is started by the start operation, it is shown in FIG. 63 (t). The RT effect is determined by the player's selection. As a result, it is possible to determine the production in RT without digesting the game in the RT state.

(9-6) When the winning effect is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning effect ends (for example, FIGS. 58 to 58). After the winning effect shown in FIG. 60 is performed, the freeze starts as shown in FIG. 61 (g)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIG. 62 (m)). -As shown in FIG. 62 (q), the result notification is performed during the freeze and the warning display is performed), and the display of the warning image ends when the delay control ends (for example, FIG. 63). As shown in FIG. 63 (r), the alert display ends at the boundary of the whiteout), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, shown in FIGS. 63 (r) to (t)). After the freeze is completed, the RT effect is selected (see FIG. 67).

Specifically, after the warning display is performed as shown in FIG. 62 (q), the whiteout is performed as shown in FIG. 63 (r), and the freeze ends at the whiteout and attention is paid. The awakening display ends. As a result, the warning display can be terminated at a suitable timing when the freeze ends.

(9-7) When a specific display result (for example, a 7-match symbol combination) is derived, the state shifts to the specific state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, a 7-match symbol combination is derived). Bonus prizes will be generated by being done),
When the specific display result is derived, the delay control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 52C), the freeze starts when a set of 7 symbol combinations is derived and the third stop release is performed. ), It is suggested that the state shifts to the specific state during the execution of the delay control (for example, a bonus winning effect is performed during the freeze as shown in FIGS. 52 (C) to 52 (E)). After the delay control ends, an effect that causes the player to select the effect state in the specific state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (G), the bonus effect is selected after the freeze ends).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), when a set of 7 symbol combinations is derived and the third stop release is performed, the freeze is started by the processing at the end of the game, and FIGS. As shown in E), a bonus winning effect is performed during the freeze, then the freeze ends at the whiteout as shown in FIG. 53 (F), and after the freeze ends as shown in FIG. 53 (G). The selection of bonus production is made. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect in the bonus without digesting the game in the bonus state.

(10-1) The result images 51j and 51k are determined after a special image (for example, a spark image 51a) different from the result image is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, a central portion of the screen in the liquid crystal display 51). Displayed in the area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (l) to (q), after the spark image 51a is displayed in the central portion of the screen, the result images 51j and 51k are displayed in the same central portion of the screen. ). The "special image" may be any image as long as it makes the display of the result images 51j and 51k conspicuous in the result notification. Unlike the character image, the special image may be an effect image or a decorative image that enhances the image to be conspicuous (result images 51j, 51k in the present embodiment). Further, when the image to be conspicuous (result image 51j, 51k) is decorated with a plurality of kinds of colors, the color of the special image described above is preferably a single color so as to further enhance the image to be conspicuous.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 62 (l) to 62 (q), the spark display is performed before the result notification is performed. In the spark display, the spark image 51a is displayed in the central portion of the screen, and then, in the result notification, the result images 51j and 51k are displayed in the same central portion of the screen. As a result, the display of the result images 51j and 51k showing the result of the game can be made conspicuous, and the player's attention can be drawn to the result images 51j and 51k. Therefore, the result images 51j and 51k can be effectively displayed. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly.

(10-2) The winning effect is performed from the start of the display of the door image 51b to the elapse of a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, at the timing when the display of the door image 51b is started). Therefore, since the winning effect is performed before the result images 51j and 51k are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the result images 51j and 51k from being hindered.

(10-3) Further, it is an effect related to the third stop operation that triggers the display of the door image 51b from the start of the display of the door image 51b to the elapse of a predetermined period, and is a liquid crystal display. A winning effect using the side lamp 27, which is a means other than the 51, is executed. Therefore, since the winning effect using the side lamp 27 is performed before the result images 51j and 51k are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the result images 51j and 51k from being hindered.

(10-4) The image in which the door image 51b is completely closed becomes the background image in the result notification. The door image 51b is displayed with a brightness lower than the brightness of an image different from the door image 51b (for example, the result images 51j and 51k). Therefore, since the brightness of the background image in the result notification is lowered, the result images 51j and 51k can be made conspicuous. Therefore, attention can be focused on the result images 51j and 51k.

(10-5) When the image in which the door image 51b does not move due to the completion of the closing of the door image 51b (that is, the background image by the door image 51b) is displayed, the result images 51j and 51k are displayed. Therefore, since the movement of the door image 51b does not hinder the display of the result images 51j and 51k, the result images 51j and 51k can be attracted attention.

(10-6) A means for controlling the progress of a game, the main control unit 41 for transmitting a command, and a sub control unit 91 for controlling an effect based on the command. The sub control unit 91 can control the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, the passage of a predetermined period is measured from the time when the freeze command is received in the final game during the bonus (timing t4 in FIG. 67). The liquid crystal display 51 displays the result images 51j and 51k after the lapse of a predetermined period is measured (timing t5 in FIG. 67). In this way, since the sub-control unit 91 that controls the liquid crystal display 51 measures the passage of a predetermined period, it is possible to easily manage the display timing of the result images 51j and 51k.

(10-7) The sub control unit 91 is an effect related to the display of the result images 51j and 51k, and turns on the side lamp 27 during the result notification. Further, the sub-control unit 91 turns on the side lamp 27 for a period from the time when the door image 51b is closed until the result image is displayed, and then turns off the side lamp 27. Therefore, after the result notification is completed, the side lamp 27 is turned off, so that the control load on the side lamp 27 is reduced.

(10-8) The spark image 51a is displayed so as to be higher than the brightness of an image different from the spark image 51a (for example, the door image 51b). Therefore, attention can be focused on the spark image 51a, and attention can also be focused on the result images 51j and 51k displayed in the central portion of the screen on which the spark image 51a is displayed.

(10-9) Execute control to display the result images 51j and 51k in order from the first digit (display in order from the smallest digit number) (1st digit → 2nd digit → 3rd digit) The numbers are displayed in the order of). Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that a numerical value having a large number of digits is displayed.

(11-1) A plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) that can be identified by each are provided.
After the variable display unit is variablely displayed, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a prize can be generated according to the display result combination which is a combination of the display results of a plurality of variable display units. In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1)
Predetermining means for determining the display result that allows derivation (for example, a process of performing an internal lottery by the main control unit 41),
A plurality of derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated for deriving a display result corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display units, and
A derivation control means (for example, a process of performing reel control by the main control unit 41) that controls to derive a display result according to a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation of the derivation operation means.
A state control means for controlling one of a plurality of types of gaming states (for example, a process for controlling the gaming state by the main control unit 41) and
It is provided with an effect means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a process of executing a setting suggestion effect by the sub control unit 91).
The determination result of the prior determination means includes a grant determination result (for example, a lottery result that allows the derivation of a small winning combination) that allows the derivation of the grant display result combination accompanied by the addition of the game value.
The plurality of types of gaming states include a normal state and a special state (for example, CB) in which the determination result of the prior determination means is more likely to be the grant determination result than the normal state.
When a plurality of variable display units including the specific variable display unit (for example, the left reel 2L) are variably displaying in the special state, the derivation control means is the specific variable display of the plurality of derivation operation means. When the specific derivation operation means (for example, the left stop switch 8L) corresponding to the unit is operated at the first timing (for example, the timing at which the cherry symbol can be drawn onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45), the identification The variable display unit is controlled to derive the first display result (for example, the cherry symbol), and the specific derivation operation means can pull the watermelon symbol onto the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45. When the operation is performed at the appropriate timing), the control for deriving the second display result (for example, the watermelon pattern) is performed on the specific variable display unit.
When the specific derivation operation means is operated in a state where a plurality of variable display units including the specific variable display unit are variablely displayed in the special state and a display result is derived to the specific variable display unit (for example, (When the left reel 2L is first stopped), when the display result derived to the specific variable display unit is the first display result, the display result derived to the specific variable display unit is the second display result. (For example, as shown in FIG. 46, when the combination is operated at the first timing, the cherry prize is won when the derivation of the “cherry” is confirmed, as compared with the case where the above-mentioned grant display result combination is derived. On the other hand, when it is operated at the second timing, it is not possible to derive the display result combination in which a prize is generated depending on the operation of the stop switches 8C and 8R).
In the special state, the effect means can execute the specific effect when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the first timing, while the effect means can execute the specific effect when the specific derivation operation means is operated at the second timing. The specific effect is not executed (for example, the setting suggestion effect is not executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, while the setting suggestion effect is executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first imming. To do).

Specifically, when the left reel 2L is first stopped during CB, the player operates the left stop switch 8L at the first timing when a symbol other than No. 19 on the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage. Compared to the case where the left stop switch 8L is operated at the 2nd timing when the 19th "watermelon" of the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage, the winner is generated when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the 1st timing. Easy to do. The case where the left reel 2L is first stopped is taken as an example, but among the first timings, especially the timing at which the "cherry" can be pulled in, when the derivation of the "cherry" is confirmed Since the winning is confirmed, even when the left reel 2L is secondly stopped, a display result combination in which the winning occurs is derived regardless of the timing of operating the stop switch thereafter.

Specifically, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect may be executed, while when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the setting suggestion effect is performed. Not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the stop switch is operated at the first timing when the possibility of winning is high. Further, by executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to promote the operation at the first timing in which the display result combination in which the winning is generated is easily derived. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a set value, but it is sufficient if the operation at the first timing can be promoted, and the set value may not be suggested. Further, in the present embodiment, the left stop switch 8L is set at the timing when the 8th or 9th symbol provided at a position away from the 19th symbol of the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage in the first timing. It is assumed that the setting suggestion effect is executed only when it is operated. However, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 10th symbol passes through the middle stage. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbols Nos. 1, 2, or 13 and 14 pass through the middle stage.

(11-2) Based on the operation of a predetermined setting operation means, one of a plurality of types of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player is selected and set. The set value setting means (for example, the main control unit 41) is further provided.
The specific effect is an effect that suggests which of the plurality of types of set values the set value set by the set value setting means is (for example, as shown in FIG. 51, the set value is When it is 1 or 2, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed is the highest, and when the setting value is 3 to 5, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed is the highest, and the set value is In the case of 6, the probability that the setting suggestion effect of the third aspect is executed is the highest).

Specifically, the setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests which of the plurality of set values the set set value is. Since the player can predict whether the advantage of the slot machine during the game is high or low by executing the setting suggestion effect, the player is more encouraged to operate at the first timing when the setting suggestion effect is executed. be able to.

(11-3) The effecting means is the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific variable display unit regardless of whether or not the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display unit other than the specific variable display unit is operated. The specific effect can be executed when the operation timing of is operated at the first timing (for example, when the right stop switch 8R, the middle stop switch 8C, and the left stop switch 8L are operated in this order, No. 8 is also performed. Alternatively, if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 9th symbol passes through the middle stage, the setting suggestion effect may be executed).

Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 can execute the setting suggestion effect regardless of the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. Therefore, the operation at the first timing can be prompted regardless of the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated.

(11-4) Each of the plurality of variable display units variablely displays a plurality of identification information in a predetermined arrangement order (when the reel 2 is rotated by the reel motor, the symbols arranged on the reel 2 are displayed. (Displayed in the perspective window 3 while continuously changing),
In the first timing, the specific first identification information (for example, the 8th or 9th symbol of the left reel 2L) among the plurality of identification information that is variablely displayed on the specific variable display unit is at a specific position (for example, The timing of passing through the middle stage) and the non-specific first identification information (for example, the symbols No. 1 and No. 2 of the left reel 2L or No. 13 among the plurality of identification information variablely displayed on the specific variable display unit). The timing when the 14th symbol) passes through the specific position is included.
The second timing is the timing at which the second identification information (for example, the symbols 18 and 19 of the left reel 2L) passes through the specific position among the plurality of identification information variablely displayed on the specific variable display unit. And
In the special state, the effect means executes the specific effect when the operation timing of the derivation operation means corresponding to the specific variable display unit is the timing when the specific first identification information passes through the specific position. (For example, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 8th or 9th symbol passes through the middle stage), and the operation timing is the non-specific first identification information at the specific position. When it is the timing to pass through, the specific effect is not executed (for example, the setting is suggested when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the symbols No. 1, 2, or 13 and 14 pass through the middle stage. Do not perform production),
The specific first identification information is arranged at a position farther from the second identification information than the non-specific first identification information (for example, the symbols No. 8 and No. 9 of the left reel 2L are all 19). While it is more than 10 frames away from the number 1 symbol, the 1st and 2nd symbols on the left reel 2L are 3 frames and 4 frames from the 19th symbol, and the 13th and 14th symbols on the left reel 2L are 19th. Only 5 or 6 frames are separated from the design).

Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 is a left stop switch at the timing when the 8th or 9th symbol provided at a position away from the 19th symbol of the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage in the first timing. When 8L is operated, the setting suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, in the sub control unit 91, the left stop switch 8L is set at the timing when the symbols 1, 2, or 13 and 14, which are close to the symbol No. 19 of the left reel 2L, pass through the middle stage in the first timing. When it is operated, the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Here, in the first timing, even if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 8th or 9th symbol of the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage and the cherry is won as a result, 19 of the left reel 2L In any case, even if the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 1st, 2nd, 13th, and 14th symbols close to the numbered symbol pass through the middle stage, and as a result, the cherry is won. Fifteen medals will be paid out. In addition, there is no difference in the likelihood of winning a prize regardless of the timing of the operation.

However, the symbols No. 1 and 2 and the symbols No. 13 and 14 of the left reel 2L are closer to the symbol No. 19 than the symbol No. 8 or 9. Specifically, the 8th and 9th symbols on the left reel 2L are separated from the 19th symbol by 10 frames or more. On the other hand, the symbols No. 1 and No. 2 of the left reel 2L are separated from the symbol No. 19 by only 3 frames and 4 frames. In addition, the 13th and 14th symbols on the left reel 2L are separated from the 19th symbol by only 5 frames and 6 frames.

Therefore, the time from when the 13th and 14th symbols pass through the middle row until the 19th symbol passes through the middle row, or after the 19th symbol passes through the middle row, the 1st and 2nd symbols The time to pass through the middle stage is shorter than the time from when the 8th or 9th symbol passes through the middle stage to when the 19th symbol passes through the middle stage. As a result, when trying to operate at the timing when the 1st and 2nd symbols or the 13th and 14th symbols pass, the operation is performed at the timing when the 8th or 9th symbol passes through the middle stage. It is more likely that the left stop switch 8L will be operated at the timing when the 19th symbol passes through the middle stage.

In this way, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the possibility that the left stop switch 8L is operated at the timing when the 19th symbol passes through the middle stage by mistake is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the left stop switch 8L at a timing at which it is unlikely that the left stop switch 8L will be operated at the timing when the 19th symbol passes through the middle stage by mistake.

(11-5) In the special state, the specific derivation operation means is operated in a state where a plurality of variable display units including the specific variable display unit are variablely displayed, and the first display result is displayed on the specific variable display unit. When derived, a prize is generated regardless of the operation on the derived operating means (for example, stop switches 8C and 8R) corresponding to the variable display unit during variable display (for example, as a stop result of the left reel 2L). If "cherry" is derived on the winning line, the cherry will be won),
When the specific derivation operation means is operated in a state where a plurality of variable display units including the specific variable display unit are variablely displayed in the special state and the second display result is derived to the specific variable display unit. No prize is generated by the operation of the derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8C and 8R) corresponding to the variable display unit during variable display (for example, when the watermelon symbol cannot be pulled in the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R). "Watermelon" is not derived in the middle row, and the derivation of the lost result is confirmed).

Specifically, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, the display result combination in which a prize is generated cannot be derived by the subsequent operation of the stop switches 8C and 8R. On the other hand, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, it is possible to derive a display result combination in which a prize is generated regardless of the subsequent operation of the stop switches 8C and 8R. As a result, winning is more likely to occur when the operation is performed at the first timing than when the operation is performed at the second timing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the operation is performed at the second timing, a prize can be generated depending on the operation timing. As a result, even when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

The method for easily generating a prize is not limited to this. For example, by reducing the timing at which the display result that does not generate a prize is derived when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing than when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. It may be easy to generate a prize. In addition, when comparing the first winning combination that can be won when operated at the first timing and the second winning combination that can be won when operated at the second timing, it rotates after the operation at the first timing. Of the symbols arranged on the reels, the number of symbols constituting the first combination may be larger than the number of symbols forming the second combination, so that winning may be more likely to occur.

(11-6) The derivation control means controls to have the variable display unit derive a display result within a predetermined maximum number of frames with the identification information as a unit frame when the derivation operation means is operated. (For example, the design can be drawn in the range of 1 frame or 4 frames).
The first timing is the first specific timing (for example, the number 9 of the left reel 2L) in which the number of frames drawn when the first display result is derived is less than 1 (for example, the number of sliding frames is 0). The timing when the symbol passes through the middle stage) and the first non-specific timing when the number of frames drawn when the first display result is derived is 1 or more and less than or equal to the maximum number of frames (for example, the number of sliding frames is 1). (For example, the timing when the 8th symbol of the left reel 2L passes through the middle stage)
The accuracy of the set value suggested in the specific effect executed when the derivation operation means is operated at the first specific timing is when the derivation operation means is operated at the first non-specific timing. The accuracy of the set value suggested in the specific effect to be executed is higher than the accuracy (for example, as shown in FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (B)), when the bias of the execution probability is 0 and the number of sliding frames is 0. Is larger than when the number of sliding frames is 1).

Specifically, among the timings when the 8th or 9th symbol passes through the middle stage, the accuracy of suggesting the set value is higher when the number of sliding frames is 0 than when the number of sliding frames is 1. .. For example, whether or not the stop switch 8 can be operated aiming at the timing when a specific symbol passes a predetermined position depends on the skill of the player. For example, a player with high skill can operate the stop switch 8 aiming at the timing when the number of sliding frames becomes 0, while a player with low skill operates the stop switch 8 aiming at the timing when the number of sliding frames becomes 0. Can not do it.

Since the same display result is derived regardless of whether the number of sliding frames is 0 or the number of sliding frames is 1, a player with low skill can operate the timing when the number of sliding frames is 0. I don't know if it is time to become or when the number of sliding frames is 1. On the other hand, a player with high skill can specify whether the timing of his / her operation is when the number of sliding frames is 0 or when the number of sliding frames is 1.

Therefore, with respect to the executed setting suggestion effect, the player with high skill can know whether the setting suggestion effect has high accuracy of suggesting the set value or the setting suggestion effect with low skill, but the player with low skill does not know. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of a player with a high skill in the game as compared with a player with a low skill.

(11-7) The derived control means is in the special state.
When the plurality of derivation operation means are operated in the first order (for example, forward push), the first grant display result combination accompanied by the grant of the game value (for example, medal) of the first value (for example, 15 cards). Control is performed to derive one of a display result combination (for example, a symbol combination accompanied by a cherry or watermelon prize) and a non-winning display result combination (for example, a lost result) in which no prize is generated.
When the plurality of derivation operation means are operated in the second order (for example, reverse push), the first grant display result combination (for example, the symbol combination with the winning of the bell 2) and the second value (for example, 14). A display result combination of either a second grant display result combination (for example, a symbol combination accompanied by a winning of a technical intervention role) and a non-winning display result combination is derived. Take control.

Specifically, in CB, one of the display result combination in which 15 sheets are paid out when the operation is performed in the forward direction and the display result combination in which no winning is generated (missing result). The combination is derived. On the other hand, among the display result combination in which 15 sheets are paid out, the display result combination in which 14 sheets are paid out, and the display result combination in which no winning is generated (missing result) when the operation is performed by reverse pressing. One of the display result combinations is derived.

Depending on the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, there is a possibility of winning one of a plurality of small winning combinations with different payout numbers, and there is a possibility of winning only one small winning combination. There are cases. Therefore, by changing the order of operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the situation during CB, it is possible to selectively derive the number of small wins to be acquired, and improve the interest of the game during CB. be able to.

(12-1) A variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, is provided, and after the variable display unit is variablely displayed, the variable display of the variable display unit is stopped to display a display result. In a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1) capable of generating a prize according to the display result.
Specific state control means (for example, main control unit 41) that controls to a specific state (for example, CB),
Specific state termination means (for example, main control unit 41) that terminates a specific state when a specific amount (for example, 150 medals) of game value (for example, a medal) is given.
A display means for displaying information (for example, a liquid crystal display 51) is provided.
The display means
The amount of game value that can be acquired in a specific state (for example, the number of items that can be acquired is displayed 61),
The amount of game value acquired in a specific state (for example, the number of acquired number display 63) and
The total acquisition amount (for example, the total number of acquisitions displayed 62) obtained by adding the acquisition amount of the game value acquired in the specific state to the acquisition amount of the game value acquired in the predetermined period prior to the specific state.
When the specific state ends, it is possible to display a result image that can specify the result of the game in the specific state.
The display means further displays the total acquisition amount larger than the acquisition amount.
The display means
When a predetermined amount of gaming value is given in a specific state, the display of the amount that can be acquired is subtracted for each unit (for example, the portion shown in FIGS. 54 to 57).
When a predetermined amount of game value is given in a specific state, the display of the acquired amount is added for each unit (for example, the portion shown in FIGS. 54 to 57).
When a predetermined amount of game value is given in a specific state, the display of the total acquired amount is added for each unit (for example, the portion shown in FIGS. 54 to 57).
When the specific state ends when a predetermined amount of game value is given, the display means ends the addition of the display of the acquired amount and the total acquired amount after the subtraction of the display of the acquireable amount is completed. The result image is displayed after the addition of the acquisition amount and the display of the total acquisition amount is completed (for example, FIGS. 58 to 62).

According to this configuration, since the addition of the acquisition amount and the total acquisition amount display is performed after the subtraction of the acquisition amount display display is completed, the addition of the acquisition amount and the total acquisition amount display can be easily understood. In addition, since it is possible to pay attention to the acquired amount and the total acquired amount, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode until the result notification is executed. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly.

(12-2) After the subtraction of the acquireable number display 61 is completed, the display of the acquireable number display 61 is not changed until the result images 51j and 51k are displayed, and the display is maintained. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the number of medals acquired by the player during the CB has reached the number that can be acquired.

(12-3) The display area of the effect image is divided into a first area 51c and a second area 51d. The brightness of the first region 51c is darker than that of the second region 51d. Then, the acquired number display 61, the total acquired number display 62, and the acquired number display 63 are displayed in the first region 51c where the brightness is dark. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the acquired number display 61, the total acquired number display 62, and the acquired number display 63.

(12-4) When the number of bets is set and the game is started, the number of medals required for setting the number of bets is collectively subtracted from the total number of medals displayed 62 and the number of medals displayed 63 (this example). Then, the part shown in FIG. 23). Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the number of medals required for the number of bets has been subtracted.

(12-5) The timing at which the acquireable number display 61 is subtracted for each sheet and the timing at which the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display 63 are added for each sheet are the same (in this example, (Parts shown in FIGS. 54 to 56). Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that one medal has been acquired and one medal has been subtracted.

(12-6) The timing at which the game auxiliary display 12 is added for each sheet and the timing at which the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display 63 are added for each sheet are the same (in this example, (Parts shown in FIGS. 54 to 56). Therefore, since the display of the game auxiliary display 12 and the total acquired number display 62 and the acquired number display 63 do not contradict each other, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

(12-7) The timing at which the total number of acquired sheets display 62 is added for each sheet and the timing at which the acquired number of sheets display 63 is added for each sheet are the same (in this example, FIGS. 54 to 56). The part shown). Therefore, it can be easily understood that both the number of acquired sheets and the total number of acquired sheets are increasing.

(12-8) The control to turn off the advantageous middle lamp 60 is started when the result notification is being executed, and the advantageous middle lamp 60 is turned off by the time the start operation of the next game of the final game of the CB is activated (12-8). In this example, the portions shown in FIGS. 61 and 62). Therefore, the advantageous middle lamp 60 can indicate the end of CB.

(12-9) The extinguishing control of the advantageous middle lamp 60 is a control for turning on the advantageous middle lamp 60 in a result notification mode different from the lighting mode in the CB, and then turning off the advantageous middle lamp 60 (in this example, it is turned off. (Parts shown in FIGS. 61 and 62). Therefore, it can be suggested that the advantageous middle lamp 60 is turned off by using different lighting modes. That is, it can be gradually suggested that CB is terminated.

(12-10) When a prize for Bell 1 occurs during CB, the first prize production is executed. In addition, when the first winning of the technical intervention role occurs during CB, the second winning effect is executed. In addition, in the past games in the CB, the technical intervening role has won a prize once (14 cards are paid out), and the game can be the final game of the CB due to the occurrence of the prize (in this embodiment, the number of cards paid out is 344). When the technical intervening role wins a prize in (a game in which the number of cards that can be obtained becomes one), the first winning effect is executed. (In this example, the parts shown in FIGS. 64 and 65). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the mistake of the player who could not intervene in the technique to obtain the maximum number of medals in the final game of CB to be conspicuous.

(12-11) The first when Bell 1 wins a game in a game that can be the final game of CB in a situation where the technical intervening role has never won (that is, when the number of acquired cards is the minimum of 150). The flow is such that the result notification is executed after the winning effect is executed (in this example, the part shown in FIG. 65). Therefore, a player's mistake that could not intervene in the final game of CB by executing the common first prize production in the final game of CB even when the technical intervention to obtain the maximum number of medals was not performed. Can be prevented from being noticeable.

(12-12) Related images different from the result images 51j and 51k are displayed, and the result images 51j and 51k are displayed when a predetermined period has passed since the related images were displayed (in this example, FIGS. 61 and 62). The part shown). Therefore, since the display of the result images 51j and 51k showing the result of the game can be made conspicuous, the result images 51j and 51k can be attracted attention. Therefore, the result images 51j and 51k can be effectively displayed.

(12-13) A sound related to the display of the related image is output from the display of the related image until a predetermined period of time elapses (in this example, the portion shown in FIG. 67). Therefore, since the sound related to the display of the related image is output before the result images 51j and 51k are displayed, it is possible to prevent the display of the result images 51j and 51k from being hindered by the output of this sound. ..

(12-14) By the time a predetermined period elapses after displaying the related image, an effect related to the display of the related image is executed (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the result display mode is used. The part that executes the effect of turning on the advantageous middle lamp). Therefore, since the effect related to the display of the related image is executed before the display of the result image is performed, it is possible to prevent the display of the result image from being hindered by the execution of this effect.

(12-15) As the result image, a plurality of result images are displayed step by step. Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player for each of the plurality of result images.

(12-16) The related image is displayed at a brightness lower than the brightness of the image different from the related image. Therefore, since the brightness of the related image is lowered, the resulting image can be made conspicuous. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the resulting image.

(12-17) An image in which a predetermined image (door image 51b in this example) moves as a related image is displayed until a predetermined period elapses after the related image is displayed, and the predetermined image does not move as a related image. (Still image of door image 51b shown in FIG. 61 (k)) is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed (in this example, the portion shown in FIGS. 61 and 62). Therefore, when an image in which the predetermined image does not move is displayed as the related image, the result image is displayed, so that the result image can be attracted attention.

(12-18) After receiving the winning determination command that can identify that the condition for displaying the related image is satisfied, the sub-control unit 91 measures the passage of the predetermined period T by the timer, and the timer measures the predetermined period T. When the progress of is measured, the result images 51j and 51k are displayed (in this example, the portion shown in FIG. 67). Therefore, since the sub control unit 91 measures the passage of a predetermined period, it is possible to easily manage the display timing of the result image.

(12-19) This is an effect relating to the display of the result images 51j and 51k, in which the advantageous middle lamp 60 is made to emit light in the result display mode, and a specific period (in this example, the period of FIGS. 60 (g) to 62 (p)). ), Then the light emitting mode of the advantageous middle lamp 60 is set to a certain mode (in this example, the light is turned off as shown in FIG. 62 (q)). Therefore, since the light emitting mode of the advantageous middle lamp 60 that causes the advantageous middle lamp 60 to emit light in the result display mode becomes a certain mode after being executed for a specific period, the control burden of the advantageous middle lamp 60 is reduced. The lamp.

(12-20) After displaying a special image (spark image 51a) different from the result images 51j and 51k in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the result images 51j and 51k are displayed in the predetermined area (in this example, FIG. The part shown in 62). Therefore, since the display of the result image showing the result of the game can be made conspicuous, the result image can be attracted attention. Therefore, the result image can be displayed effectively.

(12-21) The special image (spark image 51a) has a higher brightness than the result images 51j and 51k (in this example, the portion shown in FIG. 62). Therefore, attention can be drawn to the special image, and the result images 51j and 51k are also displayed in the area where the special image is displayed. As a result, the attention to the result images 51j and 51k can be attracted. it can.

(12-22) A related image (door image 51b) different from the result images 51j and 51k is displayed, and the result images 51j and 51k are displayed when a predetermined period has passed since the related image was displayed (in this example, the figure). (Parts shown in 61 (i) to 62 (q)). Therefore, since the display of the result images 51j and 51k can be made conspicuous, the result images 51j and 51k can be attracted attention.

(13-1) The slot machine is
Equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variable display of multiple types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each.
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Basic processing means (main control unit 41) that performs basic processing (main processing),
An interrupt processing means (main control unit 41) that periodically interrupts the basic process (main process) and performs an interrupt process (timer interrupt process).
Specific processing means (main control unit 41) that performs specific processing (game program) in the basic processing (main processing), and
Special processing means (main control unit 41) that performs special processing (non-game program) in the basic processing (main processing), and
Minimum time timer value updating means (main control) capable of updating the minimum time timer value (timer value for one game time management) for timing the minimum time of one game in the interrupt process (timer interrupt process). With part 41)
During the execution of the specific process (game program), the minimum time timer value (timer value for one game time management) is updated by the minimum time timer value updating means, and during the execution of the special process (non-game program). , The minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is not updated by the minimum time timer value updating means.

According to this feature, the minimum time timer value can be updated as much as possible to facilitate the progress of the game, while the minimum time timer value is updated during the period when special processing related to fraud detection is performed. By not performing, the special process does not coexist with the process of updating the minimum time timer value. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly.

(13-2) In the basic process (main process), the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is a specific value (0) at a specific opportunity (before the start of reel rotation) in one game. If it is determined whether or not the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is not a specific value (0), the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is set. The game is not advanced until it is determined to be the specific value (0), and when the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is determined to be the specific value (0), the game is advanced.

According to this feature, the minimum time per game can be secured by advancing the game after the minimum time elapses without advancing the game until the minimum time elapses.

(13-3) When it is determined that the minimum time timer value (timer value for one game time management) is a specific value (0), the execution of the interrupt process (timer interrupt process) is prohibited, and the above. Set the initial value (value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) to the minimum time timer value (timer value for one game time management).

According to this feature, interrupt processing is prohibited when setting the initial value for the minimum time timer value, so the minimum time timer value is updated while the initial value is set for the minimum time timer value. It can be prevented from being stored.

(13-4) A flow path (medal receiving flow path 29b) in which a game medium (medal) inserted from the outside of the slot machine flows down and guides the flowed game medium (medal) to the inward side (hopper tank 34a). )
The special process (non-game program) is a pass monitoring process (medal sensor process) for monitoring the passing status of the game medium (medal) flowing down the flow path (medal receiving flow path 29b).

According to this feature, during the period during which the passage monitoring process for monitoring the passage status of the game medium flowing down the flow passage is being performed, the passage related to the detection of fraud is performed by not updating the minimum time timer value. The monitoring process is not mixed with the process of updating the minimum time timer value.

(13-5) When an abnormality is detected in the passage monitoring process (medal sensor process), error information (error code) is set.
It is determined whether or not the error information (error code) is set in the specific process (game program), and if it is determined that the error information (error code) is set, the error process is executed.
During the execution of the error processing, the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is updated by the minimum time timer value updating means.

According to this feature, since the minimum time timer value is updated during the execution of error processing, the game can be smoothly played after the error processing is completed.

(13-6) The error processing can be terminated without interrupting the power supply.

According to this feature, the game can be restarted smoothly even if error handling is performed.

(13-7) Special game state control means (main control unit 41) that controls a special game state (RB, BB) that is advantageous to the player, and
Special value (total cumulative number of bonuses paid out, total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses paid out) that is the game value given in the special game state with respect to the total number of gaming values (total cumulative number of bonuses paid out) given to the player ) Is provided with a special ratio display means (game machine information display 50) for displaying a special ratio (feature payout ratio, continuous bonus ratio).
The special processing (non-gaming program) uses data (total cumulative number of payouts, total cumulative bonus payouts, total cumulative continuous bonus payouts) for calculating the advantageous ratio (role payout ratio, continuous bonus ratio). This is a special ratio update process (data process for role ratio monitor) to be updated.

According to this feature, during the period when the special ratio update process for updating the data for calculating the special ratio is being performed, the special ratio related to the performance display of the game machine is not updated by not updating the minimum time timer value. The update process is not mixed with the process of updating the minimum time timer value.

(13-8) In the special ratio update process (data processing for role ratio monitoring), it is determined whether or not the special game state (RB, BB) is controlled, and the special game state (RB, BB) is set. When it is determined that the control is performed, it is determined whether or not the total number of game values (total cumulative number of payouts) given to the player has reached the upper limit, and the upper limit has been reached. If it is determined that the special value (total cumulative number of bonuses paid out, total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses paid out) is not updated, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the special value is determined. The process of updating the value (total cumulative number of bonuses paid out, total cumulative number of consecutive bonuses paid out) is performed.

According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the special value from being updated regardless of the situation where the total number of gaming values given to the player cannot be updated.

(13-9) Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
The operation mode instruction means (navigation notification) for instructing the operation mode of the derivation operation means is provided.
In addition to the special ratio (feature payout ratio, continuous bonus payout ratio), the special ratio display means has the special value (total) with respect to the total number of game values (total cumulative number of payouts) given to the player. The instruction value (navigation), which is the value for the game, is given by instructing the operation mode that is advantageous to the player by the operation mode instruction means (navigation notification) and the cumulative number of bonuses paid out, the total number of continuous bonuses paid out). It is possible to display the instruction-included ratio (instruction-included accessory ratio), which is the ratio of the instruction-included value (cumulative instruction-included accessory number to be paid out), which is the sum of the number of items to be paid out when notified.
In the special ratio update process (data processing for role ratio monitoring), it is determined whether or not the total number of game values (total cumulative number of payouts) given to the player has reached the upper limit value, and the upper limit value is determined. If it is determined that the value has been reached, the process of updating the indicated value (cumulative number of instructed accessories paid out) is not performed, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the special game It is determined whether or not it is controlled by the state (BB), and if it is determined that it is controlled by the special gaming state (BB), the indicated value (cumulative number of instructed bonuses paid out) is updated. When the process is performed and it is determined that the special gaming state (BB) is not controlled, it is determined whether or not an operation mode advantageous to the player is instructed by the operation mode instruction means (navigation notification). When it is determined that an operation mode advantageous to the player is instructed by the operation mode instruction means (navigation notification), a process of updating the instruction-included value (cumulative instruction-included accessory payout number) is performed.

According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the indicated value from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total number of game values given to the player cannot be updated.

(13-10) The special process (non-gaming program) is a test signal output process (operation information signal output process) that outputs a test signal (stop execution position signal) to the test device that tests the slot machine. is there.

According to this feature, during the period during which the test signal output processing for outputting the test signal to the test device for testing the slot machine is being performed, the minimum time timer value is not updated, so that the slot machine The test signal output process related to the test should not be mixed with the process of updating the minimum time timer value.

(13-11) Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine whether or not to allow the occurrence of prizes,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
The operation mode instruction means (navigation notification) for instructing the operation mode of the derivation operation means is provided.
In the test signal output process (operation information signal output process), it is determined whether or not the operation mode of the derivation operation means is instructed, and when it is determined that the operation mode of the derivation operation means is instructed, When the process of outputting a test signal (stop execution position signal) for designating the instructed operation mode is performed and it is determined that the operation mode of the derivation operation means is not instructed, the determination result (winning) of the prior determination means. The process of specifying the number) and outputting the test signal (stop execution position signal) for designating the operation mode corresponding to the determination result (winning number) of the specified prior determination means is performed.

According to this feature, when it is determined that the operation mode of the derivation operation means is instructed, the process of specifying the determination result of the prior determination means can be omitted, so that a test signal for specifying the operation mode can be output. The process can be simplified.

(13-12) In the interrupt process (timer interrupt process), a plurality of timer values used in the specific process (game program) including the minimum time timer value (timer value for one game time management) are updated. The process (counter update process) and the process of updating the timer value used in the special process (non-game program) (time monitoring update process) are performed separately.

According to this feature, the process of updating the timer value used by the special process is not mixed with the process of updating the timer value used by the specific process.

(13-13) Pre-determination means (internal lottery) to determine whether or not to allow the occurrence of prizes, and
A predetermined signal output means (main control unit 41) for outputting a predetermined signal (test signal) capable of specifying the determination result of the prior determined means to the test apparatus is provided.
When the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is determined to be a specific value (0), the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value) is set to an initial value to obtain the minimum value. The predetermined signal (test signal) is output when the time counting is started and the initial value is set to the minimum time timer value (one game time management timer value).

According to this feature, the predetermined signal is output when the initial value is set in the minimum time timer value. Therefore, by specifying the output interval of the predetermined signal, the minimum time of one game is set on the test device side. Can be identified if is secured.

(13-14) In the interrupt process (timer interrupt process), the process of outputting the predetermined signal (test signal) is performed before updating the minimum time timer value (timer value for one game time management). Do.

According to this feature, since the update of the minimum time timer value is started after the output of the predetermined signal is started, the output interval of the predetermined signal can be surely set to the minimum time or more of one game.

[Modification example]
Although the main embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, a modified example of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

(About the pattern)
In the present embodiment, as a pattern in which the section display LED 19 is lit regardless of the presence or absence of power interruption, a case where the advantageous section is shifted from the normal to AT is illustrated as illustrated in the patterns 5 and 6. However, as a pattern in which the section display LED 19 lights regardless of whether or not there is a power failure, the pattern shifts from CZ to AT or a specialized zone, from an advantageous section normal to a specialized zone, or from a normal section to an advantageous section. In any case where the section display LED 19 is lit, such as when the interval display LED 19 is turned on, the examples of the pattern 5 and the pattern 6 may be applied.

In the present embodiment, as a pattern in which the section display LED 19 is turned off regardless of the presence or absence of power interruption, as illustrated in patterns 5 and 6, the limiter condition is that the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches 2400. Is illustrated. However, as a pattern in which the section display LED 19 is turned off regardless of whether or not there is a power failure, when the limiter condition is satisfied when the number of digestion games reaches 1500 games in the advantageous section, or a section such as AT or a special zone. An interval such as when an arbitrary end condition (for example, the number of assigned AT games or the number of specialized zone games is exhausted and the CZ or the advantageous section shifts to normal) is satisfied in an advantageous state such that the display LED 19 lights up. In any case where the display LED 19 is turned off, the examples of the pattern 5 and the pattern 6 may be applied.

In the present embodiment, as a pattern in which the winning effect is not executed after the power failure is restored, a case where the power failure occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won during AT is illustrated as illustrated in pattern 6. However, as a pattern in which the winning effect is not executed after the power failure is restored, when the power failure occurs in the game in which all the small wins are won during the CB (for example, pattern 10 or pattern 11), or the small win is won during the BB. The example of pattern 6 may be applied in any case where the winning effect is executed, such as when a power failure occurs in the game.

In the present embodiment, in patterns 1 to 10, the third stop operation is the operation for the left stop switch 8L, but the operation for the middle stop switch 8C and the right stop switch 8R is also the case of the third stop operation. , Patterns 1 to 10 may be applied.

In the present embodiment, in the pattern 11 and the pattern 12, the case where the CT reel is first stopped is illustrated, but even when the CT reel is stopped second or the CT reel is stopped third. , Pattern 11 and pattern 12 examples may be applied.

(About winning production)
In the present embodiment, the side lamp 27, the reel backlight 28, and the speaker 53 are used to execute the winning effect, but any one of these notification means is used to execute the winning effect. You may. Even in this case, the winning effect may not be executed after the power failure is restored. In addition, among the notification means used for the winning effect when the power failure has not occurred, the winning effect is not executed after the power failure is restored by any of the notification means, whereas the power is transmitted by the other notification means. The winning effect may be executed after the return of the decision.

(About special conditions)
In the present embodiment, CB and BB are applied as special states, but the operation mode (operation order, operation timing) of RB (regular bonus) and stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which are a kind of bonus, is notified. AT (assist time), RT (replay time) where the probability of winning a replay is high, ART (assist replay time) which is AT and RT, CZ (chance zone) where the probability of giving benefits such as AT is higher than usual, etc. Other states may be applied to special states.

Further, in the present embodiment, CB is applied as the first special state and BB is applied as the second special state, but by selecting and combining any of the above-mentioned states, the first special state and the first special state are applied. 2 May be applied to special conditions.

In the present embodiment, the termination condition of each of CB and BB is that the number of payouts in the bonus reaches a predetermined upper limit, but for example, a small winning combination in the bonus or a 15-card winning combination The bonus may end when the number of times reaches a predetermined maximum number of games, or when the number of digested games in the bonus reaches a predetermined maximum number of games. Even in this case, the end condition may be set so that the control period of CB is shorter than the control period of BB. For example, CB may have a predetermined maximum number of cards and maximum number of games smaller than BB.

(About reel control during BB)
In the case of being pushed forward during BB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, the symbol combination of 14 cards (technical intervention combination) is derived, while the left stop switch 8L is operated at the second timing. When this is done, a symbol combination of 15 cards (bell 1) may be derived. Alternatively, in the case of being pushed backward during BB, when the left stop switch 8L is operated at the first timing, a symbol combination of 14 cards (technical intervention combination) is derived, while the left stop switch 8L at the second timing. When is operated, a symbol combination of 15 cards (bell 1) may be derived.

(About the advantageous section after the bonus ends)
In the game after the end of the bonus, there may be cases where it is controlled by AT and cases where it is not controlled by AT. Specifically, the advantageous section (CZ or AT) is won by the bonus winning or the rare combination winning before the bonus winning, and the section display LED 19 is lit while being controlled to the advantageous section during the bonus. Then, after the end of the bonus, the section display LED 19 continues to light when the advantageous section continues, while the section display LED 19 lights up when the bonus ends when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section without continuing. Turns off. The slot machine 1 is designed so that even if the section display LED 19 shifts to the normal section and the section display LED 19 turns off when the bonus ends, the section display LED 19 shifts to the advantageous section again within a predetermined number of games and turns on. May be good. For example, after the bonus ends, when the push order combination (for example, push order bell) that wins with a probability of 1 / 1.5 wins in the internal lottery, it shifts to the advantageous section again and the section display LED 19 lights up. May be good. Alternatively, if the advantageous section continues after the end of the bonus, it is controlled by the CZ after the end of the bonus and shifts from the CZ to the AT within 10 games, during which the section display LED 19 continues to light and the advantageous section does not continue. In that case, after the end of the bonus, the section display LED 19 shifts to the normal section and is temporarily turned off, but the section display LED 19 may be turned on again within 10 games under the control of the advantageous section (CZ or AT).

In this way, the slot machine 1 may be configured as follows, that is,
A variable display unit (for example, reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a symbol) that can be identified by each is provided.
In a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after the variable display unit is variablely displayed and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A winning effect means for notifying the occurrence of a winning (for example, a winning effect shown in FIGS. 58 to 60) (for example, a process for performing a winning effect by the sub control unit 91).
With a result display means (for example, a process of performing result notification by the sub control unit 91) for displaying a result image (for example, result images 51j, 51k shown in FIG. 62) showing the result of the game in a specific state (for example, a big bonus). ,
A state transition means (for example, a process of controlling the state by the main control unit 41) for shifting the state from the specific state to a special state (for example, RT) after the end of the specific state.
Delay control means (for example, processing for performing freeze control by the main control unit 41) that performs delay control (for example, freeze control) that delays the progress of the game, and
A process of displaying a warning display means (for example, a process of displaying a warning by the main control unit 41) for displaying a warning image (for example, the warning image 51e shown in FIG. 62 (q)) for calling the player about the game. )When,
A notification means (for example, a game auxiliary display 12) capable of notifying information (for example, the number of payouts) and
It is provided with a suggestion means (for example, section display LED 19) for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous section (for example, CZ or AT) which is more advantageous than the normal section.
When a specific display result (for example, 7 sets of symbol combinations) is derived, the state shifts to the specific state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, a bonus is obtained by deriving 7 sets of symbol combinations). Winning will occur),
When the specific display result is derived, the delay control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 52C), the freeze starts when a set of 7 symbol combinations is derived and the third stop release is performed. ), It is suggested that the state shifts to the specific state during the execution of the delay control (for example, a bonus winning effect is performed during the freeze as shown in FIGS. 52 (C) to 52 (E)). After the delay control ends, an effect that causes the player to select the effect state in the specific state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (G), the bonus effect is selected after the freeze ends).
When the winning effect is performed in a game in which the specific state ends (for example, the final game in the bonus), the delay control is performed after the winning effect ends (for example, the winning effect shown in FIGS. 58 to 60). (Freeze starts as shown in FIG. 61 (g)), and the alert image is displayed together with the result image during the execution of the delay control (for example, FIGS. 62 (m) to 62 (q). ), The result notification is performed during the freeze, and the warning display is performed), and when the delay control ends, the display of the warning image ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (r)). As shown in the above, the alert display ends at the whiteout boundary), suggesting a transition to the special state after the end of the delay control (for example, RT after the end of freeze as shown in FIGS. 63 (r) to (t)). The production is selected (see FIG. 67),
The advantageous section includes the special state (eg, becomes an advantageous section during the bonus).
When the special state ends, the suggestion effect continues to be executed without shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section (for example, when the advantageous section continues to light after the end of the bonus). And, there is a case where the suggestion effect ends by shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section (for example, when the section display LED 19 turns off after shifting to the normal section after the bonus ends).
Even when the suggestion effect ends by shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section when the special state ends, the push order of winning within a predetermined period (for example, with a probability of 1 / 1.5). Until you win the role, or within 10 games), you will move from the normal section to the advantageous section,
The result image is a predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61, 62, 67) after a related image different from the result image (for example, the door image 51b shown in FIGS. 61 and 62) is displayed. It is displayed when the timing t4 to t5) when the door closing effect is executed has passed.
The notification of information about the game performed by the notification means based on the winning a prize generated in the game at which the specific state ends ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the display of the result image (for example, shown in FIG. 62 (m)). As shown in FIG. 63 (r), the display of the result images 51j and 51k starts, and after the display of the result images 51j and 51k ends by whiteout, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 ends. ),
The suggestion that the state shifts to the special state includes a selection effect that allows the player to select the effect state in the special state (for example, an effect that causes the player to select the RT effect shown in FIG. 63 (s)).
By the selection effect, the effect state in the special state is determined before the state shifts to the special state (for example, before the RT screen shown in FIG. 63 (v) is displayed, FIG. 63 (t) shows. RT production is confirmed as shown).

As a result, even if the advantageous section ends after the end of the bonus, the advantageous section is controlled again within a predetermined period, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

(About setting suggestion production)
In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed by using the liquid crystal display 51 controlled by the sub control unit 91. The setting suggestion effect may be performed by using a device (reel 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.) controlled by the main control unit 41. Further, as a device controlled by the sub control unit 91, a setting suggestion effect is produced using a device other than the liquid crystal display 51, such as a speaker 53, an LED provided on the reel 2, and an LED provided on the outer periphery of the slot machine 1. You may do it.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the setting suggestion effect is executed regardless of the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. However, depending on the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

The setting suggestion effect is not limited to the one executed after the first stop operation, and may be executed at any timing such as after the second stop operation, after the third stop operation, or after the third stop is released.

The setting suggestion effect may be executed not only in the CB but also in the BB. In this case, also in the reel control during BB, the first timing and the second timing are provided as the stop timings in any of the reels, and are set when the stop switch is operated at the timing recommended by the player. The suggestion effect may be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the first timing and the second timing are provided as the stop timings of the left reel 2L in the BB. As described with reference to FIG. 49, the player can always generate a technical intervention role prize by operating the left stop switch 8L at the first timing, thereby adjusting the number of medals won in the BB. be able to. In BB, when the player operates the stop switch 8L at the first timing, the setting suggestion effect is executed, while when the player operates the stop switch 8L at the second timing, the setting suggestion effect is executed. It may not be. The setting suggestion effect executed in the BB has the same effect content as the setting suggestion effect executed in the CB as described in FIG. 50, and the setting suggestion used in the CB as described in FIG. 51. The same table as the effect mode table may be used. Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect executed in the BB has the same effect content as the setting suggestion effect executed in the CB as described in FIG. 50, but is used in the CB as described in FIG. 51. A table in which a probability different from the setting suggestion effect mode table is set may be used. Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect executed in the BB may have a different effect content from the setting suggestion effect executed in the CB as described with reference to FIG. 50. For example, the technical intervention role has won a prize. The effect content (such as a winning sound dedicated to technical intervention and a winning image dedicated to technical intervention (character image of "great!")) May be used. In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the number of medals won in the BB can be adjusted by winning the technical intervention role. As described above, the common setting suggestion effect may be executed or different setting suggestion effects may be executed in the first special state (CB) and the second special state (BB).

(About the first timing and the second timing)
In the present embodiment, as an example of the first timing and the second timing, the timing of stopping the left reel 2L is given as an example, but the first timing and the second timing are the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. It may be the timing to stop.

(About the timing of turning off the reel backlight)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), the reel backlight 28 is turned off before the result notification is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reel backlight 28 may be turned off after the result notification is executed, and the advantageous middle lamp 60 may be turned off after the reel backlight 28 is turned off. In this way, it can be gradually suggested that the bonus ends by turning off the reel backlight 28 and the advantageous middle lamp 60 in this order.

(About subtraction of earnable amount, total earned amount and addition of earned amount)
In the present embodiment, the subtraction of the acquired amount and the addition of the total acquired amount and the acquired amount are started at the same time to end the subtraction of the acquired amount first, and then the total acquired amount and the added amount are added. Although it was terminated, the subtraction of the acquireable amount is started in advance, and the addition of the total acquired amount and the acquired amount is started later than the subtraction of the acquireable amount, or the subtraction of the acquireable amount is started in advance. By starting the addition of the total earned amount and the earned amount after the subtraction of the earnable amount is completed, the subtraction of the earnable amount is finished first, and then the addition of the total earned amount and the earned amount is finished. May be good. In this case as well, the result notification is executed after the total acquisition amount and the addition of the acquisition amount are completed.

In the present embodiment, the subtraction of the acquireable amount and the addition of the total acquired amount and the acquired amount are performed at the same timing, but the timings of the subtraction and the addition may be different (timing shifts). Further, although the addition of the total acquisition amount and the addition of the acquisition amount are performed at the same timing, the timing of these additions may be different (timing shifts). Further, although the total acquisition amount and the acquisition amount are added and the addition on the game auxiliary display 12 is performed at the same timing, the timing of these additions may be different (timing shifts).

It should be noted that the various configurations, various processes, timings of various processes, and the like in the above-described embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 slot machine, 2C, 2L, 2R reel, 3 see-through window, 4 medal insertion part, 6
MAXBET switch, 7 start switch, 8C, 8L, 8R stop switch, 9 medal payout exit, 10 settlement switch, 11 credit display, 12 game auxiliary display, 13 game display, 19 section display LED, 27 side lamp, 28 reel backlight, 41 main control unit, 51 liquid crystal display, 53 speaker, 60 advantageous middle lamp, 91 sub control unit.

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each
In a slot machine in which a display result can be derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit after variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Predetermining means to determine the display result that allows derivation,
It is equipped with a derivation operation means that is operated to derive the display result.
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, when the predetermined display result is derived by operating the derivation operation means in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result, the specific process is performed. Executed
In the game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined determination result, the power supply to the slot machine is stopped even though the out-licensing operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the predetermined determination result. As a result, even when the predetermined display result is not derived, the specific process is executed.
In a game in which the determination result of the prior determination means is different from the predetermined determination result, when the predetermined display result is derived due to the power supply to the slot machine being stopped, the specific process is executed. Zu,
The specific process is a process of lighting an advantageous lighting unit related to an advantageous state controlled by a game control means that controls the game.
After the power supply to the slot machine is restarted, before the operation related to the progress of the game becomes effective, the lighting mode of the advantageous lighting unit can be visually recognized based on the operation before the power interruption supply is stopped. The slot machine where the process is performed.

Images